COD IFB 7213 Lake Ray Roberts VFD Replacement Specs
100% DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
PROJECT MANUAL
VOLUME 1 (DIVISIONS 00 – 26)
FOR
THE CONSTRUCTION OF
Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump
Station VFD Replacement
Project No. 190616
Bid No. 7213
Chris Watts Todd Hileman
Mayor City Manager
Todd Estes, P.E.
Director of Capital Projects
Frank Pugsley, P.E.
Director of Water Utilities
Hector R. Ortiz
Water Production Superintendent
Prepared for
The City of Denton
2019
By
City of Denton
Standard Construction Specification
Documents
Adopted September 2018
00 00 00 - 1
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Page 1 of 2
CITY OF DENTON
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
LAKE RAY ROBERTS WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION
VFD REPLACEMENT
Denton BID No 7213
Project No. 190616
SECTION 00 00 00
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 00 - General Conditions
00 05 10 Construction Contract Ordinance
00 05 15 Addenda
00 11 13 Invitation to Bidders
00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders
00 35 13 Conflict of Interest Affidavit
00 41 00 Bid Form
00 42 43 Proposal Form Unit Price (Missing from Provided Specs)
00 43 13 Bid Bond
00 43 36 Proposed Subcontractors Form
00 43 37 Vendor Compliance to State Law Nonresident Bidder
00 45 13 Bidder’s Minimum Qualification Statement
00 45 26 Contractor Compliance with Workers' Compensation Law
00 45 43 Corporate Resolution of Authorizing Signatories
00 52 43 Agreement
00 61 13 Performance Bond
00 61 14 Payment Bond
00 61 19 Maintenance Bond
00 61 25 Certificate of Insurance
00 72 00 General Conditions
00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions
00 73 73 Form 1295 – Certificate of Interested Parties
Division 01 - General Requirements
01 11 00 Summary of Work
01 11 60 Project Manual Language
01 14 00 Work Restrictions
01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures
01 29 00 Payment Procedures
01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination
01 31 19 Project Meetings
01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation
01 32 90 Safety Plan
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
01 34 00 Photographic and Videographic Documentation
01 35 00 Special Procedures
01 35 20 Alteration Project Procedures
01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements
01 42 00 References
01 42 40 Abbreviations
01 45 00 Quality Control
01 45 24 Special Tests and Inspections
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 60 00 Product Requirements
CITY OF DENTON
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
LAKE RAY ROBERTS WTP HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION
VFD REPLACEMENT
Denton BID No 7213
Project No. 190616
00 00 00 - 6
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Page 1 of 2
01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
01 79 00.1 Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation
01 79 00.2 Unit Process Startup Form
01 79 00.3 Facility Performance Demonstration Certification Form
01 80 00 Post Final Inspection
01 80 01 Commissioning
01 81 00 Project Design Criteria
01 81 02 Seismic Design Criteria
Division 26 – Electrical
26 00 00 Electrical – General Provisions
26 05 19 Low-Voltage Wires and Cables
26 05 29 Electrical Support Hardware
26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
26 05 36 Cable Tray
26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays
26 29 23 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
26 41 19 Electrical Demolition
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 05 10
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Construction Contract Ordinance
SECTION 00 05 10
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ORDINANCE
[Assembler: For Contract Document execution, remove this page and replace with the approved
Construction Contract Ordinance for the award of the project. Ordinance insert shall be on blue paper.]
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 05 10
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Construction Contract Ordinance
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 05 15
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Addenda
SECTION 00 05 15
ADDENDA
[Assembler: For Contract Document execution, remove this page and replace with any addenda
issued during bidding.]
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 05 15
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Addenda
Page Left Blank Intentionally
00 11 13 - 1
INVITATION TO BIDDERS
Page 1 of 2
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 SECTION 00 11 13
2 INVITATION TO BIDDERS
3
4 RECEIPT OF BIDS
5 Sealed bids for the construction of:
6
7 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement will be
8 received by the City of Denton Purchasing Office:
9
10 City of Denton
11 Purchasing Division
12 901-B Texas Street
13 Denton, Texas 76209
14 940-349-7100
15
16 until 11:00 A.M. D/CST, November 14, 2019, and bids will be opened publicly and read aloud at
17 11:00 AM D/CST in the Purchasing Conference Room, 2nd Floor, 901-B Texas Street.
18
19 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK
20 The major work will consist of the (approximate) following:
21 1. Removal and replacement of existing High Service Pump Station
22 480V Variable Frequency Drives.
23
24
25 DOCUMENT EXAMINATION AND PROCUREMENTS
26 The Bidding and Contract Documents may be examined or obtained on-line by visiting the City
27 of Denton’s Purchasing Division website at http://www.https://www.cityofdenton.com/en-
28 us/business/solicitations-contracting and clicking on the “See Open Solicitations” link to the
29 advertised project folders on the Laserfiche Weblink site. The Contract Documents may be
30 downloaded, viewed, and printed by interested contractors and/or suppliers. The contractor is
31 required to fill out the Certificate of Interested Parties Form 1295 and the form must be
32 submitted to the Project Manager before the contract will be presented to the City Council.
33 The form can be obtained at https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/tec/1295-Info.htm .
34
35 PREBID CONFERENCE
36 A prebid conference may be held as described in Section 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO
37 BIDDERS at the following location, date, and time:
38 DATE: November 6, 2019
39 TIME: 1:30 PM CST
40 PLACE:16525 Lake Ray Roberts Dam Rd.
41 Denton, Texas 76227
42 LOCATION:Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant Conference Room
43
44 PREBID WALKTHROUGH
45 After the prebid conference, interested parties may reconvene at the Lake Ray Roberts High
46 Service Pump Station site located at 9401 Lake Ray Roberts Dam Road, Texas 76227,
47 immediately thereafter at approximately 2:30 PM CST for a walkthrough of the project site.
48
00 11 13 - 2
INVITATION TO BIDDERS
Page 2 of 2
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 CITY'S RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT BIDS
2 City reserves the right to waive irregularities and to accept or reject bids.
3
4 CITY’S RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT BIDS
5 City reserves the right to waive irregularities and to accept or reject bids.
6 FUNDING
7 Any Contract awarded under this INVITATION TO BIDDERS is expected to be funded from
8 Revenues generated from {user fees} {bonds} and dedicated by {(Resolution)} of Denton’s
9 Public Utility Board to the work under this INVITATION TO BIDDERS.
10
11 INQUIRIES
12 Inquiry deadline: November 8, 2019, 5:00pm
13 All inquiries relative to this procurement should be addressed to the following:
14 Attn: Jane Rogers, City of Denton
15 Email: jane.rogers@cityofdenton.com
16 Phone: 940-349-7318
17 Please email all questions to above email address. Phone calls regarding questions are not
18 recommended.
19
20 ADVERTISEMENT DATES
21 October 30, 2019
22
23 END OF SECTION
00 21 13 - 1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 1 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 SECTION 00 21 13
2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3 Defined Terms
4
5 1.1.Terms used in these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, which are defined in Section 00 72
6 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS.
7
8 1.2.Certain additional terms used in these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS have the
9 meanings indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.
10
11 1.2.1. Bidder: Any person, firm, partnership, company, association, or corporation acting
12 directly through a duly authorized representative, submitting a bid for performing
13 the work contemplated under the Contract Documents.
14
15 1.2.2. Nonresident Bidder: Any person, firm, partnership, company, association, or
16 corporation acting directly through a duly authorized representative, submitting a
17 bid for performing the work contemplated under the Contract Documents whose
18 principal place of business is not in the State of Texas.
19
20 1.2.3. Successful Bidder: The lowest responsible and responsive Bidder to whom City
21 (on the basis of City's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award.
22
23 1.2.4. Purchasing Agent: City designated representative to assist in solicitation of bids
24 from vendors for City contracts.
25
26 2. Copies of Bidding Documents
27
28 2.1.Neither City nor Engineer shall assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
29 resulting from the Bidders use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
30
31 2.2.City and Engineer in making Bidding Documents available do so only for the purpose of
32 obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license or grant for any
33 other use.
34
35 3. Minimum Qualifications
36
37 3.1.The following minimum requirements must be demonstrated in order for the submission
38 to be considered responsive. The form can be found in Section 00 45 13 – Bidder’s
39 Minimum Qualification Statement.
40
41 3.1.1. Bidder shall provide documentation demonstrating three (3) years minimum
42 experience providing services similar to those indicated in Section 00 11 13 –
43 Invitation to Bidders. Experience shall include the following:
44 3.1.1.1. Repairs or renovations requiring system isolation and coordination of
45 activities at an active municipal water treatment facility
46 3.1.1.2. Installation and startup of piping, valves and equipment handling potable
47 water for public consumption
48 3.1.1.3. Large, multidiscipline projects which include extensive electrical,
49 instrumentation, architectural and civil work
00 21 13 - 2
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 2 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1
2 3.1.2.Bidder shall provide documentation of five (5) references from governmental
3 entities for which Bidder has performed similar services to those indicated in
4 Section 00 11 13 – Invitation to Bidders.
5
6 3.1.3.Bidder shall fill out provided safety record questionnaire.
7
8 4. Examination of Bidding and Contract Documents, Other Related Data, and Site
9
10 4.1.Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall:
11
12 4.1.1. Examine and carefully study the Contract Documents and other related data
13 identified in the Bidding Documents (including "technical data" referred to in
14 Paragraph 4.2. below). No information given by City or any representative of the
15 City other than that contained in the Contract Documents and officially
16 promulgated addenda thereto, shall be binding upon the City.
17
18 4.1.2. Visit the site to become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local and
19 site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the
20 Work.
21
22 4.1.3. Consider federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost,
23 progress, performance or furnishing of the Work.
24
25 4.1.4. Study all: (i) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
26 contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing
27 surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) that
28 have been identified in the Contract Documents as containing reliable "technical
29 data" and (ii) reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any,
30 at the Site that have been identified in the Contract Documents as containing
31 reliable "technical data."
32
33 4.1.5. Be advised that the Contract Documents on file with the City shall constitute all of
34 the information which the City will furnish. All additional information and data
35 which the City will supply after promulgation of the formal Contract Documents
36 shall be issued in the form of written addenda and shall become part of the Contract
37 Documents just as though such addenda were actually written into the original
38 Contract Documents. No information given by the City other than that contained in
39 the Contract Documents and officially promulgated addenda thereto, shall be
40 binding upon the City.
41
42 4.1.6. Perform independent research, investigations, tests, borings, and such other means
43 as may be necessary to gain a complete knowledge of the conditions which will be
44 encountered during the construction of the project. On request, City may provide
45 each Bidder access to the site to conduct such examinations, investigations,
46 explorations, tests and studies as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a
47 Bid. Bidder must fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
48 conditions upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests and studies.
49
00 21 13 - 3
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 3 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 4.1.7. Determine the difficulties of the Work and all attending circumstances affecting the
2 cost of doing the Work, time required for its completion, and obtain all information
3 required to make a proposal. Bidders shall rely exclusively and solely upon their
4 own estimates, investigation, research, tests, explorations, and other data which are
5 necessary for full and complete information upon which the proposal is to be based.
6 It is understood that the submission of a proposal is prima-facie evidence that the
7 Bidder has made the investigation, examinations and tests herein required. Claims
8 for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually
9 encountered in construction and as indicated in the Contract Documents will not be
10 allowed.
11
12 4.1.8. Promptly notify City of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies in or
13 between the Contract Documents and such other related documents. The Contractor
14 shall not take advantage of any gross error or omission in the Contract Documents,
15 and the City shall be permitted to make such corrections or interpretations as may
16 be deemed necessary for fulfillment of the intent of the Contract Documents.
17
18 4.2. Reference is made to Section 00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions for identification of:
19
20 4.2.1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to
21 the site which have been utilized by City in preparation of the Contract Documents.
22 The logs of Soil Borings, if any, on the plans are for general information only.
23 Neither the City nor the Engineer guarantee that the data shown is representative of
24 conditions which actually exist.
25
26 4.2.2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and
27 subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to
28 the site that have been utilized by City in preparation of the Contract Documents.
29
30 4.2.3. copies of such reports and drawings will be made available by City to any Bidder
31 on request. Those reports and drawings may not be part of the Contract
32 Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled
33 to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02. of the General Conditions has been identified
34 and established in Paragraph SC 4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is
35 responsible for any interpretation or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or
36 any other data, interpretations, opinions or information.
37
38 4.3.The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder (i)
39 that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Paragraph 4, (ii) that without
40 exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the
41 Contract Documents and applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences or
42 procedures of construction (if any) that may be shown or indicated or expressly required
43 by the Contract Documents, (iii) that Bidder has given City written notice of all
44 conflicts, errors, ambiguities and discrepancies in the Contract Documents and the
45 written resolutions thereof by City are acceptable to Bidder, and when said conflicts,
46 etc., have not been resolved through the interpretations by City as described in
47 Paragraph 6., and (iv) that the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate
48 and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the
49 Work.
50
00 21 13 - 4
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 4 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 4.4.The provisions of this Paragraph 4, inclusive, do not apply to Asbestos, Polychlorinated
2 biphenyls (PCBs), Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material covered by
3 Paragraph 4.06. of the General Conditions, unless specifically identified in the Contract
4 Documents.
5
6 4.5.The Bidder acknowledges and agrees to comply with the requirements of City Ethics
7 Ordinance No. 18-157.
8
9 5. Availability of Lands for Work, Etc.
10
11 5.1.The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for
12 access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work
13 are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto
14 required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment or storage of
15 materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for
16 by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
17 facilities are to be obtained and paid for by City unless otherwise provided in the
18 Contract Documents.
19
20 5.2.Outstanding right-of-way, easements, and/or permits to be acquired by the City are listed
21 in Paragraph SC 4.01 of the Supplementary Conditions. In the event the necessary right-
22 of-way, easements, and/or permits are not obtained, the City reserves the right to cancel
23 the award of contract at any time before the Bidder begins any construction work on the
24 project.
25
26 5.3. The Bidder shall be prepared to commence construction without all executed right-of-
27 way, easements, and/or permits, and shall submit a schedule to the City of how
28 construction will proceed in the other areas of the project that do not require permits
29 and/or easements.
30
31 6. Interpretations and Addenda
32
33 6.1.All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be directed to
34 City in writing on or before 2 p.m., the Monday prior to the Bid opening. Questions
35 received after this day WILL NOT be responded to. Interpretations or clarifications
36 considered necessary by City in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda
37 delivered to all parties recorded by City as having received the Bidding Documents.
38 Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other
39 interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
40
41 Address questions to:
42
43 City of Denton
44 901-B Texas Street
45 Denton, TX 76209
46 Attn: Jane Rogers, Purchasing Division
47 Email: monisa.rogers@cityofdenton.com
48 Phone: 940-349-7318
49
00 21 13 - 5
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 5 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 6.2.Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by
2 City.
3
4 6.3.Addenda or clarifications may be posted via the City’s online hosting site, which can be
5 located by visiting the City of Denton’s Purchasing Division website at
6 http://www.https://www.cityofdenton.com/en-us/business/solicitations-contracting and
7 clicking on the “See Open Solicitations” link.
8
9 6.4.A prebid conference may be held at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or
10 INVITATION TO BIDDERS. Representatives of City will be present to discuss the
11 Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. City will
12 transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as City considers necessary
13 in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied
14 upon and will not be binding or legally effective.
15
16 7. Bid Security
17
18 7.1.Each Bid for projects over $100,000, must be accompanied by Bid Bond made payable to
19 City in an amount of five (5) percent of Bidder's maximum Bid price on form attached,
20 issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01 of the General
21 Conditions, and in accordance with Texas Local Government Code 262.032.
22
23 7.2.The Bid Bond of all Bidders will be retained until the conditions of the Notice of Award
24 have been satisfied. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the complete
25 Agreement within 10 days after the Notice of Award, City may consider Bidder to be in
26 default, rescind the Notice of Award, and the Bid Bond of that Bidder will be forfeited.
27 Such forfeiture shall be City's exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults. The Bid Bond of all
28 other Bidders whom City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award
29 will be retained by City until final contract execution.
30
31 8. Contract Times
32 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, Milestones are to be achieved in
33 accordance with the General Requirements and the Work is to be completed and ready for
34 Final Acceptance is set forth in the Agreement or incorporated therein by reference to the
35 attached Bid Form.
36
37 9. Liquidated Damages
38 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement.
39
40 10. Substitute and "Or-Equal" Items
41 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the
42 Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items.
43 Whenever it is indicated or specified in the Bidding Documents that a "substitute" or "or-
44 equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to
45 City, application for such acceptance will not be considered by City until after the Effective
46 Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor
47 and consideration by City is set forth in Paragraphs 6.05A., 6.05B. and 6.05C. of the General
48 Conditions and is supplemented in Section 01 25 00 of the General Requirements.
49
50 11. Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others
51
00 21 13 - 6
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 6 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 11.1. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person
2 or organization against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.
3
4 12. Bid Form
5
6 12.1. The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; excel format must be used
7 when submitting.
8
9 12.2. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed and the Bid Form signed. Erasures or
10 alterations shall be initialed by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be
11 indicated for each Bid item, alternative, and unit price item listed therein. In the case
12 of optional alternatives, the words "No Bid," "No Change," or "Not Applicable" may
13 be entered. Bidder shall state the prices, in both words and numerals, for which the
14 Bidder proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish materials required. If
15 handwritten, all prices shall be written legibly. In case of discrepancy between price
16 in written/typed words and the price in written/typed numerals, the price in
17 written/typed words shall govern.
18
19 12.3. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a
20 vice-president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to
21 sign, as provided herein, Section 00 45 43 – Corporate Resolution of Authorizing
22 Signatories. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below
23 the signature.
24
25 12.4. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a
26 partner, whose title must appear under the signature accompanied by evidence of
27 authority to sign. The official address of the partnership shall be shown below the
28 signature.
29
30 12.5. Bids by limited liability companies shall be executed in the name of the firm by a
31 member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of
32 the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown.
33
34 12.6. Bids by individuals shall show the Bidder's name and official address.
35
36 12.7. Bids by joint ventures shall be executed by each joint venturer in the manner
37 indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be shown.
38
39 12.8. All names shall be typed below the signature.
40
41 12.9. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of
42 which shall be filled in on the Bid Form.
43
44 12.10. Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the
45 Bid shall be shown.
46
47 12.11. Evidence of authority to conduct business as a Nonresident Bidder in the state of
48 Texas shall be provided in accordance with Section 00 43 37 – Vendor Compliance
49 to State Law Non Resident Bidder.
50
00 21 13 - 7
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 7 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 13. Submission of Bids
2
3 13.1. Bids may be submitted electronically on Ion Wave or by hard copy with the Bid
4 Number and solicitation name in the subject line. Bidder shall consolidate
5 attachments as much as possible, and electronic bids shall not exceed 35MB total for
6 attachments.
7
8 13.2. Hard copies of bid bonds shall be submitted for both electronic and hard copy
9 submissions. Bonds must be submitted in a sealed envelope before the due date and
10 time as indicated in Section 00 11 13 – Invitation to Bidders.
11
12 13.3. Bids shall be submitted on the prescribed Bid Form, provided with the Bidding
13 Documents, at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or INVITATION
14 TO BIDDERS, and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the
15 Bid Number, Project title, the name and address of Bidder, and accompanied by the
16 Bid security and other required documents, as indicated in Section 00 41 00 – Bid
17 Form. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed
18 envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID
19 ENCLOSED" on the face of it. Hard copy submissions shall also include a flash
20 drive, containing a complete copy of the response with bid form in excel format,
21 and be addressed as follows:
22
23 City of Denton
24 901-B Texas Street
25 Denton, TX 76209
26 Attn: Materials Management/Purchasing Division, IFB ____
00 21 13 - 8
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 8 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 Modification and Withdrawal of Bids
2
3 13.4. Bids addressed to the Purchasing Agent and filed with the Purchasing Division may
4 be withdrawn prior to the time set for bid opening. A request for withdrawal must be
5 made in writing by an appropriate document duly executed in the manner that a Bid
6 must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any
7 time prior to the opening of Bids. After all Bids not requested for withdrawal are
8 opened and publicly read aloud, the Bids for which a withdrawal request has been
9 properly filed may, at the option of the City, be returned unopened.
10
11 13.5. Bidders may modify their Bid by electronic communication at any time prior to the
12 time set for the closing of Bid receipt.
13
14 14. Opening of Bids
15 Bids will be opened and read aloud publicly at the place where Bids are to be submitted. An
16 abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available
17 to Bidders after the opening of Bids.
18
19 15. Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance
20 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the time period specified for Notice of Award
21 and execution and delivery of a complete Agreement by Successful Bidder. City may, at
22 City's sole discretion, release any Bid and nullify the Bid security prior to that date.
23
24 16. Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract
25
26 16.1. City reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation the rights
27 to reject any or all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids
28 and to reject the Bid of any Bidder if City believes that it would not be in the best
29 interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is
30 not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to
31 meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by City. City also reserves
32 the right to waive informalities not involving price, contract time or changes in the
33 Work with the Successful Bidder. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units
34 of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies
35 between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will
36 be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures
37 will be resolved in favor of the words.
38
39 16.1.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if City has reason to believe that collusion exists
40 among the Bidders, Bidder is an interested party to any litigation against City,
41 City or Bidder may have a claim against the other or be engaged in litigation,
42 Bidder is in arrears on any existing contract or has defaulted on a previous
43 contract, Bidder has performed a prior contract in an unsatisfactory manner, or
44 Bidder has uncompleted work which in the judgment of the City will prevent or
45 hinder the prompt completion of additional work if awarded.
46
00 21 13 - 9
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 9 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 16.2. City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
2 other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which
3 the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must
4 be submitted as provided in the Contract Documents or upon the request of the City.
5 City also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance
6 data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for
7 incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the
8 Notice of Award.
9
10 16.3. City may conduct such investigations as City deems necessary to assist in the
11 evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial
12 ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and
13 organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract
14 Documents to City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
15
16 16.4. Contractor shall perform with his own organization, work of a value not less than
17 35% of the value embraced on the Contract, unless otherwise approved by the City.
18 Contractor shall complete and submit Section 00 43 36 – Proposed Subcontractors
19 Form.
20
21 16.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to lowest responsible and
22 responsive Bidder whose evaluation by City indicates that the award will be in the
23 best interests of the City.
24
25 16.6. Pursuant to Texas Government Code Chapter 2252.001, the City will not award
26 contract to a Nonresident Bidder unless the Nonresident Bidder’s bid is lower than
27 the lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas Bidder by the same amount that a
28 Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a Nonresident Bidder to obtain a
29 comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident’s principal place of
30 business is located.
31
32 16.7. A contract is not awarded until formal City Council authorization. If the Contract is
33 to be awarded, City will award the Contract within 120 days after the day of the Bid
34 opening unless extended in writing. No other act of City or others will constitute
35 acceptance of a Bid. Upon the contractor award a Notice of Award will be issued by
36 the City.
37
38 16.8. Failure or refusal to comply with the requirements may result in rejection of Bid.
39
40 16.9. Contractor is required to fill out the Certificate of Interested Parties Form 1295 and
41 the form must be submitted to the City Project Manager before the contract will be
42 presented to the City Council. The form can be obtained at
43 https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/tec/1295-Info.htm.
44
00 21 13 - 10
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 10 of 10
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 17. Signing of Agreement
2 When City issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the
3 required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement. Within 14 days thereafter
4 Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement to
5 City with the required Bonds, Certificates of Insurance, and all other required documentation.
6 City shall thereafter deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor.
7
8 END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 35 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Conflict of Interest Affidavit
SECTION 00 35 13
CONFLICT OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT
CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE - FORM CIQ
For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity
This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 23, 84th Leg., Regular Session.
This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code, by a vendor who has a business relationship as
defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the vendor meets requirements under Section 176.006(a).
By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local government entity not later than the 7th business day
after the date the vendor becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006(a-1), Local Government Code.
A vendor commits an offense if the vendor knowingly violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a
misdemeanor.
1 Name of vendor who has a business relationship with local governmental entity.
2 Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire.
(The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 7th business day after
the date on which you became aware that the originally filed questionnaire was incomplete or inaccurate.)
3 Name of local government officer about whom the information in this section is being disclosed.
Name of Officer
This section, (item 3 including subparts A, B, C & D), must be completed for each officer with whom the vendor has an employment or other business
relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a), Local Government Code. Attach additional pages to this Form CIQ as necessary.
A. Is the local government officer named in this section receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from the vendor?
Yes No
B. Is the vendor receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from or at the direction of the local government officer
named in this section AND the taxable income is not received from the local governmental entity?
Yes No
C. Is the filer of this questionnaire employed by a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an
officer or director, or holds an ownership of one percent or more?
Yes No
D. Describe each employment or business and family relationship with the local government officer named in this section.
4 I have no Conflict of Interest to disclose.
5
Signature of vendor doing business with the governmental entity Date
00 41 00 - 1
BID FORM
Page 1 of 4
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 SECTION 00 41 00
2 BID FORM
3 TO: Jane Rogers
4 c/o: Purchasing Division
5 901-B Texas Street
6 Denton, Texas 76209
7
8 FOR: Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
9
10 1 Enter Into Agreement
11
12 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement
13 with City in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform and furnish all Work as
14 specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the Contract Time
15 indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract
16 Documents.
17
18 2 BIDDER Acknowledgements and Certification
19
20 2.1 In submitting this Bid, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the INVITATION
21 TO BIDDERS and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, including without limitation those
22 dealing with the disposition of Bid Bond.
23 2.2 Bidder is aware of all costs to provide the required insurance, will do so pending contract
24 award, and will provide a valid insurance certificate meeting all requirements within 14
25 days of notification of award.
26 2.3 Bidder certifies that this Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any
27 undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive
28 agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation.
29 2.4 Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false
30 or sham Bid.
31 2.5 Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding.
32 2.6 Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing
33 for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph:
34 a. "corrupt practice" means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing
35 of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process.
36
37 b. "fraudulent practice" means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to
38 influence the bidding process to the detriment of City (b) to establish Bid prices
39 at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive City of the benefits of free
40 and open competition.
41
42 c. "collusive practice" means a scheme or arrangement between two or more
43 Bidders, with or without the knowledge of City, a purpose of which is to
44 establish Bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels.
45
46 d. "coercive practice" means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,
47 persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or
48 affect the execution of the Contract.
00 41 00 - 2
BID FORM
Page 2 of 4
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1
2 2.7 The Bidder acknowledges and agrees to comply with the requirements of City Ethics
3 Ordinance No. 18-757.
4
5 3 Time of Completion
6
7 3.1 The Work will be complete for Final Acceptance within 365 days after the date when the
8 Contract Time commences to run as provided in Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions.
9 3.2 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of
10 failure to complete the Work {and/or achievement of Milestones} within the times
11 specified in the Agreement.
12
13 4 Attached to this Bid
14
15 The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Bid:
16 a. This Bid Form
17 b. Required Bid Bond, Section 00 43 13 issued by a surety meeting the requirements of
18 Paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions.
19 c. Proposal Form Section
20 d. Vendor Compliance to State Law Non-Resident Bidder, Section 00 43 37
21 e. Conflict of Interest Affidavit, Section 00 35 13
22 f. Proposed Subcontractors Form, Section 00 43 36
23 g. Bidders Minimum Qualification Statement, Section 00 45 13
24 h. Corporate Resolution of Authorized Signatories, Section 00 45 43
25 i. Any additional documents that may be required by Section 12 of the Instructions to
26 Bidders
27
28 5 Total Bid Amount
29
30 5.1 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the
31 following bid amount. In the space provided below, please enter the total bid amount for
32 this project. Only this figure will be read publicly by the City at the bid opening.
33 5.2 It is understood and agreed by the Bidder in signing this proposal that the total bid amount
34 entered below is subject to verification and/or modification by multiplying the unit bid
35 prices for each pay item by the respective estimated quantities shown in this proposal and
36 then totaling all of the extended amounts.
37
38 Bid Item No. 1:
39 Replacement of Variable Frequency Drives VFD 3 and 4 with new 18 pulse VFDs at Lake Ray
40 Roberts Water Treatment Plant as shown on the Plans or as otherwise required by these Contract
41 Documents, for the amount of ____________________________________________________
42 _______________________________________________________________________Dollars.
43
44 Total Bid Amount: $_____________________________________
45
46 Bid Item No. 2:
47 Payment of travel expenses associated with Witnessed Testing of VFDs as specified in section
48 26 29 23, for the amount of _____________________________________________________
49 _____________________________________________________________________Dollars.
50
00 41 00 - 3
BID FORM
Page 3 of 4
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 Total Bid Amount: $_______________________________________
00 41 00 - 4
BID FORM
Page 4 of 4
CITY OF DENTON IFB 7213
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS
Revised September 20, 2018 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Station VFD Replacement
1 6 Bid Submittal
2
3 This Bid is submitted on _____________________________, 20___ by the entity named below.
4
5
6 Respectfully submitted,
7
8 By: ______________________________
9 (Signature)
10
11 _________________________________
12 (Printed Name)
13
14 Title: _____________________________
15
16 Company: _________________________
17
18 Address: __________________________
19 ___________________________
20 State of Incorporation: _______________
21 Email: ____________________________
22 Phone: ____________________________
Receipt is acknowledged of
the following Addenda:Initial
Addendum No. 1:
Addendum No. 2:
Addendum No. 3:
Addendum No. 4:
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 43 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Bid Bond
SECTION 00 43 13
BID BOND
KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, (Bidder Name) ,
known as “Principal” herein, and (Surety Name) , a
corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as “Surety” herein,
are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a municipal corporation created pursuant to
the laws of Texas, known as “City” herein, in the penal sum of five percent (5%) of Bidder’s
maximum bid price, in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, Denton County,
Texas for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a proposal to perform work for the following project designated
as
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the City shall award the Contract for
the foregoing project to the Principal, and the Principal shall satisfy all requirements and conditions
required for the execution of the Contract and shall enter into the Contract in writing with the City in
accordance with the terms of such same, then this obligation shall be and become null and void. If,
however, the Principal fails to execute such Contract in accordance with the terms of same or fails to
satisfy all requirements and conditions required for the execution of the Contract, this bond shall become
the property of the City, without recourse of the Principal and/or Surety, not to exceed the penalty hereof,
and shall be used to compensate City for the difference between Principal’s total bid amount and the next
selected bidder’s total bid amount.
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in Denton County,
Texas or the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas, Sherman Division.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have SIGNED and SEALED this instrument by
duly authorized agents and officers on this the _________day of ______________, 20____. .
By:
(Principal Name)
(Signature and Title of Principal)
*By:
(Surety Name)
(Signature of Attorney-in-Fact)
*Attach Power of Attorney (Surety) for Attorney-in-Fact
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 3 Section 00 43 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Bid Bond
(Impressed Surety Seal Only)
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 43 36
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Proposed Subcontractors Form
SECTION 00 43 36
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM
Each Bidder for a City procurement is required to complete the information below by identifying
the proposed subcontractors whom they intend to utilize and the approximate percentage of the
overall contract that will be allocated to each entity. Bidder is reminded that a minimum of 35%
of the Contract must be performed by Bidder’s company.
Company Name Type of Work to be Performed
Overall
Contract
Percentage (%)
General Contractor:
Subcontractors:
The undersigned hereby certifies that the subcontractors described in the table above will
be utilized for this project at the approximate percentage levels indicated above.
BIDDER:
By:
Company (Please Print)
Signature:
Address
Title:
City/State/Zip (Please Print)
Date:
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 43 36
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Proposed Subcontractors Form
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 43 37
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Vendor Compliance to State Law Non-Resident Bidder
SECTION 00 43 37
VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW NON- RESIDENT BIDDER
Texas Government Code Chapter 2252 was adopted for the award of contracts to nonresident
bidders. This law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as low bidder, nonresident
bidders (out-of-state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of business are outside
the State of Texas) bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or services in Texas at
an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident
bidder would be required to underbid a nonresident bidder in order to obtain a comparable
contract in the State which the nonresident’s principal place of business is located.
The appropriate blanks in Section A must be filled out by all nonresident bidders in order for your
bid to meet specifications. The failure of nonresident bidders to do so will automatically
disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B.
A. Nonresident bidders in the State of, our principal place of business, are required to be percent lower
than resident bidders by State Law. A copy of the statute is attached.
Nonresident bidders in the State of, our principal place of business, are not required to underbid
resident bidders.
B. The principal place of business of our company or our parent company or majority owner is
in the State of Texas.
BIDDER:
By:
Company (Please Print)
Signature:
Address
Title:
City/State/Zip (Please Print)
Date:
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 43 37
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Vendor Compliance to State Law Non-Resident Bidder
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 45 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Bidder’s Minimum Qualifications Statement
SECTION 00 45 13
BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT
List three (3) Government references, other than the City of Denton, who can verify the quality of service
your company provides. The City prefers customers of similar size and scope of work to this solicitation.
REFERENCE ONE
GOVERNMENT/COMPANY NAME:
LOCATION:
CONTACT PERSON AND TITLE:
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
SCOPE OF WORK:
CONTRACT PERIOD:
REFERENCE TWO
GOVERNMENT/COMPANY NAME:
LOCATION:
CONTACT PERSON AND TITLE:
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
SCOPE OF WORK:
CONTRACT PERIOD:
REFERENCE THREE
GOVERNMENT/COMPANY NAME:
LOCATION:
CONTACT PERSON AND TITLE:
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
SCOPE OF WORK:
CONTRACT PERIOD:
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 45 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Bidder’s Minimum Qualifications Statement
PROJECT INFORMATION FORM
Detail three (3) of the most recent projects Bidder’s firm has completed providing
services similar to this project:
Project #1
Name of Project:
Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number:
Original Contract Amount:
Final Contract Amount:
Contract Time
Allotted (Calendar Days):
Start Date for Project:
Final Completion Date for Project:
Number of Days to complete (calendar days):
Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues,
successes, or potential problems and solutions encountered. 26
IFB 7213 3 Section 00 45 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Bidder’s Minimum Qualifications Statement
PROJECT INFORMATION FORM
Project #2
Name of Project:
Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number:
Original Contract Amount:
Final Contract Amount:
Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days):
Start Date for Project:
Final Completion Date for Project:
Number of Days to complete (calendar days):
Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues,
successes, or potential problems and solutions encountered. 27
IFB 7213 4 Section 00 45 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Bidder’s Minimum Qualifications Statement
PROJECT INFORMATION FORM
Project #3
Name of Project:
Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number:
Original Contract Amount:
Final Contract Amount:
Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days):
Start Date for Project:
Final Completion Date for Project:
Number of Days to complete (calendar days):
Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues,
successes, or potential problems and solutions encountered. 26
IFB 7213 5 Section 00 45 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Bidder’s Minimum Qualifications Statement
SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE
The City of Denton desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government
Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to award of City contracts. Pursuant
to Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, the City of Denton has adopted the following written
definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a respondent prior to awarding City
contracts.
The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a respondent for this consideration
shall be:
The City of Denton shall consider the safety record of the respondent in determining the
responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or
safety of the citizens of the City of Denton, be it related or caused by environmental,
mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City
may consider, among other things:
A. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health
Review Commission (OSHRC), against the respondent for violations of OSHA
regulations within the past three (3) years.
B. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as
defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection
Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
(USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas
Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ),
the Texas Department of Health (TDH), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department
(TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments
responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or
regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States.
Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of
state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints,
indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial
final judgments.
C. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in
bodily harm or death.
D. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in
determining the responsibility of the respondent and his or her ability to perform
the services or goods required by the solicitation documents in a safe environment, both
for the workers and other employees of respondent and the citizens of the City of
Denton.
In order to obtain proper information from respondents so that City of Denton may consider the
safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding bids on City contracts, City of Denton
requires that respondents answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their
submissions:
IFB 7213 6 Section 00 45 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Bidder’s Minimum Qualifications Statement
QUESTION ONE
Has the respondent, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the respondent, or
anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of
OSHA within the past three (3) years?
YES NO
If the respondent has indicated YES for question number one above, the respondent must provide
to City of Denton, with its submission, the following information with respect to each such
citation:
Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of
offense, if any, and penalty assessed.
QUESTION TWO
Has the respondent, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the
respondent, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received
citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type,
within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement,
suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending
criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders,
and judicial final judgments.
YES NO
If the respondent has indicated YES for question number two above, the respondent must provide
to City of Denton, with its submission, the following information with respect to each such
conviction:
Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition
of offense, if any, and penalty assessed.
QUESTION THREE
Has the respondent, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by respondent,
or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted,
within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted in serious bodily injury or
death?
YES NO
If the respondent has indicated YES for question number three above, the respondent must
provide to City of Denton, with its submission, the following information with respect to each
such conviction:
Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if
any, and penalty assessed.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 45 26
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Contractor Compliance with Worker’s Compensation Law
SECTION 00 45 26
CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW
Pursuant to Texas Labor Code Section 406.096(a), as amended, Contractor certifies that it
provides worker’s compensation insurance coverage for all of its employees employed on Lake
Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Dewatering Improvements. Contractor further certifies that,
pursuant to Texas Labor Code, Section 406.096(b), as amended, it will provide to City its
subcontractor’s certificates of compliance with worker’s compensation coverage.
CONTRACTOR:
By:
Company (Please Print)
Signature:
Address
Title:
City/State/Zip (Please Print)
THE STATE OF TEXAS §
COUNTY OF DENTON §
BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared_____________, known to me
to be the person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged to me that
he/she executed the same as the act and deed of for the purposes and consideration therein
expressed and in the capacity therein stated.
GIVEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE this day of ,
20____.
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 45 26
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Contractor Compliance with Worker’s Compensation Law
Notary Public in and for the State of Texas
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 45 43
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Corporate Resolution Authorization Signatories
SECTION 00 45 43
CORPORATE RESOLUTION AUTHORIZING SIGNATORIES
[Assembler: For Contract Document execution, remove this page and replace with Bidder’s
corporate resolution authorizing signatories.]
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 45 43
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Corporate Resolution Authorization Signatories
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 52 43
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Agreement
SECTION 00 52 43
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT, authorized on is made by and between the City of Denton, a Texas home rule
municipality, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager, (“City”), and, authorized to
do business in Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized representative, (“Contractor”).
City and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows:
Article 1. WORK
Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the
Project identified herein.
Article 2. PROJECT
The project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part
is generally described as follows:
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
Project No. 190616
Article 3. CONTRACT PRICE
City agrees to pay Contractor for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents an amount, in current funds, of ______Dollars ($_____).
Article 4. CONTRACT TIME
4.1 Final Acceptance.
The Work will be complete for Final Acceptance within 154 days after the date when the Contract Time
commences to run, as provided in Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, plus any extension thereof
allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions.
4.2 Liquidated Damages
Contractor recognizes that time is of the essence for completion of Milestones, if any, and to achieve
Final Acceptance of the Work and City will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the
time(s) specified in Paragraph 4.1 above. The Contractor also recognizes the delays, expense and
difficulties involved in proving in a legal proceeding, the actual loss suffered by the City if the Work is not
completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Contractor agrees that as liquidated
damages for delay (but not as a penalty). Should the Contractor exceed the time specified in Paragraph
4.1 above without reaching substantial completion for the project, the Contractor shall pay City two
thousand Dollars ($2,000.00) for each day that expires until the substantial completion milestone has
been reached. Should the Contractor exceed the time specified in Paragraph 4.1 above without reaching
final completion for the project, the Contractor shall pay City five hundred Dollars ($500.00) for each day
that expires after the time specified for Final Acceptance until the City issues the Final Letter of
Acceptance.
Article 5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
5.1 CONTENTS:
A. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between City and
Contractor concerning the Work consist of the following:
1. This Agreement.
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 52 43
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Agreement
2. Attachments to this Agreement:
a. Bid Form
1) Proposal Form
2) Vendor Compliance to State Law Non-Resident Bidder
3) State and Federal documents (project specific)
b. Current Prevailing Wage Rate Table
c. Insurance ACORD Form(s)
d. Payment Bond
e. Performance Bond
f. Maintenance Bond
g. Power of Attorney for the Bonds
h. Worker’s Compensation Affidavit
i. Form 1295 – Certificate of Interested Parties
3. General Conditions.
4. Supplementary Conditions.
5. Specifications specifically made a part of the Contract Documents by attachment or,
if not attached, as incorporated by reference and described in the Table of Contents
of the Project’s Contract Documents.
6. North Central Texas Council of Governments Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction – Fourth Edition, Divisions 200-800, and as amended by City, as
incorporated by reference and described in the Table of Contents of the Project’s
Contract Documents.
7. Drawings.
8. Addenda.
9. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award.
10. The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and, if issued, become an incorporated part of the Contract Documents:
a. Notice to Proceed.
b. Letter of Intent for the VFD purchase order.
b. Field Orders.
c. Change Orders.
d. Letter of Final Acceptance.
IFB 7213 3 Section 00 52 43
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Agreement
Article 6. INDEMNIFICATION
6.1 Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, at its own expense,
the city, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims arising out of, or
alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed by the contractor, its officers, agents,
employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees under this contract. This indemnification provision is
specifically intended to operate and be effective even if it is alleged or proven that all or some of the
damages being sought were caused, in whole or in part, by any act, omission or negligence of the city.
This indemnity provision is intended to include, without limitation, indemnity for any and all costs,
expenses and legal fees incurred by the city in defending against such claims and causes of actions.
6.2 Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless, at its own expense, the city, its
officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all loss of, damage to, or destruction of,
property of the city, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed by the
contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees under this contract. This
indemnification provision is specifically intended to operate and be effective even if it is alleged or proven
that all or some of the damages being sought were caused, in whole or in part, by any act, omission or
negligence of the city.
Article 7. MISCELLANEOUS
7.1 Terms.
Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will have the
meanings indicated in the General Conditions.
7.2 Assignment of Contract.
This Agreement, including all of the Contract Documents may not be assigned by the Contractor without
the advanced express written consent of the City.
7.3 Successors and Assigns.
City and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the
other party hereto, in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract
Documents.
7.4 Severability.
Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be unconstitutional, void or unenforceable by a
court of competent jurisdiction shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue
to be valid and binding upon City and Contractor.
7.5 Governing Law and Venue.
This Agreement, including all of the Contract Documents is performable in the State of Texas. Venue
shall be Denton County, Texas, or the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas,
Sherman Division.
7.6 Authority to Sign.
Contractor shall attach evidence of authority to sign Agreement if signed by someone other than he duly
authorized signatory of the Contractor. 12
7.7 Prohibition On Contracts With Companies Boycotting Israel.
Contractor acknowledges that in accordance with Chapter 2270 of the Texas Government Code, the City
is prohibited from entering into a contract with a company for goods or services unless the contract
contains a written verification from the company that it: (1) does not boycott Israel; and (2) will not boycott
Israel during the term of the contract.
IFB 7213 4 Section 00 52 43
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Agreement
The terms “boycott Israel” and “company” shall have the meanings ascribed to those terms in Section
808.001 of the Texas Government Code. By signing this contract, Contractor certifies that
Contractor’s signature provides written verification to the City that Contractor: (1) does not
boycott Israel; and (2) will not boycott Israel during the term of the contract.
7.8 Immigration Nationality Act.
Contractor shall verify the identity and employment eligibility of its employees who perform work under
this Agreement, including completing the Employment Eligibility Verification Form (I-9). Upon request by
City, Contractor shall provide City with copies of all I-9 forms and supporting eligibility documentation for
each employee who performs work under this Agreement. Contractor shall adhere to all Federal and
State laws as well as establish appropriate procedures and controls so that no services will be performed
by any Contractor employee who is not legally eligible to perform such services. CONTRACTOR SHALL
INDEMNIFY CITY AND HOLD CITY HARMLESS FROM ANY PENALTIES, LIABILITIES, OR LOSSES
DUE TO VIOLATIONS OF THIS PARAGRAPH BY CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR’S EMPLOYEES,
SUBCONTRACTORS, AGENTS, OR LICENSEES. City, upon written notice to Contractor, shall have the
right to immediately terminate this Agreement for violations of this provision by Contractor.
7.9 No Third-Party Beneficiaries.
This Agreement gives no rights or benefits to anyone other than the City and the Contractor and there are
no third-party beneficiaries
7.10 No Cause of Action Against Engineer.
Contractor, its subcontractors and equipment and materials suppliers on the Project or their sureties, shall
maintain no direct action against the Engineer, its officers, employees, and subcontractors, for any claim
arising out of, in connection with, or resulting from the engineering services performed. Only the City will
be the beneficiary of any undertaking by the Engineer. The presence or duties of the Engineer's
personnel at a construction site, whether as on-site representatives or otherwise, do not make the
Engineer or its personnel in any way responsible for those duties that belong to the City and/or the City's
Contractors or other entities, and do not relieve the Contractors or any other entity of their obligations,
duties, and responsibilities, including, but not limited to, all construction methods, means, techniques,
sequences, and procedures necessary for coordinating and completing all portions of the construction
work in accordance with the Contract Documents and any health or safety precautions required by such
construction work. The Engineer and its personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any
construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or
safety precautions.
SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW
IFB 7213 5 Section 00 52 43
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Agreement
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, City and Contractor have each executed this Agreement to be effective as
of the date subscribed by the City’s designated City Manager (“Effective Date”). 3
ATTEST:
JENNIFER WALTERS, CITY SECRETARY
APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: _____________________________________________
AARON LEAL, CITY ATTORNEY
IFB 7213 6 Section 00 52 43
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Agreement
CITY OF DENTON
PHONE NUMBER
BY:
TITLE:
EMAIL ADDRESS
CONTRACTOR
[CONTRACTOR’S CORPORATE NAME HERE]
BY:
AUTHORIZED AGENT
NAME
TITLE
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 61 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Maintenance Bond
SECTION 00 61 13
PERFORMANCE BOND
THE STATE OF TEXAS §
§ KNOW ALL BY THESE
PRESENTS:
COUNTY OF DENTON §
That we, _________, known as “Principal” herein and _______________, a corporate surety(sureties, if more than
one) duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as “Surety” herein (whether one or more), are
held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a municipal corporation created pursuant to the laws of Texas,
known as “City” herein, in the penal sum of, _________Dollars ($_______), lawful money of the United States, to
be paid in Denton, Denton County, Texas for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the City awarded the ______day of
______, 20____, which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth
herein, to furnish all materials, equipment labor and other accessories defined by law, in the prosecution of the
Work, including any Change Orders, as provided for in said Contract designated as Lake Lewisville Water
Treatment Plant Dewatering Improvements.
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform it
obligations under the Contract and shall in all respects duly and faithfully perform the Work, including Change
Orders, under the Contract, according to the plans, specifications, and contract documents therein referred to, and
as well during any period of extension of the Contract that may be granted on the part of the City, then this
obligation shall be and become null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in Denton County, Texas or the
United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas, Sherman Division.
This bond is made and executed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government
Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
statue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have SIGNED and SEALED this instrument by duly
authorized agents and officers on this the _______day of ______, 20_____.
PRINCIPAL:
BY:
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 61 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Maintenance Bond
Signature
ATTEST:
(Principal) Secretary Name and Title
IFB 7213 3 Section 00 61 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Maintenance Bond
Address:
Witness as to Principal
SURETY:
BY:
Signature
Name and Title
Address:
IFB No. 7213 4 Section 00 61 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Maintenance Bond
Witness as to Surety Telephone Number:
*Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract
from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If
Surety’s physical address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided.
The date of the bond shall not be prior to the date the Contract is awarded.
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 61 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Maintenance Bond
SECTION 00 61 19
MAINTENANCE BOND
THE STATE OF TEXAS §
§ KNOW ALL BY THESE
PRESENTS:
COUNTY OF TARRANT §
That we , known as “Principal” herein and , a corporate surety
(sureties, if more than one) duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as “Surety” herein
(whether one or more), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a municipal corporation created
pursuant to the laws of the State of Texas, known as “City” herein, in the sum of Dollars ($ ), lawful
money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, Denton County, Texas, for payment of which sum well and
truly be made unto the City and its successors, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the City awarded the day of , 20 ,
which Contract is hereby referred to and a made part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein, to furnish
all materials, equipment labor and other accessories as defined by law, in the prosecution of the
Work, including any Work resulting from a duly authorized Change Order (collectively herein, the “Work”) as
provided for in said contract and designated as Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Dewatering
Improvements; and 26
WHEREAS, Principal binds itself to use such materials and to so construct the Work in accordance with the
plans, specifications and Contract Documents that the Work is and will remain free from defects in materials or
workmanship for and during the period of two (2) years after the date of Final Acceptance of the Work by the City
(“Maintenance Period”); and WHEREAS, Principal binds itself to repair or reconstruct the Work in whole or in part
upon receiving notice from the City of the need therefor at any time within the Maintenance Period.
NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if Principal shall remedy any defective Work, for
which timely notice was provided by City, to a completion satisfactory to the City, then this obligation shall
become null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, if Principal shall fail so to repair or reconstruct any timely noticed defective Work, it is
agreed that the City may cause any and all such defective Work to be repaired and/or reconstructed with all
associated costs thereof being borne by the Principal and the Surety under this Maintenance bond; and 16
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in Denton County, Texas or
the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas, Sherman Division; and 20 PROVIDED
FURTHER, that this obligation shall be continuous in nature and successive recoveries may be had hereon for
successive breaches.
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 61 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Maintenance Bond
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have each SIGNED and SEALED this
instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the day of
, 20 .
PRINCIPAL:
BY:
Signature
ATTEST:
(Principal) Secretary Name and Title
Address:
Witness as to Principal
SURETY:
IFB 7213 3 Section 00 61 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Maintenance Bond
BY:
Signature
ATTEST: Name and Title
Address:
IFB 7213 4 Section 00 61 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Maintenance Bond
(Surety)
Secretary
Witness as to Surety Telephone Number:
*Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract
from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If Surety’s physical
address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided.
The date of the bond shall not be prior to the date the Contract is awarded.
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 61 25
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Certificate of Insurance
SECTION 00 61 25
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
[Assembler: For Contract Document execution, remove this page and replace with standard
ACORD Certificate of Insurance form.]
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 61 25
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Certificate of Insurance
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
STANDARD GENERAL
CONDITIONS OF THE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF
THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology...............................................................................................................................1
1.01 Defined Terms...............................................................................................................................................1
1.02 Terminology...................................................................................................................................................6
Article 2 – Preliminary Matters.............................................................................................................................................7
2.01 Copies of Documents....................................................................................................................................7
2.02 Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed................................................................................7
2.03 Starting the Work...........................................................................................................................................7
2.04 Before Starting Construction.........................................................................................................................7
2.05 Preconstruction Conference .........................................................................................................................8
2.06 Public Meeting...............................................................................................................................................8
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules....................................................................................................................8
2.08 Electronic Submittals.............................................................................................................................8
Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse...............................................................................................8
3.01 Intent..............................................................................................................................................................8
3.02 Reference Standards....................................................................................................................................9
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................................9
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents................................................................................10
3.05 Reuse of Documents ..................................................................................................................................10
3.06 Electronic Data....................................................................................................................................11
Article 4 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions;
Reference Points......................................................................................................................................11
4.01 Availability of Lands.............................................................................................................................11
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions..........................................................................................................12
4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions..............................................................................................12
4.04 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................................13
4.05 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site.........................................................................................14
Article 5 – Bonds and Insurance.......................................................................................................................................15
5.01 Licensed Sureties and Insurers..................................................................................................................15
5.02 Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds................................................................................15
5.03 Certificates of Insurance.............................................................................................................................16
5.04 Contractor’s Insurance................................................................................................................................18
5.05 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace .........................................................................19
Article 6 – Contractor’s Responsibilities............................................................................................................................19
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence.............................................................................................................19
IFB 7213 3 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
6.02 Labor; Working Hours .................................................................................................................................19
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment...........................................................................................................20
6.04 Project Schedule .........................................................................................................................................20
6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”........................................................................................................................21
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others..............................................................................23
6.07 Wage Rates.................................................................................................................................................24
6.08 Patent Fees and Royalties...................................................................................................................25
6.09 Permits and Utilities.............................................................................................................................26
6.10 Laws and Regulations.................................................................................................................................26
6.11 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................................27
6.12 Use of Site and Other Areas................................................................................................................27
6.13 Record Documents......................................................................................................................................28
6.14 Safety and Protection..................................................................................................................................29
6.15 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................................29
6.16 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................................30
6.17 Emergencies and/or Rectification...............................................................................................................30
6.18 Submittals....................................................................................................................................................30
6.19 Continuing the Work....................................................................................................................................31
6.20 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee.........................................................................................32
6.21 Indemnification..........................................................................................................................................32
6.22 Delegation of Professional Design Services ..............................................................................................33
6.23 Right to Audit.......................................................................................................................................34
6.24 Nondiscrimination........................................................................................................................................34
Article 7 – Other Work at the Site..............................................................................................................................34
7.01 Related Work at Site............................................................................................................................34
7.02 Coordination ................................................................................................................................................35
Article 8 – City’s Responsibilities.......................................................................................................................................35
8.01 Communications to Contractor...................................................................................................................35
8.02 Furnish Data........................................................................................................................................35
8.03 Pay When Due ....................................................................................................................................35
8.04 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ..........................................................................................36
8.05 Change Orders....................................................................................................................................36
8.06 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals..............................................................................................................36
8.07 Limitations on City’s Responsibilities..........................................................................................................36
8.08 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition.....................................................................................36
8.09 Compliance with Safety Program.........................................................................................................36
Article 9 – City’s Observation Status During Construction...............................................................................................36
9.01 City’s Project Manager...............................................................................................................................36
9.02 Visits to Site.........................................................................................................................................37
9.03 Authorized Variations in Work.....................................................................................................................37
9.04 Rejecting Defective Work............................................................................................................................37
9.05 Determinations for Work Performed...........................................................................................................37
9.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work......................................38
IFB 7213 4 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
Article 10 – Changes in the Work; Claims; Extra Work....................................................................................................38
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................................................38
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work............................................................................................................38
10.03 Execution of Change Orders.......................................................................................................................38
10.04 Extra Work...................................................................................................................................................38
10.05 Notification to Surety............................................................................................................................39
10.06 Contract Claims Process............................................................................................................................39
Article 11 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work; Plans Quantity Measurement..........................................40
11.01 Cost of the Work .........................................................................................................................................40
11.02 Allowances...................................................................................................................................................43
11.03 Unit Price Work...........................................................................................................................................43
11.04 Plans Quantity Measurement.....................................................................................................................45
Article 12 – Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Time...................................................................................45
12.01 Change of Contract Price ....................................................................................................................45
12.02 Change of Contract Time............................................................................................................................46
12.03 Delays .................................................................................................................................................47
Article 13 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work .........................................47
13.01 Notice of Defects.........................................................................................................................................47
13.02 Access to Work...........................................................................................................................................47
13.03 Tests and Inspections.................................................................................................................................47
13.04 Uncovering Work.........................................................................................................................................49
13.05 City May Stop the Work..............................................................................................................................49
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work .................................................................................................49
13.07 Correction Period........................................................................................................................................50
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work....................................................................................................................51
13.09 City May Correct Defective Work ...............................................................................................................51
Article 14 – Payments to Contractor and Completion ......................................................................................................52
14.01 Schedule of Values..............................................................................................................................52
14.02 Progress Payments.....................................................................................................................................52
14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title...............................................................................................................54
14.04 Partial Utilization..........................................................................................................................................54
14.05 Final Inspection...........................................................................................................................................55
14.06 Final Acceptance.........................................................................................................................................55
14.07 Final Payment .............................................................................................................................................55
14.08 Final Completion Delayed and Partial Retainage Release .......................................................................56
14.09 Waiver of Claims .........................................................................................................................................56
Article 15 – Suspension of Work and Termination...........................................................................................................57
15.01 City May Suspend Work.............................................................................................................................57
15.02 City May Terminate for Cause .............................................................................................................57
15.03 City May Terminate For Convenience .......................................................................................................59
IFB 7213 5 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
Article 16 – Dispute Resolution .........................................................................................................................................61
16.01 Methods and Procedures.............................................................................................................................61
Article 17 – Miscellaneous.................................................................................................................................................62
17.01 Giving Notice...............................................................................................................................................62
17.02 Computation of Times.................................................................................................................................62
17.03 Cumulative Remedies.................................................................................................................................62
17.04 Survival of Obligations.................................................................................................................................63
17.05 Headings......................................................................................................................................................63
IFB 7213 6 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in these General Conditions or in other Contract Documents, the terms listed below have
the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof, and words denoting
gender shall include the masculine, feminine and neuter. Said terms are generally capitalized or written in
italics, but not always. When used in a context consistent with the definition of a listed-defined term, the
term shall have a meaning as defined below whether capitalized or italicized or otherwise. In addition to
terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to
identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.
1.Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or
change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.
2.Agreement—The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between City and Contractor
covering the Work.
3.Application for Payment—The form acceptable to City which is to be used by Contractor during the
course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
4.Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing
asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational
Safety and Health Administration.
5.Award – Authorization by the City Council for the City to enter into an Agreement.
6.Bid—The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the
Work to be performed.
7.Bidder—The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to City.
8.Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all
Addenda).
9.Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of
acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements.
10.Business Day – A business day is defined as a day that the City conducts normal business, generally
Monday through Friday, except for federal or state holidays observed by the City.
11.Calendar Day – A day consisting of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
12.Change Order—A document, which is prepared and approved by the City, which is signed by
Contractor and City and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in
the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
13.City— The City of Denton is a Texas home-rule municipal corporation acting by its City Council
through its City Manager or his designee.
14.City Attorney – The officially appointed City Attorney of the City of Denton, Texas, or his duly
authorized representative.
15.City Council - The duly elected and qualified governing body of the City of Denton, Texas.
16.City Manager – The officially appointed and authorized City Manager of the City of Denton,
Texas, or his duly authorized representative.
IFB 7213 7 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
17.Contract Claim—A demand or assertion by City or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price
or Contract Time, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for
money or services by a third party is not a Contract Claim.
18.Contract—The entire and integrated written document between the City and Contractor concerning
the Work. The Contract contains the Agreement and all Contract Documents and supersedes prior
negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral.
19.Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement. All items listed in the Agreement
are Contract Documents. Approved Submittals, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and
drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents.
20.Contract Price—The moneys payable by City to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03
in the case of Unit Price Work).
21.Contract Time—The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones,
if any and (ii) complete the Work so that it is ready for Final Acceptance.
22.Contractor—The individual or entity with whom City has entered into the Agreement.
23.Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 11.01 of these General Conditions for definition.
24.Damage Claims – A demand for money or services arising from the Project or Site from a third party,
City or Contractor exclusive of a Contract Claim.
25.Day or day – A day, unless otherwise defined, shall mean a Calendar Day.
26.Drawings—That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically
shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Submittals are not
Drawings as so defined.
27.Effective Date of the Agreement—The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective,
but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by
the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.
28.Engineer—The licensed professional engineer or engineering firm registered in the State of Texas
performing professional services for the City.
29.Extra Work – Additional work made necessary by changes or alterations of the Contract Documents
or quantities; or for other reasons for which no prices are provided in the Contract Documents. Extra
work shall be part of the Work.
30.Field Order — A written order issued by City which requires changes in the Work but which does not
involve a change in the Contract Price, Contract Time, or the intent of the Engineer.
31.Final Acceptance – The written notice given by the City to the Contractor that the Work specified in
the Contract Documents has been completed to the satisfaction of the City.
32.Final Inspection – Inspection carried out by the City to verify that the Contractor has completed the
Work, and each and every part or appurtenance thereof, fully, entirely, and in conformance with the
Contract Documents.
33.General Requirements—Sections of Division 1 of the Contract Documents.
34.Hazardous Environmental Condition — The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum,
Hazardous Waste, Radioactive Material, or other materials in such quantities or circumstances that
IFB 7213 8 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto.
35.Hazardous Waste—Hazardous waste is defined as any solid waste listed as hazardous or possesses
one or more hazardous characteristics as defined in the federal waste regulations, as amended from
time to time.
36.Incidental – Work items that the Contractor is not paid for directly, but costs for which are included
under the various bid items of the Project.
37.Laws and Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders
of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.
38.Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal
property.
39.Major Item – An Item of work included in the Contract Documents that has a total cost equal to or
greater than 5% of the original Contract Price or $25,000 whichever is less.
40.Milestone—A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate Contract
Time prior to Final Acceptance of the Work.
41.Notice of Award—The written notice by City to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely
compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, City will sign and
deliver the Agreement.
42.Notice to Proceed—A written notice given by City to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract
Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work specified in
Contract Documents.
43.PCBs—Polychlorinated biphenyls.
44.Petroleum—Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard
conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch
absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with
other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils.
45.Plans – See definition of Drawings.
46.Project Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, in accordance with the
General Requirements, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the
Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Time.
47.Project—The Work to be performed under the Contract Documents.
48.Project Manager —The authorized representative of the City who will be assigned to the Project.
49.Project Manual – The documentary information prepared for bidding and furnishing the Work. A listing
of the contents of the Project Manual is contained in its Table of Contents.
50.Public Meeting – An announced meeting conducted by the City to facilitate public participation and to
assist the public in gaining an informed view of the Project.
51.Radioactive Material—Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy
Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time.
52.Regular Working Hours – Excluding legal holidays, regular working hours shall be Monday thru Friday
between 6:00 a.m. and 8:30 p.m. from June 1 to September 30 and between 7:00
a.m. and 8:30 p.m. from October 1 to May 31.
IFB 7213 9 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
53.Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of
some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be
judged.
54.Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals
and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities.
55.Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the
Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s
Applications for Payment.
56.Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by City upon which the
Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way, permits, and easements for access thereto, and such
other lands furnished by City which are designated for the use of Contractor.
57.Specifications—That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials,
equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative
requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. Specifications may be specifically made a
part of the Contract Documents by attachment or, if not attached, may be incorporated by reference
as indicated in the Table of Contents (Division 00 00 00) of each Project.
58.Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other
Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site.
59.Submittals—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are
specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some
portion of the Work.
60.Subsidiary – See definition of Incidental.
61.Successful Bidder—The Bidder submitting the lowest and most responsive Bid to whom City makes
an Award.
62.Superintendent – The representative of the Contractor who is available at all times and able to receive
instructions from the City and to act for the Contractor.
63.Supplementary Conditions—That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these
General Conditions.
64.Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be
incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor.
65.Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults,
tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities,
including but not limited to, those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products,
telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or
chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.
66.Unit Price Work—See Paragraph 11.03 of these General Conditions for definition.
67.Weekend Working Hours – Hours between 8:00 a.m. and 8:30 p.m., Saturday, and between 1:00 p.m.
and 8:30 p.m. Sunday or legal holiday, as approved in advance by the City.
68.Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be
provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all
IFB 7213 10 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction including any Change
Order or Field Order, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into
such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents.
69.Working Day – A working day is defined as a day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays
authorized by the City for contract purposes, in which weather or other conditions not under the control
of the Contractor will permit the performance of the principal unit of work underway for a continuous
period of not less than 7 hours between 7 a.m. and 8 p.m.
1.02 Terminology
A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through E are not defined but, when used in the
Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.
B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:
1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or
terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of judgment by City. In addition, the adjectives
“reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are
used to describe an action or determination of City as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of
professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for
compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project
as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific
statement indicating otherwise).
C. Defective:
1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or
deficient in that it:
a.does not conform to the Contract Documents; or
b.does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or
approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
c.has been damaged prior to City’s written acceptance.
D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:
1. The word “Furnish” or the word “Install” or the word “Perform” or the word “Provide” or the word
“Supply,” or any combination or similar directive or usage thereof, shall mean furnishing and
incorporating in the Work including all necessary labor, materials, equipment, and everything
necessary to perform the Work indicated, unless specifically limited in the context used.
E. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or
construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such
recognized meaning.
ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Copies of Documents
City shall furnish to Contractor one (1) original executed copy and one (1) electronic copy of the Contract
Documents, and three (3) additional copies of the Drawings. Additional copies will be furnished upon
request at the cost of reproduction.
2.02 Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed
IFB 7213 11 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
The Contract Time will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed
may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
2.03 Starting the Work
Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No Work
shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Time commences to run.
2.04 Before Starting Construction
Baseline Schedules: Submit in accordance with the Contract Documents, and prior to starting the Work.
2.05 Preconstruction Conference
Before any Work at the Site is started, the Contractor shall attend a Preconstruction Conference as specified
in the Contract Documents.
2.06 Public Meeting
Contractor may not mobilize any equipment, materials or resources to the Site prior to Contractor attending
the Public Meeting as scheduled by the City.
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules
No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to City in
accordance with the Schedule Specification as provided in the Contract Documents.
2.08 Electronic Submittals
A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the City and Contractor may transmit, and shall
accept, Project-related correspondence, text, data, documents, drawings, information, and graphics,
including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals, in electronic media or digital format.
B. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no
representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the
recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from
those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or from those established in applicable transmittal
protocols.
ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE
3.01 Intent
A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or
equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically
called for, at no additional cost to City.
C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by City.
D. The Specifications may vary in form, format and style. Some Specification sections may be written in
varying degrees of streamlined or declarative style and some sections may be relatively narrative by
IFB 7213 12 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
comparison. Omission of such words and phrases as “the Contractor shall,” “in conformity with,” “as
shown,” or “as specified” are intentional in streamlined sections. Omitted words and phrases shall be
supplied by inference. Similar types of provisions may appear in various parts of a section or articles within
a part depending on the format of the section. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any variation of
form, format or style in making Contract Claims.
E. The cross referencing of specification sections under the subparagraph heading “Related Sections include
but are not necessarily limited to:” and elsewhere within each Specification section is provided as an aid
and convenience to the Contractor. The Contractor shall not rely on the cross referencing provided and
shall be responsible to coordinate the entire Work under the Contract Documents and provide a complete
Project whether or not the cross referencing is provided in each section or whether or not the cross
referencing is complete.
3.02 Reference Standards
A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations
1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or
association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall
mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of
opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be
otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier,
shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of City, Contractor, or any of their
subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the Contract Documents.
No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to City, or any of its officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility
inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents.
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
A. Reporting Discrepancies:
1.Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the
Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify
pertinent figures therein against all applicable field measurements and conditions. Contractor shall
promptly report in writing to City any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor
discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from City
before proceeding with any Work affected thereby.
2.Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance
of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract
Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) any
standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall
promptly report it to City in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby
(except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.17.A) until an amendment or supplement to the
Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04.
3. Contractor shall not be liable to City for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in
the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof.
B. Resolving Discrepancies:
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the
IFB 7213 13 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy
between the provisions of the Contract Documents and the provisions of any standard, specification,
manual, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the
Contract Documents).
2. In case of discrepancies, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, Drawings shall
govern over Specifications, and Supplementary Conditions shall govern over General Conditions and
Specifications.
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents
A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or
to modify the terms and conditions thereof by a Change Order.
B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations
in the Work not involving a change in Contract Price or Contract Time, may be authorized, by one or more
of the following ways:
1. A Field Order;
2. City’s review of a Submittal (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.18.C); or
3. City’s written interpretation or clarification.
3.05 Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not:
1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other
documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer, including electronic
media editions; or
2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the
Project or any other project without written consent of City and specific written verification or
adaptation by Engineer.
B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing
herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.
3.06 Electronic Data
A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by City or Engineer to
Contractor, or by Contractor to City or Engineer, that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies
included in the Contract Documents (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text,
data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion
or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a
discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern.
B. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations
as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software
application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data’s
creator.
ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
IFB 7213 14 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
4.01 Availability of Lands
A. City shall furnish the Site. City shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general
application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the
Work. City will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent
changes in existing facilities.
1. The City has obtained or anticipates acquisition of and/or access to right-of-way, and/or easements.
Any outstanding right-of-way and/or easements are anticipated to be acquired in accordance with the
schedule set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The Project Schedule submitted by the
Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents must consider any outstanding right-of-way,
and/or easements.
2. The City has or anticipates removing and/or relocating utilities, and obstructions to the Site. Any
outstanding removal or relocation of utilities or obstructions is anticipated in accordance with the
schedule set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The Project Schedule submitted by the Contractor
in accordance with the Contract Documents must consider any outstanding utilities or obstructions to
be removed, adjusted, and/or relocated by others.
B. Upon reasonable written request, City shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title
and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed.
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for construction
facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
A.Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. those reports known to City of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the
Site; and
2. those drawings known to City of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface
structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).
B.Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of
the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not
Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Contractor may
not make any Contract Claim against City, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to,
any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be
employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in
such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data,
interpretations, opinions, or information.
4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
A.Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed
either:
1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as
IFB 7213 15 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or
2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or
3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or
4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally
recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface
or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as
required by Paragraph 6.17.A), notify City in writing about such condition.
B. Possible Price and Time Adjustments
Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time if:
1. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to
City with respect to Contract Price and Contract Time by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound
under a negotiated contract; or
2. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of the
examination of the Contract Documents or the Site; or
3. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A.
4.04 Underground Facilities
A.Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect
to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished
to City or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including City, or by others. Unless it is
otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions:
1. City and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information
or data provided by others; and
2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full
responsibility for:
a. reviewing and checking all such information and data;
b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;
c. coordination and adjustment of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities,
including City, during construction; and
d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto
resulting from the Work.
B. Not Shown or Indicated:
1. If an Underground Facility which conflicts with the Work is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to
the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further
disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an
emergency as required by Paragraph 6.17.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and
IFB 7213 16 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
give notice to that owner and to City. City will review the discovered Underground Facility and
determine the extent, if any, to which a change may be required in the Contract Documents to
reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility.
Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such discovered Underground
Facility.
2. If City concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Change Order may be
issued to reflect and document such consequences.
3. Verification of existing utilities, structures, and service lines shall include notification of all utility
companies a minimum of 48 hours in advance of construction including exploratory excavation if
necessary.
4.05 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site
A.Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings known to City
relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the Site.
B.Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of
the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not
Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Contractor may
not make any Contract Claim against City, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to,
any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be
employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in
such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data,
interpretations, opinions or information.
C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at
the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract
Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous
Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors,
Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible.
D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom
Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i)
secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any
area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.17.A); and (iii) notify City (and
promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). City may consider the necessity to retain a qualified
expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any.
E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area
until after City has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered written notice to
Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered suitable for
the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed.
F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a
reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then
City may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the
Work. City may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by City’s own forces or others.
IFB 7213 17 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless City, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited
to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous
Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible.
Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity
from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
H. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition
uncovered or revealed at the Site.
ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.01 Licensed Sureties and Insurers
All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Contractor
shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of
Texas to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and
insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in
the Supplementary Conditions.
5.02 Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, in accordance with Texas Government Code
Chapter 2253 or successor statute, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the
faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor shall furnish maintenance bonds in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security to
protect the City against any defects in any portion of the Work described in the Contract Documents.
Maintenance bonds shall remain in effect for two (2) years after the date of Final Acceptance by the City.
C. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by
Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list of “Companies
Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring
Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond
Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be
accompanied by a sealed and dated power of attorney which shall show that it is effective on the date the
agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond. The bonds must be dated on, or after, the date of the
Contract.
D. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to
do business is terminated in the State of Texas or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph
5.02.C, Contractor shall promptly notify City and shall, within 30 days after the event giving rise to such
notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of
Paragraphs 5.01 and 5.02.C.
5.03 Certificates of Insurance
A. Contractor shall deliver to City, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by City or
any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain.
1. The certificate of insurance shall document the City, and all identified entities named in the
Supplementary Conditions as “Additional Insured” on all liability policies.
IFB 7213 18 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
2. The Contractor’s general liability insurance shall include a, “per project” or “per location”,
endorsement, which shall be identified in the certificate of insurance provided to the City.
3. The certificate shall be signed by an agent authorized to bind coverage on behalf of the insured, be
complete in its entirety, and show complete insurance carrier names as listed in the current A.M. Best
Property & Casualty Guide
4. The insurers for all policies must be licensed and/or approved to do business in the State of Texas.
Except for workers’ compensation, all insurers must have a minimum rating of A-: VII in the current A.
M. Best Key Rating Guide or have reasonably equivalent financial strength and solvency to the
satisfaction of Risk Management. If the rating is below that required, written approval of City is
required.
5. All applicable policies shall include a Waiver of Subrogation (Rights of Recovery) in favor of the City.
In addition, the Contractor agrees to waive all rights of subrogation against the Engineer (if applicable),
and each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions
6. Failure of the City to demand such certificates or other evidence of full compliance with the insurance
requirements or failure of the City to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be
construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligation to maintain such lines of insurance coverage.
7. If insurance policies are not written for specified coverage limits, an Umbrella or Excess Liability
insurance for any differences is required. Excess Liability shall follow form of the primary coverage.
8. Unless otherwise stated, all required insurance shall be written on the “occurrence basis”. If coverage
is underwritten on a claims-made basis, the retroactive date shall be coincident with or prior to the
date of the effective date of the agreement and the certificate of insurance shall state that the
coverage is claims-made and the retroactive date. The insurance coverage shall be maintained for the
duration of the Contract and for three (3) years following Final Acceptance provided under the Contract
Documents or for the warranty period, whichever is longer. An annual certificate of insurance
submitted to the City shall evidence such insurance coverage.
9. Policies shall have no exclusions by endorsements, which, neither nullify or amend, the required lines
of coverage, nor decrease the limits of said coverage unless such endorsements are approved in
writing by the City. In the event a Contract has been bid or executed and the exclusions are
determined to be unacceptable or the City desires additional insurance coverage, and the City desires
the contractor/engineer to obtain such coverage, the contract price shall be adjusted by the cost of the
premium for such additional coverage plus 10%.
10. Any self-insured retention (SIR), in excess of $25,000.00, affecting required insurance coverage shall
be approved by the City in regards to asset value and stockholders' equity. In lieu of traditional
insurance, alternative coverage maintained through insurance pools or risk retention groups, or self-
funding, must also be approved by City.
11. Any deductible in excess of $5,000.00, for any policy that does not provide coverage on a first-dollar
basis, must be acceptable to and approved by the City.
12. City, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to review the insurance requirements and to make
reasonable adjustments to insurance coverage’s and their limits when deemed necessary and
prudent by the City based upon the scope of the Work, changes in statutory law, court decision or
the claims history of the industry as well as of the contracting party to the City. The City shall be
required to provide prior notice of 90 days, and the insurance adjustments shall be incorporated into
the Work by Change Order.
13. City shall be entitled, upon written request and without expense, to receive copies of policies and
endorsements thereto and may make any reasonable requests for deletion or revision or modifications
IFB 7213 19 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations, or exclusions necessary to conform the policy and
endorsements to the requirements of the Contract. Deletions, revisions, or modifications shall not be
required where policy provisions are established by law or regulations binding upon either party or
the underwriter on any such policies.
14. City shall not be responsible for the direct payment of insurance premium costs for
Contractor’s insurance.
5.04 Contractor’s Insurance
A.Workers Compensation and Employers’ Liability. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance
coverage with limits consistent with statutory benefits outlined in the Texas Workers’ Compensation Act
(Texas Labor Code, Ch. 406, as amended), and minimum limits for Employers’ Liability as is appropriate
for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise
out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the
Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable:
1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts;
2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of
Contractor’s employees.
B.Commercial General Liability. Coverage shall include but not be limited to covering liability (bodily injury or
property damage) arising from: premises/operations, independent contractors, products/completed
operations, personal injury, liability under an insured contract, and explosion/collapse/underground (where
those exposures exist). Insurance shall be provided on an occurrence basis, and as comprehensive as the
current Insurance Services Office (ISO) policy.
This insurance shall apply as primary insurance with respect to any other insurance or self-insurance
programs afforded to the City. The Commercial General Liability policy, shall have no exclusions by
endorsements that would alter of nullify premises/operations, products/completed operations, contractual,
personal injury, or advertising injury, which are normally contained with the policy, unless the City approves
such exclusions in writing.
For construction projects that present a substantial completed operation exposure, the City may require
the contractor to maintain completed operations coverage for a minimum of no less than three (3) years
following the completion of the project (if identified in the Supplementary Conditions).
C.Automobile Liability. A commercial business auto policy shall provide coverage on “any auto”, defined as
autos owned, hired and non-owned and provide indemnity for claims for damages because bodily injury or
death of any person and or property damage arising out of the work, maintenance or use of any motor
vehicle by the Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by
any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
D.Railroad Protective Liability. If any of the work or any warranty work is within the limits of railroad right-of-
way, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements identified in the Supplementary Conditions.
E.Notification of Policy Cancellation: Contractor shall immediately notify City upon cancellation or other loss
of insurance coverage. Contractor shall stop work until replacement insurance has been procured. There
shall be no time credit for days not worked pursuant to this section.
5.05 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace
If City has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to
be purchased and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance
with the Contract Documents, the City shall so notify the Contractor in writing within 10 Business Days after
IFB 7213 20 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested). Contractor shall provide to the City such additional
information in respect of insurance provided as the City may reasonably request. If Contractor does not
purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents, the City shall notify
the Contractor in writing of such failure prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any
change in the required coverage.
ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such
attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent Superintendent, who is
proficient in English, and who shall not be replaced without written notice to City. If at any time the
Superintendent is not satisfactory to the City, Contractor shall, if requested by City, replace the
Superintendent with another satisfactory to City.
C. Contractor shall notify the City 24 hours prior to moving areas during the sequence of construction.
6.02 Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to perform construction as required by the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.
B.Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or
adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be
performed during Regular Working Hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work beyond
Regular Working Hours or for Weekend Working Hours without City’s written consent (which will not be
unreasonably withheld). Written request (by letter or electronic communication) to perform Work:
1. for beyond Regular Working Hours, request must be made by noon at least two (2) Business Days
prior
2. for Weekend Working Hours, request must be made by noon of the preceding Wednesday
3. for legal holidays, request must be made by noon seven Days prior to the legal holiday.
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full
responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary
facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, Contractor required testing,
start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract
Documents.
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of
sufficient quality to complete the Work and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of
City. If required by City, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests)
as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.
C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be stored, applied, installed, connected,
IFB 7213 21 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable
Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
D. All items of standard equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be the latest model at the time of
bid, unless otherwise specified.
6.04 Project Schedule
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Project Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 and the
General Requirements as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.
1. Contractor shall submit to City for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07 and the
General Requirements) proposed adjustments in the Project Schedule that will not result in changing
the Contract Time. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements
applicable thereto.
2. Contractor shall submit to City a monthly Project Schedule with a monthly progress payment for the
duration of the Contract in accordance with the schedule specification 01 32 16.
3. Proposed adjustments in the Project Schedule that will change the Contract Time shall be submitted in
accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Time may only be made by a
Change Order.
6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”
A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using
the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is
intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or
description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no
substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to City
for review under the circumstances described below.
1.“Or-Equal” Items: If in City’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor
is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be
required, it may be considered by City as an “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the
proposed item may, in City’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of
the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph
6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so
named if:
a. the City determines that:
1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and
design characteristics;
2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by
the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and
3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and
4) it is not objectionable to the City.
b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:
1) there will be no increase in cost to the City or increase in Contract Time; and
IFB 7213 22 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract
Documents.
2. Substitute Items:
a. If in City’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not
qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it may be submitted as a proposed
substitute item.
b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow City to determine if the
item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable
substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will
not be accepted by City from anyone other than Contractor.
c. Contractor shall make written application to City for review of a proposed substitute item of
material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application shall comply with
Section 01 25 00 and:
1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:
a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design;
b) be similar in substance to that specified;
c) be suited to the same use as that specified; and
2) will state:
a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice
Contractor’s achievement of final completion on time;
b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of
the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with City for
other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item;
c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work
is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty; and
3) will identify:
a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified;
b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and
4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly
from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and Damage Claims of other
contractors affected by any resulting change.
B.Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or
procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or
utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by City.
Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow City, in City’s sole discretion, to determine that the
substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall
make written application to City for review in the same manner as those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.
C.City’s Evaluation: City will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or
IFB 7213 23 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. City may require Contractor to furnish
additional data about the proposed substitute. City will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-equal” or
substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until City’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by a
Change Order in the case of a substitute and an accepted Submittal for an “or-equal.” City will advise
Contractor in writing of its determination.
D.Special Guarantee: City may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance
guarantee, warranty, or other surety with respect to any substitute. Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless City and anyone directly or indirectly employed by them from and against any and all
claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys fees) arising out of the use of
substituted materials or equipment.
E.City’s Cost Reimbursement: City will record City’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted
by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not City approves a substitute so
proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor may be required to reimburse City for evaluating each
such proposed substitute. Contractor may also be required to reimburse City for the charges for making
changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with City) resulting
from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.
F.Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or
“or-equal” at Contractor’s expense.
G.City Substitute Reimbursement: Costs (savings or charges) attributable to acceptance of a substitute shall
be incorporated to the Contract by Change Order.
H.Time Extensions: No additional time will be granted for substitutions.
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others
A. Contractor shall perform with his own organization, work of a value not less than 35% of the value
embraced on the Contract, unless otherwise approved by the City.
B. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as
a replacement, against whom City may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to
employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work
against whom Contractor has reasonable objection (excluding those acceptable to City as indicated in
Paragraph 6.06.C).
C. The City may from time to time require the use of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or
entities on the project, and will provide such requirements in the Supplementary Conditions.
D. Contractor shall be fully responsible to City for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers,
and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible
for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents:
1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any
contractual relationship between City and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or
entity; nor
2. shall create any obligation on the part of City to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any
such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by
Laws and Regulations.
E. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or
indirect contract with Contractor.
IFB 7213 24 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
F. All Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the
Work shall communicate with City through Contractor.
G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate
agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the
Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit
of City.
6.07 Wage Rates
A.Duty to pay Prevailing Wage Rates. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Chapter 2258,
Texas Government Code (as amended), including the payment of not less than the rates determined by
the City Council of the City of Denton to be the prevailing wage rates in accordance with Chapter 2258.
Such prevailing wage rates are included in these Contract Documents.
B.Penalty for Violation. A Contractor or any Subcontractor who does not pay the prevailing wage shall, upon
demand made by the City, pay to the City $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of
the day that the worker is paid less than the prevailing wage rates stipulated in these contract documents.
This penalty shall be retained by the City to offset its administrative costs, pursuant to Texas Government
Code 2258.023.
C.Complaints of Violations and City Determination of Good Cause. On receipt of information, including a
complaint by a worker, concerning an alleged violation of 2258.023, Texas Government Code, by a
Contractor or Subcontractor, the City shall make an initial determination, before the 31st day after the
date the City receives the information, as to whether good cause exists to believe that the violation
occurred. The City shall notify in writing the Contractor or Subcontractor and any affected worker of its
initial determination. Upon the City’s determination that there is good cause to believe the Contractor or
Subcontractor has violated Chapter 2258, the City shall retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or
claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the prevailing wage rates, such
amounts being subtracted from successive progress payments pending a final determination of the
violation.
D.Arbitration Required if Violation Not Resolved. An issue relating to an alleged violation of Section 2258.023,
Texas Government Code, including a penalty owed to the City or an affected worker, shall be submitted to
binding arbitration in accordance with the Texas General Arbitration Act (Article 224 et seq., Revised
Statutes) if the Contractor or Subcontractor and any affected worker does not resolve the issue by
agreement before the 15th day after the date the City makes its initial determination pursuant to
Paragraph C above. If the persons required to arbitrate under this section do not agree on an arbitrator
before the 11th day after the date that arbitration is required, a district court shall appoint an arbitrator on
the petition of any of the persons. The City is not a party in the arbitration. The decision and award of the
arbitrator is final and binding on all parties and may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction.
E.Records to be Maintained. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall, for a period of three (3) years
following the date of acceptance of the work, maintain records that show (i) the name and occupation of
each worker employed by the Contractor in the construction of the Work provided for in this Contract; and
(ii) the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. The records shall be open at all reasonable hours for
inspection by the City. The provisions of Paragraph 6.23, Right to Audit, shall pertain to this inspection.
F.Progress Payments. With each progress payment or payroll period, whichever is less, the Contractor shall
submit an affidavit stating that the Contractor has complied with the requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas
Government Code.
G.Posting of Wage Rates. The Contractor shall post prevailing wage rates in a conspicuous place at all
times.
IFB 7213 25 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
H.Subcontractor Compliance. The Contractor shall include in its subcontracts and/or shall otherwise require
all of its Subcontractors to comply with Paragraphs A through G above.
6.08 Patent Fees and Royalties
A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or
device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design,
process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work
and if, to the actual knowledge of City, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the
payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by City in
the Contract Documents. Failure of the City to disclose such information does not relieve the Contractor
from its obligations to pay for the use of said fees or royalties to others.
B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless City, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited
to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent
rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the
incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the
Contract Documents.
6.09 Permits and Utilities
A.Contractor obtained permits and licenses. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and
licenses except those provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or Contract Documents. City shall
assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all
governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable
at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement, except for
permits provided by the City as specified in 6.09.B. City shall pay all charges of utility owners for
connections for providing permanent service to the Work.
B.City obtained permits and licenses. City will obtain and pay for all permits and licenses as provided for in
the Supplementary Conditions or Contract Documents. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to carry out
the provisions of the permit. If the Contractor initiates changes to the Contract and the City approves the
changes, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining clearances and coordinating with the appropriate
regulatory agency. The City will not reimburse the Contractor for any cost associated with these
requirements of any City acquired permit. The following are permits the City will obtain if required:
1. Texas Department of Transportation Permits
2. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Permits
3. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Permits
4. Railroad Company Permits
5. Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR) Permits
C.Outstanding permits and licenses. The City anticipates acquisition of and/or access to permits and
licenses. Any outstanding permits and licenses are anticipated to be acquired in accordance with the
schedule set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The Project Schedule submitted by the Contractor in
accordance with the Contract Documents must consider any outstanding permits and licenses.
6.10 Laws and Regulations
IFB 7213 26 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and
Regulations, the City shall not be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or
Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or
Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or
other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor’s
responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and
Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.02.
C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids having an effect on the cost or
time of performance of the Work may be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time.
6.11 Taxes
A. On a contract awarded by the City, an organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant to Texas Tax
Code, Subchapter H (as amended), the Contractor may purchase, rent or lease all materials, supplies and
equipment used or consumed in the performance of this contract by issuing to his supplier an exemption
certificate in lieu of the tax, said exemption certificate to comply with State Comptroller’s Rulings applicable
to Texas Tax Code, Subchapter H. Any such exemption certificate issued to the Contractor in lieu of the
tax shall be subject to and shall comply with all applicable rulings pertaining to the Texas Tax Code,
Subchapter H.
B. Texas Tax permits and information may be obtained from:
1. Comptroller of Public Accounts
Sales Tax Division
Capitol Station Austin,
TX 78711; or
2.http://www.window.state.tx.us/taxinfo/taxforms/93-forms.html
6.12 Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:
1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the
operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not
unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or
equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to
the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of
the Work.
2. At any time when, in the judgment of the City, the Contractor has obstructed, closed, or is carrying on
operations in a portion of a street, right-of-way, or easement greater than is necessary for proper
execution of the Work, the City may require the Contractor to finish the section on which operations
are in progress before work is commenced on any additional area of the Site.
3. Construction equipment, spoil materials, supplies, forms, buildings, labs, or equipment and supply
storage buildings, or any other item that may be transported by flood flows, shall not be stored
within existing federal floodways during the course of the Work.
IFB 7213 27 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
4. Should any Damage Claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of
the Work, Contractor shall promptly attempt to resolve the Damage Claim.
5. Pursuant to Paragraph 6.21, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless City, from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to any claim or action,
legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against City.
B.Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall
keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris.
Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws
and Regulations.
C.Site Maintenance Cleaning: 24 hours after written notice is given to the Contractor that the clean-up on
the job site is proceeding in a manner unsatisfactory to the City, if the Contractor fails to correct the
unsatisfactory procedure, the City may take such direct action as the City deems appropriate to correct the
clean-up deficiencies cited to the Contractor in the written notice (by letter or electronic communication),
and the costs of such direct action, plus 25% of such costs, shall be deducted from the monies due or to
become due to the Contractor.
D.Final Site Cleaning: Prior to Final Acceptance of the Work, Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work
and make it ready for utilization by City or adjacent property owner. At the completion of the Work
Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and
surplus materials and shall restore to original condition or better all property disturbed by the Work.
E.Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any
manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent
property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.
6.13 Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site or in a place designated by the Contractor and
approved by the City, one (1) record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Field
Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made
during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all
accepted Submittals will be available to City for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record
documents, any operation and maintenance manuals, and Submittals will be delivered to City prior to Final
Inspection. Contractor shall include accurate locations for buried and embedded items.
6.14 Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and
programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their
responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with
applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of,
and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the
Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or
replacement in the course of construction.
IFB 7213 28 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or
property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and
maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of
adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work
may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of
their property.
C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of City’s safety programs, if any.
D. Contractor shall inform City of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program, if any, with which
City’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site.
E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.14.A.2 or 6.14.A.3 caused, directly or
indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity
directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of
them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor.
F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such
time as all the Work is completed and City has accepted the Work.
6.15 Safety Representative
Contractor shall inform City in writing of Contractor’s designated safety representative at the Site.
6.16 Hazard Communication Programs
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard
communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers in
accordance with Laws or Regulations.
6.17 Emergencies and/or Rectification
A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent
thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give
City prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from
the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If City determines
that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in
response to such an emergency, a Change Order may be issued.
B. Should the Contractor fail to respond to a request from the City to rectify any discrepancies, omissions, or
correction necessary to conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the City shall give the
Contractor written notice that such work or changes are to be performed. The written notice shall direct
attention to the discrepant condition and request the Contractor to take remedial action to correct the
condition. In the event the Contractor does not take positive steps to fulfill this written request, or does not
show just cause for not taking the proper action, within 24 hours, the City may take such remedial action
with City resources or by contract. The City shall deduct an amount equal to the entire costs for such
remedial action, plus 25%, from any funds due or become due the Contractor on the Project.
6.18 Submittals
A. Contractor shall submit required Submittals to City for review and acceptance in accordance with the
accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as City
may require.
1. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements.
2. Data shown on the Submittals will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified
IFB 7213 29 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data, to demonstrate to City the services,
materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide, and to enable City to review the information
for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.18.C.
3. Submittals submitted as herein provided by Contractor and reviewed by City for conformance with the
design concept shall be executed in conformity with the Contract Documents unless otherwise
required by City.
4. When Submittals are submitted for the purpose of showing the installation in greater detail, their
review shall not excuse Contractor from requirements shown on the Drawings and Specifications.
5. For-Information-Only submittals upon which the City is not expected to conduct review or take
responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.
6. Submit required number of Samples specified in the Specifications.
7. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use
for which intended and other data as City may require to enable City to review the submittal for the
limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.18.C.
B. Where a Submittal is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work
performed prior to City’s review and acceptance of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and
responsibility of Contractor.
C. City’s Review:
1. City will provide timely review of required Submittals in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals
acceptable to City. City’s review and acceptance will be only to determine if the items covered by the
submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the
Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.
2. City’s review and acceptance will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or
procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to
safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and acceptance of a separate item as
such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.
3. City’s review and acceptance shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of
Section 01 33 00 and City has given written acceptance of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Submittal. City’s review and acceptance shall
not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
6.19 Continuing the Work
Except as otherwise provided, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Project Schedule during
all disputes or disagreements with City. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as City and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.20 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to City that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract
Documents and will not be defective. City and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor’s warranty
and guarantee.
IFB 7213 30 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor,
Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance
with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents:
1. observations by City;
2. recommendation or payment by City of any progress or final payment;
3. the issuance of a certificate of Final Acceptance by City or any payment related thereto by City;
4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by City;
5. any review and acceptance of a Submittal by City;
6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or
7. any correction of defective Work by City.
D. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the Work and pay for any damage to other work
or property resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of two (2) years from the date of Final
Acceptance of the Work unless a longer period is specified and shall furnish a good and sufficient
maintenance bond, complying with the requirements of Article
5.02.B. The City will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.
6.21 Indemnification
A. Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, at its own expense, the
City, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims arising out of, or
alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed by the Contractor, its officers, agents,
employees, subcontractors, licenses or invitees under this
Contract. THIS INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE AND BE
EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVEN THAT ALL OR SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING
SOUGHT WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BY ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF
THE CITY. This indemnity
provision is intended to include, without limitation, indemnity for costs, expenses and legal fees
incurred by the City in defending against such claims and causes of actions.
B. Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless, at its own expense, the City, its
officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all loss, damage or destruction of
property of the City, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed
by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees under this
Contract. THIS INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE AND BE
EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVEN THAT ALL OR SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING
SOUGHT WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BY ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE
OF THE CITY.
6.22 Delegation of Professional Design Services
IFB 7213 31 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically
required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to
carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures.
B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or
equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, City will specify all
performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or
certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on
all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and Submittals prepared by such professional.
Submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear
such professional’s written approval when submitted to City.
C. City shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications
or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided City has specified to Contractor
performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.
D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.22, City’s review and acceptance of design calculations and design drawings
will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given
and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. City’s review and acceptance of Submittals
(except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.18.C.
6.23 Right to Audit
A. The City shall have the right to audit and make copies of the books, records and computations pertaining
to the Contract. The Contractor shall retain such books, records, documents and other evidence pertaining
to the Contract period and five years thereafter, except if an audit is in progress or audit findings are yet
unresolved, in which case records shall be kept until all audit tasks are completed and resolved. These
books, records, documents and other evidence shall be available, within ten (10) business days of written
request. Further, the Contractor shall also require all Subcontractors, material suppliers, and other payees
to retain all books, records, documents and other evidence pertaining to the Contract, and to allow the
City similar access to those documents. All books and records will be made available within a 50 mile
radius of the City. The cost of the audit will be borne by the City unless the audit reveals an overpayment
of 1% or greater. If an overpayment of 1% or greater occurs, the reasonable cost of the audit, including
any travel costs, must be borne by the Contractor which must be payable within five (5) business days of
receipt of an invoice.
B. Failure to comply with the provisions of this section shall be a material breach of the Contract and shall
constitute, in the City’s sole discretion, grounds for termination thereof. Each of the terms “books”,
“records”, “documents” and “other evidence”, as used above, shall be construed to include drafts and
electronic files, even if such drafts or electronic files are subsequently used to generate or prepare a final
printed document.
6.24 Nondiscrimination
A. The City is responsible for operating Public Transportation Programs and implementing transit- related
projects, which are funded in part with Federal financial assistance awarded by the U.S. Department of
Transportation and the Federal Transit Administration (FTA), without discriminating against any person in
the United States on the basis of race, color, or national origin.
B.Title VI, Civil Rights Act of 1964 as amended: Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Act
and the Regulations as further defined in the Supplementary Conditions for any project receiving Federal
assistance.
ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
IFB 7213 32 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
7.01 Related Work at Site
A. City may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with City’s employees, or other City
contractors, or through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If
such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then written notice thereof will be given to
Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and
B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner,
and City, if City is performing other work with City’s employees or other City contractors, proper and safe
access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and
equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor
shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise
make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not
endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however,
that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of City and the others whose work
will be affected.
C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others
under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to City in writing any
delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper
execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of
such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects in the
work provided by others.
7.02 Coordination
A. If City intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the
following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions:
1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities
among the various contractors will be identified;
2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and
3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided.
B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, City shall have authority for such
coordination.
ARTICLE 8 – CITY’S RESPONSIBILITIES
8.01 Communications to Contractor
Except as otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, City shall issue all communications to
Contractor.
8.02 Furnish Data
City shall timely furnish the data required under the Contract Documents.
8.03 Pay When Due
City shall make payments to Contractor in accordance with Article 14.
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 33 of 63
IFB 7213 33 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
8.04 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests
City’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish
reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to City’s identifying and
making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and
drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the
Site that have been utilized by City in preparing the Contract Documents.
8.05 Change Orders
City shall execute Change Orders in accordance with Paragraph 10.03.
8.06 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
City’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.
8.07 Limitations on City’s Responsibilities
A. The City shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s
means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable
to the performance of the Work. City will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. City will notify the Contractor of applicable safety plans pursuant to Paragraph 6.14.
8.08 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition
City’s responsibility with respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in
Paragraph 4.06.
8.09 Compliance with Safety Program
While at the Site, City’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements
of Contractor’s safety programs of which City has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.14.
ARTICLE 9 – CITY’S OBSERVATION STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.01 City’s Project Manager or Duly Authorized Representative
City will provide a Project Manager or duly authorized representative during the construction period. The
duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of City’s Project Manager or duly appointed
representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents. City’s Project Manager for this
Contract is as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. City will establish a duly authorized representative at
the Preconstruction Meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
9.02 Visits to Site
A. City will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as City deems
necessary in order to observe the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of
Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, City will
determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. City will not
be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of
the Work. City’s efforts will be directed toward providing City a greater degree of confidence that the
completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents.
B. City’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on authority and responsibility set forth in
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 34 of 63
IFB 7213 34 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
Paragraph 8.07. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of City’s visits or observations of
Contractor’s Work, City will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and
Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.
9.03 Authorized Variations in Work
City’s Project Manager or duly authorized representative may authorize minor variations in the Work from the
requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the
Contract Time and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on
City and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly.
9.04 Rejecting Defective Work
City will have authority to reject Work which City’s Project Manager or duly authorized representative believes
to be defective, or will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will
prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the
Contract Documents. City will have authority to conduct special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in
Article 13, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.
9.05 Determinations for Work Performed
Contractor will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Work performed. City’s Project Manager or
duly authorized representative will review with Contractor the preliminary determinations on such matters
before rendering a written recommendation. City’s written decision will be final (except as modified to reflect
changed factual conditions or more accurate data).
9.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work
A. City will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the
acceptability of the Work thereunder.
B. City will render a written decision on any issue referred.
C. City’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on the Contractor, subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 10.06.
ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS; EXTRA WORK
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, City may, at any time or from time to
time, order Extra Work. Upon notice of such Extra Work, Contractor shall proceed with the Work involved
only upon receiving written notice from City. Extra Work will be performed under the applicable conditions
of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). Extra Work shall be memorialized
by a Change Order which may or may not precede an order of Extra work.
B. For minor changes of Work not requiring changes to Contract Time or Contract Price, a Field Order may
be issued by the City.
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with
respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or
supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 35 of 63
IFB 7213 35 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
6.17.
10.03 Execution of Change Orders
A. City and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:
1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by City pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required
because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08 or City’s correction of defective Work
under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;
2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties, including any
undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed.
10.04 Dispute of Extra Work
A. Should a difference arise as to what does or does not constitute Extra Work, or as to the payment thereof,
and the City insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written
request for written orders and shall keep accurate account of the actual reasonable cost thereof. Contract
Claims regarding Extra Work shall be made pursuant to Paragraph 10.06.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the City such installation records of all deviations from the original Contract
Documents as may be necessary to enable the City to prepare for permanent record a corrected set of
plans showing the actual installation.
C. The compensation agreed upon for Extra Work whether or not initiated by a Change Order shall be a full,
complete and final payment for all costs Contractor incurs as a result or relating to the change or Extra
Work, whether said costs are known, unknown, foreseen or unforeseen at that time, including without
limitation, any costs for delay, extended overhead, ripple or impact cost, or any other effect on changed or
unchanged work as a result of the change or Extra Work.
10.05 Notification to Surety
If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of
the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract
Time), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond
will be adjusted by the Contractor to reflect the effect of any such change.
10.06 Contract Claims Process
A. City’s Decision Required: All Contract Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be
referred to the City for decision. A decision by City shall be required as a condition precedent to any
exercise by Contractor of any rights or remedies he may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or
by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Contract Claims.
B. Notice:
1. Written notice stating the general nature of each Contract Claim shall be delivered by the Contractor to
City no later than 15 days after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to
substantiate a Contract Claim shall rest with the party making the Contract Claim.
2. Notice of the amount or extent of the Contract Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the
City on or before 45 days from the start of the event giving rise thereto (unless the City allows
additional time for Contractor to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Contract
Claim).
3. A Contract Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 36 of 63
IFB 7213 36 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
provisions of Paragraph 12.01.
4. A Contract Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the
provisions of Paragraph 12.02.
5. Each Contract Claim shall be accompanied by Contractor’s written statement that the adjustment
claimed is the entire adjustment to which the Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event.
6. The City shall submit any response to the Contractor within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s last
submittal (unless Contract allows additional time).
C.City’s Action: City will review each Contract Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of
the Contractor, if any, take one of the following actions in writing:
1. deny the Contract Claim in whole or in part;
2. approve the Contract Claim; or
3. notify the Contractor that the City is unable to resolve the Contract Claim if, in the City’s sole
discretion, it would be inappropriate for the City to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the
Contract Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial.
D. City’s written action under Paragraph 10.06.C will be final and binding, unless City or Contractor invoke
the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial.
E. No Contract Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time will be valid if not submitted in
accordance with this Paragraph 10.06.
F. If the City fails to take any action pursuant to Paragraph 10.06 (C) the contract Claim is considered to
have been denied by the City.
ARTICLE 11 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK; PLANS QUANTITY
MEASUREMENT
11.01 Cost of the Work
A.Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in
Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work.
When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be
only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work. Such costs shall
not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall include but not be limited to the
following items:
1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under
schedules of job classifications agreed upon by City and Contractor. Such employees shall include,
without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work.
Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of
their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include;
a. salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security
contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and
retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The
expenses of performing Work outside of Regular Working Hours, Weekend Working Hours, or
legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by City.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of
transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith.
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 37 of 63
IFB 7213 37 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
3. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from
Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by City, and the costs of
transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be
in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery,
or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
4. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by
City, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to City and Contractor
and shall deliver such bids to City, who will then determine, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If
any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a
fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as
Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01.
5. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories,
surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work.
6. Supplemental costs including the following:
a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of
Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery,
appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers,
which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items
used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor.
c. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is
liable not covered under Paragraph 6.11, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.
d. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and
royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.
e. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated
by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the
Work, provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for
whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the
written consent and approval of City. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in
the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.
f. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.
g. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone and communication
services at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with
the Work.
h. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract
Documents to purchase and maintain.
B.Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships
and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators,
attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks,
and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 38 of 63
IFB 7213 38 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule
of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph
11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.
2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site.
3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the
Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.
4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the
correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good
any damage to property.
5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind.
C.Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be
determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order for an
adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be
determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C.
D.Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to
Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance
with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to City an itemized cost
breakdown together with supporting data.
11.02 Allowances
A.Specified Allowance: It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so
named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums
and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to City.
B. Cash Allowances:
1. Contractor agrees that:
a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of
materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable
taxes; and
b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and
other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the allowances, and
no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.
C.Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of City.
D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued to reflect actual amounts due
Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly
adjusted.
11.03 Unit Price Work
A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the
Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit
price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as
indicated in the Agreement.
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 39 of 63
IFB 7213 39 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of
comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by
City subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.05.
C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover
Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Work described in the Contract
Documents, or reasonably inferred as required for a functionally complete installation, but not identified in
the listing of unit price items shall be considered incidental to unit price work listed and the cost of
incidental work included as part of the unit price.
D. City may make an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 12.01 if:
1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly
from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and
2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work.
E.Increased or Decreased Quantities: The City reserves the right to order Extra Work in accordance with
Paragraph 10.01.
1. If the changes in quantities or the alterations do not significantly change the character of work under
the Contract Documents, the altered work will be paid for at the Contract unit price.
2. If the changes in quantities or alterations significantly change the character of work, the Contract will
be amended by a Change Order.
3. If no unit prices exist, this will be considered Extra Work and the Contract will be amended by a
Change Order in accordance with Article 12.
4. A significant change in the character of work occurs when:
a. the character of work for any Item as altered differs materially in kind or nature from that in the
Contract or
b. a Major Item of work varies by more than 25% from the original Contract quantity.
5. When the quantity of work to be done under any Major Item of the Contract is more than 125% of the
original quantity stated in the Contract, then either party to the Contract may request an adjustment to
the unit price on the portion of the work that is above 125%.
6. When the quantity of work to be done under any Major Item of the Contract is less than 75% of the
original quantity stated in the Contract, then either party to the Contract may request an adjustment to
the unit price.
11.04 Plans Quantity Measurement for Unclassified Excavation or Embankment
A. Plans quantities may or may not represent the exact quantity of work performed or material moved,
handled, or placed during the execution of the Contract. The estimated bid quantities are designated as
final payment quantities, unless revised by the governing Section or this Article.
B. If the quantity measured as outlined under “Price and Payment Procedures” varies by more than 25% (or
as stipulated under “Price and Payment Procedures” for specific Items) from the total estimated quantity for
an individual Item originally shown in the Contract Documents, an adjustment may be made to the quantity
of authorized work done for payment purposes. The party to the Contract requesting the adjustment will
provide field measurements and calculations showing the final quantity for which payment will be made.
Payment for revised quantity will be made at the unit price bid for that Item, except as provided for in
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 40 of 63
IFB 7213 40 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
Article 10.
C. When quantities are revised by a change in design approved by the City, by Change Order, or to correct
an error, or to correct an error on the plans, the plans quantity will be increased or decreased by the
amount involved in the change, and the 25% variance will apply to the new plans quantity.
D. If the total Contract quantity multiplied by the unit price bid for an individual Item is less than
$250 and the Item is not originally a plans quantity Item, then the Item may be paid as a plans quantity
Item if the City and Contractor agree in writing to fix the final quantity as a plans quantity.
E. For callout work or non-site specific Contracts, the plans quantity measurement requirements are not
applicable.
ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
12.01 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order.
B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order will be determined as follows:
1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of
Paragraph 11.03); or
2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a
mutually agreed lump sum or unit price (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not
necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2), and shall include the cost of any secondary
impacts that are foreseeable at the time of pricing the cost of Extra Work; or
3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement to a lump sum or unit price is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the
Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead
and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C).
C.Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s additional fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:
1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions
of the Cost of the Work:
a.for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1, 11.01.A.2. and 11.01.A.3, the
Contractor’s additional fee shall be 15 percent except for:
1)rental fees for Contractor’s own equipment using standard rental rates;
2)bonds and insurance;
b.for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.4 and 11.01.A.5, the Contractor’s fee shall be five
percent (5%);
1)where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and
no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is that the
Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15
percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 41 of 63
IFB 7213 41 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five
percent (5%) of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor, however in no case
shall the cumulative total of fees paid be in excess of 25%;
c.no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.6, and
11.01.B;
d.the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to City for any change which results in a net
decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in
Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent (5%) of such net decrease.
12.02 Change of Contract Time
A. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order.
B. No extension of the Contract Time will be allowed for Extra Work or for claimed delay unless the Extra
Work contemplated or claimed delay is shown to be on the critical path of the Project Schedule or
Contractor can show by Critical Path Method analysis how the Extra Work or claimed delay adversely
affects the critical path.
12.03 Delays
A. Where Contractor is reasonably delayed in the performance or completion of any part of the Work within
the Contract Time due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time may be extended in
an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Contract Claim is made therefor. Delays beyond
the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by City, acts or neglect of utility
owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics,
abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive
remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph.
B. If Contractor is delayed, City shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in
connection with any other project or anticipated project.
C. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time for delays within the
control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be
deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work, except when direct
and unavoidable extra cost to the Contractor is caused by the failure of the City to provide information or
material, if any, which is to be furnished by the City.
ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.01 Notice of Defects
Notice of all defective Work of which City has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. Defective Work
may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13.
13.02 Access to Work
City, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access
to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall
provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures
and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 42 of 63
IFB 7213 42 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
13.03 Tests and Inspections
A. Contractor shall give City timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or
approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or
tests.
B. If Contract Documents, Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any
of the Work (or part thereof) to be inspected, tested, or approved, Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for arranging and obtaining such independent inspections, tests, retests or approvals, pay all
costs in connection therewith, and furnish City the required certificates of inspection or approval; excepting,
however, those fees specifically identified in the Supplementary Conditions or any Texas Department of
Licensure and Regulation (TDLR) inspections, which shall be paid as described in the Supplementary
Conditions.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any
inspections, tests, re-tests, or approvals required for City’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be
incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval
prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, re-tests, or
approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to City.
D. City may arrange for the services of an independent testing laboratory (“Testing Lab”) to perform any
inspections or tests (“Testing”) for any part of the Work, as determined solely by City.
1. City will coordinate such Testing to the extent possible, with Contractor;
2. Should any Testing under this Section 13.03 D result in a “fail”, “did not pass” or other similar negative
result, the Contractor shall be responsible for paying for any and all retests. Contractor’s cancellation
without cause of City initiated Testing shall be deemed a negative result and require a retest.
3. Any amounts owed for any retest under this Section 13.03 D shall be paid directly to the Testing Lab
by Contractor. City will forward all invoices for retests to Contractor.
4. If Contractor fails to pay the Testing Lab, City will not issue Final Payment until the Testing Lab is
paid.
E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor
without written concurrence of City, Contractor shall, if requested by City, uncover such Work for
observation.
F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense.
G. Contractor shall have the right to make a Contract Claim regarding any retest or invoice issued under
Section 13.03 D.
13.04 Uncovering Work
A. If any Work is covered contrary to the Contract Documents or specific instructions by the City, it must, if
requested by City, be uncovered for City’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense.
B. If City considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by City or inspected or tested
by others, Contractor, at City’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for
observation, inspection, or testing as City may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all
necessary labor, material, and equipment.
1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and
damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 43 of 63
IFB 7213 43 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or
reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); or City
shall be entitled to accept defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.08 in which case
Contractor shall still be responsible for all costs associated with exposing, observing, and testing the
defective Work.
2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an extension of the
Contract Time directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing,
replacement, and reconstruction.
13.05 City May Stop the Work
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract
Documents, City may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order
has been eliminated; however, this right of City to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of
City to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or
entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work
A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work pursuant to an
acceptable schedule, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected
by City, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all
claims, costs, additional testing, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all
costs of repair or replacement of work of others). Failure to require the removal of any defective Work shall
not constitute acceptance of such Work.
B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor
shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair City’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on
said Work.
13.07 Correction Period
A. If within two (2) years after the date of Final Acceptance (or such longer period of time as may be
prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents), any
Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for
Contractor’s use by City or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.10.A is
found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to City and in accordance with City’s written
instructions:
1. repair such defective land or areas; or
2. correct such defective Work; or
3. if the defective Work has been rejected by City, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work
that is not defective, and
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others
or other land or areas resulting therefrom.
B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of City’s written instructions, or in an emergency
where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, City may have the defective Work corrected or
repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 44 of 63
IFB 7213 44 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or
repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others) will be paid by Contractor.
C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final
Acceptance of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so
provided in the Contract Documents.
D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed
and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work may
be required to be extended for an additional period of one year after the end of the initial correction period.
City shall provide 30 days written notice to Contractor should such additional warranty coverage be
required. Contractor may dispute this requirement by filing a Contract Claim, pursuant to Paragraph 10.06.
E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The
provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions
of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, City prefers to accept it, City
may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees
and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or other dispute
resolution costs) attributable to City’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work and for
the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance
occurs prior to Final Acceptance, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the
Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and City shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the
Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted.
13.09 City May Correct Defective Work
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from City to correct defective Work, or to
remove and replace rejected Work as required by City in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if
Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to
comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, City may, after seven (7) days written notice
to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, City shall proceed expeditiously. In
connection with such corrective or remedial action, City may exclude Contractor from all or part of the
Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment incorporated in the Work, stored at the Site or for
which City has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow City, City’s
representatives, agents, consultants, employees, and City’s other contractors, access to the Site to enable
City to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or
sustained by City in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph
13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the
necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and City shall be entitled to an
appropriate decrease in the Contract Price.
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of City’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph
13.09.
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 45 of 63
IFB 7213 45 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
14.01 Schedule of Values
The Schedule of Values for lump sum contracts established as provided in Paragraph 2.07 will serve as the
basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment
acceptable to City. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.02 Progress Payments
A. Applications for Payments:
1. Contractor is responsible for providing all information as required to become a vendor of the City.
2. At least 20 days before the date established in the General Requirements for each progress payment,
Contractor shall submit to City for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by
Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
3. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but
delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for
Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that
City has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the
materials and equipment are covered by appropriate insurance or other arrangements to protect City’s
interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to City.
4. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of
Contractor stating that previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been
applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications
for Payment.
5. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Contract
Documents.
B. Review of Applications:
1. City will, after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of
payment or return the Application to Contractor indicating reasons for refusing payment. In the latter
case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
2. City’s processing of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will be based on City’s
observations of the executed Work, and on City’s review of the Application for Payment and the
accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of City’s knowledge:
a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an
evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Final Acceptance, the results of any
subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and
classifications for Work performed under Paragraph 9.05, and any other qualifications stated in the
recommendation).
3. Processing any such payment will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:
a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have
00 72 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 46 of 63
IFB 7213 46 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed
inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to City in the Contract
Documents; or
b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be
paid additionally by City or entitle City to withhold payment to Contractor, or
c. Contractor has complied with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s
performance of the Work.
4. City may refuse to process the whole or any part of any payment because of subsequently discovered
evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, and revise or revoke any such payment
previously made, to such extent as may be necessary to protect City from loss because:
a. the Work is defective, or the completed Work has been damaged by the Contractor or his
subcontractors, requiring correction or replacement;
b. discrepancies in quantities contained in previous applications for payment;
c. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
d. City has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph
13.09; or
e. City has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph
15.02.A.
C. Retainage:
1. For all contracts, retainage shall be five percent (5%).
D.Liquidated Damages: For each calendar day that any work shall remain uncompleted after the time
specified in the Contract Documents, the sum per day specified in the Agreement, will be deducted from
the monies due the Contractor, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages suffered by the City.
E.Payment: Contractor will be paid pursuant to the requirements of this Article 14 and payment will become
due in accordance with the Contract Documents.
F. Reduction in Payment:
1. City may refuse to make payment of the amount requested because:
a. Claims have been made against City on account of Contractor’s performance or
furnishing of the Work;
b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific bond satisfactory to City to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such
Liens;
c. there are other items entitling City to a set-off against the amount recommended; or
d. City has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
Paragraphs 14.02.B.4.a through 14.02.B.4.e or Paragraph 15.02.A.
2. If City refuses to make payment of the amount requested, City will give Contractor written notice
stating the reasons for such action and pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the
amount so withheld. City shall pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto
agreed to by City and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the reasons for such action.
IFB 7213 47 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application
for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to City no later than the time of payment free
and clear of all Liens.
14.04 Partial Utilization
A. Prior to Final Acceptance of all the Work, City may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the
Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which City, determines
constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by City for its intended
purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work. City
at any time may notify Contractor in writing to permit City to use or occupy any such part of the Work
which City determines to be ready for its intended use, subject to the following conditions:
1. Contractor at any time may notify City in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use.
2. Within a reasonable time after notification as enumerated in Paragraph 14.05.A.1, City and Contractor
shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If City does not
consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, City will notify Contractor in writing giving
the reasons therefor.
3. Partial Utilization will not constitute Final Acceptance by City.
14.05 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work is complete in accordance with the Contract
Documents:
1. City will promptly schedule a Final Inspection with Contractor.
2. City will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to
complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
B. City reserves the right to deny request for Final Inspection if City determines that the entire Work is not
sufficiently complete to warrant a Final Inspection.
14.06 Final Acceptance
Upon completion by Contractor to City’s satisfaction, of any additional Work identified in the Final Inspection,
City will issue to Contractor a letter of Final Acceptance.
14.07 Final Payment
A. Application for Payment:
1. Upon Final Acceptance, and in the opinion of City, Contractor may make an application for final
payment following the procedure for progress payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:
a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the
evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.03;
IFB 7213 48 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c. a list of all pending or released Damage Claims against City that Contractor believes are
unsettled; and
d. affidavits of payments and complete and legally effective releases or waivers
(satisfactory to City) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.
B. Payment Becomes Due:
1. After City’s acceptance of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation,
requested by Contractor, less previous payments made and any sum City is entitled, including
but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and payable.
2. After all Damage Claims have been resolved:
a. directly by the Contractor or;
b. Contractor provides evidence that the Damage Claim has been reported to
Contractor’s insurance provider for resolution.
3. The making of the final payment by the City shall not relieve the Contractor of any
guarantees or other requirements of the Contract Documents which specifically continue thereafter.
14.08 Final Completion Delayed and Partial Retainage Release
A. If final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if City so confirms, City may, upon receipt of
Contractor’s final Application for Payment, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held
by City for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in Paragraph
14.02.C, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.02, the written consent of the
surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall
be submitted by Contractor to City with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made
under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of
Contract Claims.
B.Partial Retainage Release. For a Contract that provides for a separate vegetative establishment and
maintenance, and test and performance periods following the completion of all other construction in the
Contract Documents for all Work locations, the City may release a portion of the amount retained provided
that all other work is completed as determined by the City. Before the release, all submittals and final
quantities must be completed and accepted for all other work. An amount sufficient to ensure Contract
compliance will be retained.
14.09 Waiver of Claims
The acceptance of final payment will constitute a release of the City from all claims or liabilities under the
Contract for anything done or furnished or relating to the work under the Contract Documents or any act or
neglect of City related to or connected with the Contract.
ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.01 City May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, City may suspend the Work or any portion thereof by written notice to
Contractor and which may fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work
on the date so fixed. During temporary suspension of the Work covered by these Contract Documents, for
any reason, the City will make no extra payment for stand-by time of construction equipment and/or
construction crews.
B. Should the Contractor not be able to complete a portion of the Project due to causes beyond the control of
IFB 7213 49 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and should it be determined by mutual consent of the
Contractor and City that a solution to allow construction to proceed is not available within a reasonable
period of time, Contractor may request an extension in Contract Time, directly attributable to any such
suspension.
C. If it should become necessary to suspend the Work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all
materials in such a manner that they will not obstruct or impede the public unnecessarily nor become
damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work
performed; he shall provide suitable drainage about the work, and erect temporary structures where
necessary.
D. Contractor may be reimbursed for the cost of moving his equipment off the job and returning the
necessary equipment to the job when it is determined by the City that construction may be resumed. Such
reimbursement shall be based on actual cost to the Contractor of moving the equipment and no profit will
be allowed. Reimbursement may not be allowed if the equipment is moved to another construction project
for the City.
15.02 City May Terminate for Cause
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events by way of example, but not of limitation,
may justify termination for cause:
1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
(including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment, failure to adhere to the Project Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted
from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04.
2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
3. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of City; or
4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents; or
5. Contractor’s failure to promptly make good any defect in materials or workmanship, or defects of any
nature, the correction of which has been directed in writing by the City; or
6. Substantial indication that the Contractor has made an unauthorized assignment of the Contract or
any funds due therefrom for the benefit of any creditor or for any other purpose; or
7. Substantial evidence that the Contractor has become insolvent or bankrupt, or otherwise financially
unable to carry on the Work satisfactorily; or
8. Contractor commences legal action in a court of competent jurisdiction against the City.
B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02A. occur, City will provide written notice to
Contractor and Surety to arrange a conference with Contractor and Surety to address Contractor's failure
to perform the Work. Conference shall be held not later than 15 days, after receipt of notice.
1. If the City, the Contractor, and the Surety do not agree to allow the Contractor to proceed to perform
the construction Contract, the City may, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, declare a
Contractor default and formally terminate the Contractor's right to complete the Contract. Contractor
default shall not be declared earlier than 20 days after the Contractor and Surety have received notice
of conference to address Contractor's failure to perform the Work.
2. If Contractor's services are terminated, Surety shall be obligated to take over and perform the Work. If
Surety does not commence performance thereof within 15 consecutive calendar days after date of an
IFB 7213 50 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
additional written notice demanding Surety's performance of its obligations, then City, without process
or action at law, may take over any portion of the Work and complete it as described below.
a. If City completes the Work, City may exclude Contractor and Surety from the site and take
possession of the Work, and all materials and equipment incorporated into the Work stored at
the Site or for which City has paid Contractor or Surety but which are stored elsewhere, and
finish the Work as City may deem expedient.
3. Whether City or Surety completes the Work, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further
payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims,
costs, losses and damages sustained by City arising out of or resulting from completing the Work,
such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid
balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to City. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred
by City will be incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies
under this Paragraph, City shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
4. Neither City, nor any of its respective consultants, agents, officers, directors or employees shall be in
any way liable or accountable to Contractor or Surety for the method by which the completion of the
said Work, or any portion thereof, may be accomplished or for the price paid therefor.
5. City, notwithstanding the method used in completing the Contract, shall not forfeit the right to recover
damages from Contractor or Surety for Contractor's failure to timely complete the entire Contract.
Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim on account of the method used by City in completing the
Contract.
6. Maintenance of the Work shall continue to be Contractor's and Surety's responsibilities as provided for
in the bond requirements of the Contract Documents or any special guarantees provided for under the
Contract Documents or any other obligations otherwise prescribed by law.
C. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if Contractor begins
within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds
diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice.
D. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by City, the termination will not affect any rights or
remedies of City against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment
of moneys due Contractor by City will not release Contractor from liability.
E. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph
5.02, the termination procedures of that bond shall not supersede the provisions of this Article.
15.03 City May Terminate For Convenience
A. City may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of City, terminate the Contract.
Any termination shall be effected by mailing a notice of the termination to the Contractor specifying the
extent to which performance of Work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such
termination becomes effective. Receipt of the notice shall be deemed conclusively presumed and
established when the letter is placed in the United States Postal Service Mail by the City. Further, it shall
be deemed conclusively presumed and established that such termination is made with just cause as
therein stated; and no proof in any claim, demand or suit shall be required of the City regarding such
discretionary action.
B. After receipt of a notice of termination, and except as otherwise directed by the City, the Contractor shall:
1. Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination;
IFB 7213 51 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
2. place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities except as may be necessary
for completion of such portion of the Work under the Contract as is not terminated;
3. terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the Work
terminated by notice of termination;
4. transfer title to the City and deliver in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if any, directed by
the City:
a. the fabricated or unfabricated parts, Work in progress, completed Work, supplies and other
material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the Work
terminated by the notice of the termination; and
b. the completed, or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other property which, if
the Contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the City.
5. complete performance of such Work as shall not have been terminated by the notice of termination;
and
6. take such action as may be necessary, or as the City may direct, for the protection and preservation
of the property related to its contract which is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the
owner has or may acquire the rest.
C. At a time not later than 30 days after the termination date specified in the notice of termination, the
Contractor may submit to the City a list, certified as to quantity and quality, of any or all items of
termination inventory not previously disposed of, exclusive of items the disposition of which has been
directed or authorized by City.
D. Not later than 15 days thereafter, the City shall accept title to such items provided, that the list
submitted shall be subject to verification by the City upon removal of the items or, if the items are stored,
within 45 days from the date of submission of the list, and any necessary adjustments to correct the list as
submitted, shall be made prior to final settlement.
E. Not later than 60 days after the notice of termination, the Contractor shall submit his termination claim to
the City in the form and with the certification prescribed by the City. Unless an extension is made in
writing within such 60 day period by the Contractor, and granted by the City, any and all such claims shall
be conclusively deemed waived.
F. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):
1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the
effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing
labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted
Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and
3. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.
G. In the event of the failure of the Contractor and City to agree upon the whole amount to be paid to the
Contractor by reason of the termination of the Work, the City shall determine, on the basis of information
available to it, the amount, if any, due to the Contractor by reason of the termination and shall pay to the
Contractor the amounts determined. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits
or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION
IFB 7213 52 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
16.01 Methods and Procedures
A. Either City or Contractor may request mediation of any Contract Claim submitted for a decision under
Paragraph 10.06 before such decision becomes final and binding. The request for mediation shall be
submitted to the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of
Paragraph 10.06.E.
B. City and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be
commenced within 60 days of filing of the request.
C. If the Contract Claim is not resolved by mediation, City’s action under Paragraph 10.06.C or a denial
pursuant to Paragraphs 10.06.C.3 or 10.06.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of
the mediation unless, within that time period, City or Contractor:
1. elects in writing to invoke any other dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary
Conditions; or
2. agrees with the other party to submit the Contract Claim to another dispute resolution process; or
3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Contract Claim to a court of
competent jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS
17.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be
deemed to have been validly given if:
1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for
whom it is intended; or
2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address
known to the giver of the notice.
3. delivered by electronic means to or from the Project Manager.
B. Business address changes must be promptly made in writing to the other party.
C. Whenever the Contract Documents specifies giving notice by electronic means such electronic notice
shall be deemed sufficient upon confirmation of receipt by the receiving party.
17.02 Computation of Times
When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the
first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or
on a day made a legal holiday the next Working Day shall become the last day of the period.
17.03 Cumulative Remedies
The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available
hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of,
any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or
Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The
provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in
IFB 7213 53 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.
17.04 Survival of Obligations
All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in
accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract
Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion
of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.
17.05 Headings
Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these
General Conditions.
IFB 7213 54 Section 00 72 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 73 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Supplementary Conditions
SECTION 00 73 00
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Supplementary Conditions
These Supplementary Conditions modify and supplement Section 00 72 00 - General Conditions, and
other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions of the General Conditions
that are modified or supplemented remain in full force and effect as so modified or supplemented. All
provisions of the General Conditions which are not so modified or supplemented remain in full force and
effect.
Defined Terms
The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which are defined in the General Conditions have the
meaning assigned to them in the General Conditions, unless specifically noted herein.
Modifications and Supplements
The following are instructions that modify or supplement specific paragraphs in the General Conditions
and other Contract Documents.
SC-4.01A
Easement limits shown on the Drawing are approximate and were provided to establish a basis for
bidding.
Upon receiving the final easements descriptions, Contractor shall compare them to the lines shown on
the Contract Drawings.
SC-4.02A., “Subsurface and Physical Conditions”
The following are reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site of the Work:
A Geotechnical Report, dated March 15, 2019, prepared by ETTL Engineers and Consultants Inc., a sub
consultant of Garver, a consultant of the City, providing additional information on subsurface conditions
and structural foundation recommendations. 39
SC-4.06A., “Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site”
The following are reports and drawings of existing hazardous environmental conditions known to the City:
None
SC-5.03A., “Certificates of Insurance”
The entities listed below are "additional insureds as their interest may appear" including their respective
officers, directors, agents and employees.
(1) City
(2) Consultant: Gupta and Associates,Inc.
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 73 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Supplementary Conditions
(3) Other: None
[Obtain approval for the limits shown for SC 5.04A thru 5.04D. from City before finalizing Contract
Documents]
SC-5.04A., “Contractor’s Insurance”
The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph GC-5.04 shall provide the following
coverages for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.04A. Workers' Compensation, under Paragraph GC-5.04A.
Statutory limits
Employer's liability
$100,000 each accident/occurrence
$100,000 Disease - each employee
$500,000 Disease - policy limit
SC-5.04B., “Contractor’s Insurance”
5.04B. Commercial General Liability, under Paragraph GC-5.04B. Contractor's Liability Insurance under
Paragraph GC-5.04B., which shall be on a per project basis covering the Contractor with minimum limits
of:
$1,000,000 each occurrence
$2,000,000 aggregate limit
The policy must have an endorsement (Amendment – Aggregate Limits of Insurance) making the General
Aggregate Limits apply separately to each job site.
The Commercial General Liability Insurance policies shall provide “X”, “C”, and “U” coverage’s.
Verification of such coverage must be shown in the Remarks Article of the Certificate of Insurance.
SC 5.04C., “Contractor’s Insurance”
5.04C. Automobile Liability, under Paragraph GC-5.04C. Contractor’s Liability Insurance under Paragraph
GC-5.04C., which shall be in an amount not less than the following amounts:
(1) Automobile Liability - a commercial business policy shall provide coverage on "Any Auto", defined
as autos owned, hired and non-owned.
$1,000,000 each accident on a combined single limit basis. Split limits are acceptable if limits
are at
least:
$250,000 Bodily Injury per person /
$500,000 Bodily Injury per accident /
$100,000 Property Damage
SC-6.09., “Permits and Utilities”
SC-6.09A., “Contractor obtained permits and licenses”
The following are known permits and/or licenses required by the Contract to be acquired by the
Contractor:
None.
IFB 7213 3 Section 00 73 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Supplementary Conditions
SC-6.09B. “City obtained permits and licenses”
The following are known permits and/or licenses required by the Contract to be acquired by the City:
“None”.
SC-6.09C. “Outstanding permits and licenses”
The following is a list of known outstanding permits and/or licenses to be acquired, if any as of [Month
Day, Year this document was prepared]:
Outstanding Permits and/or Licenses to Be Acquired
OWNER PERMIT OR LICENSE AND LOCATION TARGET
DATE OF
POSSESSION
<If there is none then write
“None”>
<Insert the following if Federal assistance is provided for in this Contract>
SC-6.24B., “Title VI, Civil Rights Act of 1964 as amended”
During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest
(hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor") agrees as follows:
1.Compliance with Regulations: The Contractor shall comply with the Regulation relative
to nondiscrimination in Federally-assisted programs of the Department of Transportation
(hereinafter, “DOT”) Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be
amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein
incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract.
2.Nondiscrimination: The Contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the
contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin, in the
selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases
of equipment. The Contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the
discrimination prohibited by 49 CFR, section 21.5 of the Regulations, including
employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the
Regulations.
3.Solicitations for Subcontractors, Including Procurements of Materials and
Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the
contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of
materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontactor or supplier shall be notified
by the Contractor of the Contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations
relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin.
4.Information and Reports: The Contractor shall provide all information and reports
required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit
access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information and its facilities as
may be determined by City or the Texas Department of Transportation to be pertinent to
ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any
information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or
refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the City, or the Texas
Department of Transportation, as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made
to obtain the information.
5.Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the
nondiscrimination provisions of this Contract, City shall impose such contract sanctions
as it or the Texas Department of Transportation may determine to be appropriate,
including, but not limited to:
IFB 7213 4 Section 00 73 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Supplementary Conditions
a. withholding of payments to the Contractor under the Contract until the Contractor
complies, and/or
b. cancellation, termination or suspension of the Contract, in whole or in part.
6. Incorporation of Provisions: The Contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs
(1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of
equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The
Contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as City
or the Texas Department of Transportation may direct as a means of enforcing such
provisions including sanctions for non-compliance: Provided, however, that, in the event
a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or
supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request City to enter into such
litigation to protect the interests of City, and, in addition, the contractor may request the
United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.
Additional Title VI requirements can be found in the Appendix.
SC-7.02., “Coordination”
The individuals or entities listed below have contracts with the City for the performance of other work at
the Site:
Vendor Scope of Work Coordination Authority
No other projects
SC-9.01., “City’s Project Manager”
The City’s Project Manager for this Contract is Hector R. Ortiz/ Frank Pugsley, or his/her successor
pursuant to written notification from the City Engineer.
SC-13.03C., “Tests and Inspections”
None
SC-16.01C.1, “Methods and Procedures”
None
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 00 73 73
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Form 1295 – Certificate of Interested Parties
SECTION 00 73 73
FORM 1295 - CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES
[Contractor: Replace this page with Form 1295 for this Contract, which can be obtained at
www.ethics.state.tx.us]
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 00 73 73
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Form 1295 – Certificate of Interested Parties
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
1 Section 01 11 00
Summary of Work
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of:
1. Work covered by Contract Documents.
2. Activities of others within Project area.
3. Coordination of Work required by Contractor.
4. Provisions for future Work.
B. Work covered by Contract Documents: The completed Work will provide Owner with various
water treatment plant improvements. More specifically, the Project includes, but is not limited to,
construction of the following:
1. Removal and Replacement of existing High Service Pump Station 480V Variable Frequency
Drives.
C. Except as Specifically Noted Otherwise, Provide and Pay For:
1. Insurance and bonds.
2. Labor, materials, and equipment.
3. Tools, equipment, and machinery required for construction.
4. Utilities required for construction.
5. Temporary facilities including sheeting and shoring.
6. Traffic control and dust control measures.
7. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work.
D. Secure and pay for all permits including all City permits, OSHA excavation permits, Department
of Transportation permits, Stormwater General Permit for Construction Activities from TCEQ, and
any other government fees and licenses.
1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain the required controls and record keeping to
comply with the SWPPP and associated stormwater permit.
E. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, orders, and other legal requirements of public
authorities having bearing on the performance of the Work.
1.02 ACTIVITIES BY OTHERS
A. OWNER, utilities, and others may perform activities within Project area while the Work is in
progress.
1. Schedule the Work with OWNER, utilities, and others to minimize mutual interference.
B. Cooperate with Others to Minimize Interference and Delays.
1. When cooperation fails, submit recommendations and perform Work in coordination with
work of others as directed.
C. Other ON-Going and Potential Projects that parallel the schedule of this project:
1. Administration building south of proposed dewatering building.
1.03 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Maintain overall coordination of the Work.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
2 Section 01 11 00
Summary of Work
B. Obtain construction schedules from each subcontractor, and require each subcontractor to
maintain schedules and coordinate modifications.
C. Alternates: Alternates, if included, are specified in detail in the Bid Form and only those alternates
that were selected by the Owner, as evidenced in the Agreement, are made a part of this
Contract.
1.04 PROVISIONS FOR FUTURE WORK
A. Provisions for future construction are as shown.
1.05 LOCATION OF WORK
A. The Project is located generally at the Lake Ray Roberts WTP and adjoining properties located at
16525 Lake Ray Roberts Dam Rd., Aubrey, TX 76227.
1.06 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
A. For this project’s delivery, the Owner shall not be providing and/or delivering any associated
equipment.
1.07 EARLY OCCUANCY OF PORTIONS OF WORK
A. Substantially Complete all portions of Work for OWNER’s occupancy including specified testing,
training of OWNER’s personnel, and other preparations necessary for OWNER’s occupancy or
use, by the number of calendar days specified for Substantial Completion herein and within the
Agreement:
B. Certificates of Substantial Completion will be executed for each designated portion of Work prior
to OWNER occupancy.
1. Such certificate of Substantial Completion will describe the portion of the Work to be
occupied by OWNER, items that may be incomplete or defective, date of occupancy by
OWNER, and other information required by OWNER and CONTRACTOR.
C. After OWNER occupancy, allow access for OWNER’s personnel, access for others authorized by
OWNER, and OWNER operation of equipment and systems.
D. Following Occupancy, OWNER will:
1. Provide power to operate equipment and systems.
2. Repair damage caused by OWNER’s occupancy.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 11 60
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement PROJECT MANUAL LANGUAGE
SECTION 01 11 60
PROJECT MANUAL LANGUAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes description and requirements of:
1. Explanation of Project Manual arrangement.
2. Explanation of Project Manual language.
3. Reference standards.
4. Method of resolving conflicts of referenced standards between Contract Documents.
B. Related Documents and Sections:
1. Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions.
2. Section 00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions.
3. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Construction Specifications Institute (CSI):
1. Manual of Practice - MasterFormat™.
2. Manual of Practice - SectionFormat™.
3. Manual of Practice - PageFormat™.
1.03 PROJECT MANUAL ARRANGEMENT
A. Document and Section numbers used in Project Manual, and Project Manual arrangement
are in accordance with CSI MasterFormat™, except where departures have been deemed
necessary.
B. Sections are written in accordance with CSI SectionFormat™, Three-Part Section Format,
except where departures have been deemed necessary.
C. Page format for Sections in the Project Manual is in accordance with CSI Page Format,
except where departures have been deemed necessary.
1.04 PROJECT MANUAL ARRANGEMENT
A. Specification Section Paragraphs entitled "Section Includes" summarizes briefly what is
generally included in the section. Requirements of Contract Documents are not limited by
"Section Includes" paragraphs. Specifications have been partially streamlined by intentionally
omitting words and phrases, such as "the CONTRACTOR shall," "in conformity therewith,"
"shall be" following "as indicated," "a," "an," "the" and "all". Assume missing portions by
inference.
B. Phrase "by ENGINEER" modifies words such as "accepted," "directed," "selected,"
"inspected," and "permitted," when they are unmodified.
C. Phrase "to ENGINEER" modifies words such as "submit," "report," and "satisfactory," when
they are unmodified.
D. Colons (:) are used to introduce a list of particulars, an appositive, an amplification, or an
illustrative quotation:
1. When used as an appositive after designation of product, colons are used in place of
words "shall be."
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 11 60
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement PROJECT MANUAL LANGUAGE
E. Word "provide" means to manufacture, fabricate, deliver, furnish, install, complete, assemble,
erect in place, test, render ready for use or operation, including necessary related material,
labor, appurtenances, services, and incidentals.
F. Words "CONTRACTOR shall" are implied when direction is stated in imperative mood.
G. Term "products" includes materials and equipment as specified in Section 01 60 00.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Use edition or amendment of referenced standards in effect on date stipulated in Section 00
72 00. Use only applicable portions of referenced standards, ignoring payment stipulations
and other provisions which change the duties of the ENGINEER or OWNER as described in
Section 00 72 00.
B. Equate terms relating to designer to "ENGINEER."
C. Notify ENGINEER when referenced standard, code, or specification conflicts with Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 14 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Work Restrictions
SECTION 01 14 00
WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of:
1. General constraints for sequencing and scheduling the Work.
2. Interruption of Treatment Processes.
3. Compliance with Texas Commission of Environmental Quality regulations and
requirements, specifically the Owner’s permit for potable water production.
4. Work affected by existing site and facility.
5. Work restrictions and coordination between construction operations and plant
operations, including:
a. Access to site.
b. Use of site and premises.
c. Utilities.
d. Work by Others.
e. Work Sequence.
f. Temporary Services, Materials and Equipment.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work.
2. Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures.
3. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.02 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS ON SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. Water Projects:
1. The existing Water Treatment Plant is one of two water treatment plants the Owner
operates for treating and distributing potable water to the City’s potable water customers.
Impairing the operational capabilities of this treatment plant will result in serious financial
damage to the City and result in water usage restrictions for the City’s potable water
customers.
2. Conduct work in a manner that will not impair the operational capabilities of essential
elements of the treatment process or reduce the capacity of the entire treatment plant as
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 14 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Work Restrictions
mandated by the Texas Commission of Environmental Quality to treat the quality of
potable water to the water quality limitations specified in the discharge permit.
3. The status of the treatment plant shall be defined as “operational” when it is capable of
treating the rated capacity of thirty-two and one half (32.5) mgd of potable water
production as set forth by the State regulations.
B. Work Sequence and Constraints:
1. Utilize description of critical events in work sequence in this Section as a guideline for
scheduling and undertaking the Work.
2. Work sequence and constraints presented do not include all items affecting completion of
the Work, but are intended to describe critical events necessary to minimize disruption of
the existing facilities and to ensure compliance to the water quality standards as
mandated by the Oklahoma Department of Environmental Quality.
1.03 INTERRUPTION OF TREATMENT PROCESSES
A. Execute the Work while the existing facility is in operation as specified in Section 01 35 20.
B. Indicate required shutdowns of existing facilities or interruptions of existing operations on
Progress Schedule. Shutdowns will be permitted to the extent that existing operation of the
plant will not be jeopardized and identified constraints are satisfied.
C. Submit notification of required shutdowns of existing facilities at least 14 days prior to the
planned date of shutdown.
D. The ENGINEER and the Plant Personnel will evaluate the request based on the plant's ability
to reliably meet capacity demands.
E. Do not begin alterations until ENGINEER's written permission has been received.
F. Minimize shutdown times by thorough advanced planning. Have required equipment,
materials, and labor on hand at time of shutdown.
G. Where required to minimize treatment process interruptions while complying with specified
sequencing constraints, provide temporary pumping, power, lighting, controls,
instrumentation, and safety devices.
1.04 COMPLIANCE WITH WATER QUALITY STANDARDS AS MANDATED BY THE TEXAS
COMMISSION ON ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY.
A. The existing facility is operating under the terms of a water quality production permit with the
Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. This permit specifies the water quality limits
that the plant must meet prior to delivering potable water to the plant’s service area. A copy of
the existing permit is on file for review at the Denton Engineering Services offices and at the
Lake Lewisville Treatment Plant.
B. Perform work in a manner that will not prevent the existing facility from achieving the final
treated water quality requirements established by regulations.
C. Bear the cost of penalties imposed on the OWNER for potable water quality or other
discharge violations caused by actions of the CONTRACTOR.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 14 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Work Restrictions
1.05 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION OF PLANT AND MAINTAINING CONTINUOUS
OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Facilities or conditions required to keep the existing plant operational include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Electrical power, including transformers, distribution wiring, and motor control centers.
2. Raw Water Pump station and intake water line.
3. Piping for conveyance of raw water, partially treated water, and final treated water
between treatment units and the potable water distribution system.
4. High Service Pumps.
5. Plant Water: Existing plant water distribution network.
6. Treated Water Flow Meter
7. Fencing and gates.
8. Lighting.
9. Heating, ventilation, and air conditions.
10. Electrical Distribution and Standby Power Facilities
11. Instrumentation, meters, controls, and telemetry equipment.
12. Safety equipment and features.
13. Parking for Staff employees and vehicles required for operation and maintenance of the
existing Water Treatment Plant.
14. Telephone system.
15. Storm drainage.
16. Other incidentals necessary to continually operate the facilities.
B. Conduct the Work and provide temporary facilities required to keep the existing plant
continuously operational.
C. Do not remove or demolish existing facilities required to keep the existing plant operational at
the capacities specified until the existing facilities are replaced by temporary or new facilities
equipment. The replacement facilities shall have been tested and demonstrated to be
operational prior to removing or demolishing existing facilities.
1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE ACCESS
A. Provide safe, continuous access to process control equipment for plant operations personnel.
1.07 SHUTDOWN CONSTRAINTS
A. Comply with Shutdown Constraints Described in General Terms as Follows:
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 14 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Work Restrictions
1. One 480V VFD driven pump must be available at all times.
2. MCC-1 can not be shut down unless expressly given permission b the City of Denton and
with an approved shutdown request.
1.08 UTILITIES
A. Provide advance notice to and utilize services of Texas811 System, Inc. for location and
marking of underground utilities operated by utility agencies other than the OWNER. Contact
information: Texas811 System, Inc., 11880 Greenville Ave Suite 120, Dallas, TX 75243,
phone number 800-344-8377, website: www.texas811.org .
B. Maintain electrical, telephone, water, gas, sanitary facilities, and other utilities within existing
facilities in service. Provide temporary utilities when necessary.
1.09 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Where proper execution of the Work depends upon work by others, inspect and promptly
report discrepancies and defects.
1.10 WORK SEQUENCE
A. This possible sequence is included for informational purposes only. It is intended that
Construction be performed in multiple phases as follows:
1. Work requiring partial shutdown of Existing Plant’s Facilities:
a. All shutdowns, either Major Shutdowns or Minor Shutdowns, shall meet the
requirements as specified in Section 01 31 00.
b. All Major Shutdowns of existing facilities shall be scheduled such that the completion
of this work shall be completed prior to May 1st, the beginning date for Plant’s Peak
Flow Demand Period.
c. Perform work that requires a partial shutdown of plant during the Off-Peak Period
during the calendar year. For each year, the Peak Flow Demand Period starts on
May 1st and lasts through October 31st of each year. Should the Contractor not be
prepared and authorized to proceed with this work between the Notice to Proceed
and the following 1st of May, the CONTRACTOR shall be required to wait until the
end of the Peak Flow Demand Period.
d. Reroute associated yard piping, chemical piping, and perform required demolition
and piping interconnections. Successfully complete testing of said piping prior to any
shutdown Existing Plant’s Facilities.
2. General Work Constraints shall be as follows:
a. Substantial completion by April 1st, 2020.
b. VFD shop drawings shall be produced within three weeks of Bid Selection.
c. MCC 1 cannot be fully shut down.
d. Pumps
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 14 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Work Restrictions
1) Only one pump can be shut down at a time.
3. Sequence of Construction
a. Remove existing VFD-3.
b. Install new VFD-3.
c. Test and run the VFD until it has run without any faults for a minimum of two weeks.
d. Remove existing VFD-4.
e. Test and run the VFD until it has run without any faults for a minimum of two weeks.
1.11 TEMPORARY SERVICES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT
A. Locate temporary facilities in a manner that minimizes interference to OWNER's operation
and maintenance personnel.
B. Unless otherwise specified, install temporary pipelines of the same size as its connection to
the existing facility at the downstream end of the pipeline.
C. Provide piping of suitable material for the material being conveyed.
D. Provide submittals on proposed temporary electrical and instrumentation components
necessary to maintain existing facilities.
E. Dewater and promptly clean basins and channels temporarily removed from service.
F. Dimensions for all existing structures, piping, paving, and other nonstructural items are
approximate. The CONTRACTOR shall field verify all dimensions and conditions and report
any discrepancies to the ENGINEER a minimum of 14 days in advance of any construction in
the area.
G. Discrepancies between coordinates, bearings and lengths, and stationing shall be resolved in
the following order of precedence:
1. Coordinates.
2. Bearings and lengths.
3. Stationing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 14 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Work Restrictions
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 26 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Contract Modification Procedures
SECTION 01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes description and requirements of:
1. Proposal Requests.
2. Claims.
3. Change Orders and Written Amendments.
4. Field Order Procedures.
1.02 PROPOSAL REQUEST
A. Owner may, in anticipation of ordering an addition, deletion, or revision to the Work, request
Contractor to prepare a detailed proposal of cost and times to perform contemplated change.
B. Proposal request will include reference number for tracking purposes and detailed description
of and reason for proposed change, and such additional information as appropriate and as
may be required for Contractor to accurately estimate cost and time impact on Project.
C. Proposal request is for information only; Contractor is neither authorized to execute proposed
change nor to stop Work in progress as result of such request.
D. Contractor’s written proposal shall be transmitted to Engineer promptly, but not later than 14
days after Contractor’s receipt of Owner’s written request. Proposal shall remain firm for a
maximum period of 45 days after receipt by Engineer.
E. Owner’s request for proposal or Contractor’s failure to submit such proposal within the
required time period will not justify a claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract
Times (or Milestones).
1.03 CLAIMS
A. Include, at a minimum:
1. Specific references including:
a. Drawing numbers.
b. Specification section and article/paragraph number.
c. Submittal type, Submittal number, date reviewed, Engineer’s comment, as
d. applicable, with appropriate attachments.
2. Stipulated facts and pertinent documents, including photographs and statements.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 26 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Contract Modification Procedures
3. Interpretations relied upon.
4. Description of:
a. Nature and extent of claim.
b. Who or what caused the situation.
c. Impact to the Work and work of others.
d. Discussion of claimant’s justification for requesting a change to price or times or both.
5. Estimated adjustment in price claimant believes it is entitled to with documentation and
justification.
6. Requested Change in Contract Times: Include at least;
a. Progress schedule documentation showing logic diagram for request.
b. Documentation that float times available for Work have been used.
c. Revised activity logic with durations including sub-network logic revisions, duration
changes, and other interrelated schedule impacts, as appropriate.
7. Documentation as may be necessary as set forth below for Work Change Directive, and
as Engineer may otherwise require.
1.04 CHANGE ORDERS OR WRITTEN AMENDMENTS
A. Procedure:
1. Engineer will prepare six copies of proposed Change Order or Written Amendment and
transmit such with Engineer’s written recommendation (Change Order only) and request
to Contractor for signature.
2. Contractor shall, upon receipt, either:
a. Promptly sign copies, retaining one for its file, and return remaining five copies to
Engineer for Owner’s signature, or Return unsigned five copies with written
justification for not executing Change Order or Written Amendment.
3. Engineer will, upon receipt of Contractor signed copies, promptly forward Engineer’s
written recommendation and partially executed five copies for Owner’s signature, or if
Contractor fails to execute the Change Order or Written Amendment, Engineer will
promptly so notify Owner and transmit Contractor’s justification to Owner.
4. Upon receipt of Contractor-executed Change Order or Written Amendment, Owner will
promptly either:
a. Execute Change Order or Written Amendment, retaining one copy for its file and
returning four copies to Engineer, or
b. Return to Engineer unsigned copies with written justification for not executing
Change Order or Written Amendment.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 26 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Contract Modification Procedures
5. Upon receipt of Owner-executed Change Order or Written Amendment, Engineer will
transmit two copies to Contractor, one copy to Resident Project Representative or other
field representative, and retain one copy, or if Owner fails to execute the Change Order
or Written Amendment, Engineer will promptly so notify Contractor and transmit Owner’s
justification to Contractor.
6. Upon receipt of Owner-executed Change Order, Contractor shall:
a. Perform Work covered by Change Order or Written Amendment.
b. Revise Schedule of Values to adjust Contract Price and submit with next Application
for Payment.
c. Revise progress schedule to reflect changes in Contract Times, if any, and to adjust
times for other items of Work affected by change.
d. Enter changes in Project record documents after completion of change related Work.
B. In signing a Change Order or Written Amendment, Owner and Contractor acknowledge and
agree that:
1. Stipulated compensation (Contract Price or Contract Times, or both) set forth includes
payment for:
a. The Cost of the Work covered by the Change Order or Written Amendment.
b. Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit.
c. Interruption of progress schedule.
d. Delay and impact, including cumulative impact, on other Work under the Contract
Documents, and
e. Extended overheads.
2. Change Order or Written Amendment constitutes full mutual accord and satisfaction for
the change to the Work.
3. Unless otherwise stated in the Change Order or Written Amendment, all requirements of
the original Contract Documents apply to the Work covered by the Change Order or
Written Amendment.
1.05 FIELD ORDER PROCEDURES
A. Engineer will issue Field Orders, with 3 copies to Contractor.
B. Effective date of the Field Order shall be the date of signature by Engineer, unless otherwise
indicated thereon.
C. Contractor shall acknowledge receipt by signing and returning one copy to Engineer.
D. Field Orders will be incorporated into subsequent Change Orders, as a no-cost change to the
Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 26 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Contract Modification Procedures
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 29 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Payment Procedures
SECTION 01 29 00
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of:
1. Submittals Related to Payment Procedures.
2. Cash Allowances.
3. Schedule of Values.
4. Schedule of Estimated Progress Payments.
5. Payment.
6. Nonpayment for Rejected or Unused Products.
7. Partial Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.
8. Partial Payment for Undelivered, Project Specific Manufactured or Fabrication
Equipment.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation.
2. Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Schedule of Values: Submit on Contractor’s standard form.
2. Schedule of Estimated Progress Payments:
a. Submit with initially acceptable Schedule of Values.
b. Submit adjustments thereto with Application for Payment.
3. Application for Payment.
4. Final Application for Payment.
1.03 CASH ALLOWANCES
A. Consult with Engineer in selection of products or services. Obtain proposals from Suppliers
and installers and offer recommendations.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 29 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Payment Procedures
B. Cash allowances will be administered in accordance with the General Conditions and as
specified herein.
C. Contractor Agrees:
1. The Lump Sum Work includes the allowances specified and includes all Work to perform
such items covered by the Cash Allowance as approved by Owner and Engineer.
2. The Allowances include the cost of material and equipment required by the allowances to
be delivered to the Site and applicable taxes.
3. Contractor’s cost for unloading, handling, labor, installation cost, overhead, profit, and
other expenses for the allowance have been included in the Lump Sum Work and not in
the allowance.
4. Accept payment equal to the amount of the actual invoices for services and products
without markup.
D. Expenditure of any portion of Cash Allowances shall only be done with authorization by
Owner and Engineer. Cash Allowances are estimated amounts and final payment shall be
based on actual costs as authorized by Change Order and the Contract Price shall be
correspondingly adjusted. The Cash Allowances are specifically for the purpose of the
following items:
E. Work Change Directive Cash Allowance: The purpose of this allowance is to cover cost of
unknown items that cannot be foreseen at this time. Authorization for expenditure of any
portion of this allowance shall be for specifically approved work change directives and
issuance of a Change Order.
F. Independent Testing Cash Allowance: This allowance is to cover costs of specified Quality
Assurance testing provided by an independent testing laboratory, agency, and special
inspectors retained by the Owner. Contractor shall hire independent testing laboratory,
agency, and special inspectors as acceptable to the Owner. Authorization will only be given
for independent testing services performed as part of field quality assurance specified to be
provided by the Owner. Any re-testing or other testing desired or specified by the Contractor
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
G. Field Trailer Office Equipment: This allowance is only to fund any additional Engineer’s field
H. office equipment above what is specified in Section 01 50 00.
I. Submit, with application for payment, invoice showing date of purchase, from which the
purchase was made, the date of delivery of the product or service, and the price, including
delivery to the Site and applicable taxes.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Prepare a separate Schedule of Values for each schedule of the Work under the Agreement.
B. Upon request of Engineer, provide support documentation to support the accuracy of the
Schedule of Values.
C. Unit Price Work: Reflect unit price quantity and price breakdown from conformed Bid Form.
D. Lump Sum Work:
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 29 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Payment Procedures
1. Reflect Schedule of Values format included in conformed Bid Form, specified allowances,
alternates, and equipment selected by Owner, as applicable.
2. List bonds and insurance premiums, mobilization, demobilization, preliminary and
detailed progress schedule preparation, facility startup, and contract closeout separately.
3. Break down by Division 2 through 44 with appropriate subdivision of each Specification
for each Project facility. The apparent “low bidder” is required to deliver a Bid breakdown
by specification within 3 working days after Bid opening.
E. An unbalanced or front-end loaded schedule will not be acceptable.
F. Summation of the complete Schedule of Values representing all the Work shall equal the
Contract Price.
G. Submit Schedule of Values in an electronic file in a spreadsheet format compatible with latest
version of Excel.
1.05 SCHEDULE OF ESTIMATED PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Show estimated payment requests throughout Contract Times aggregating initial Contract
Price.
B. Base estimated progress payments on initially acceptable progress schedule. Adjust to reflect
subsequent adjustments in progress schedule and Contract Price as reflected by
modifications to the Contract Documents.
1.06 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Transmittal Summary Form: Attach one Summary Form with each detailed Application for
Payment for each schedule and include Request for Payment of Materials and Equipment on
Hand as applicable. Execute certification by authorized officer of Contractor.
B. Use detailed Application for Payment Form suitable to Engineer.
C. Provide separate form for each schedule as applicable.
D. Include accepted Schedule of Values for each schedule or portion of Work, the unit price
breakdown for the Work to be paid on unit price basis, a listing of Owner-selected equipment,
if applicable, and allowances, as appropriate.
E. Preparation:
1. Round values to nearest dollar.
2. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission as separate line item. The
totals will equal those shown on the Transmittal Summary Form for each schedule as
applicable.
3. Submit Application for Payment, including a Transmittal Summary Form and detailed
Application for Payment Form(s) for each schedule as applicable, a listing of materials on
hand for each schedule as applicable, and such supporting data as may be requested by
Engineer.
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 29 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Payment Procedures
4. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, request Engineer’s review and
approval of current status of record documents as required by SC-7.11.B. Failure to
properly maintain, update, and submit record documents may result in a deferral by
Engineer to recommend whole or any part of Contractor’s Application for Payment, either
partial or final.
1.07 PAYMENT
A. General:
1. Progress payments will be made monthly.
2. The date for Contractor’s submission of monthly Application for Payment shall be
3. established at the Preconstruction Conference.
4. Progress payment is contingent upon applications and Contractor progress that is subject
to withholdings by Owner.
B. Payment for all the Work shown or specified in Contract Documents is included in the
Contract Price. No measurement or payment will be made for individual items.
C. Payment for Lump Sum Work covers all Work specified or shown in the Contract Documents.
1.08 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR UNUSED PRODUCTS
A. Payment will not be made for following:
1. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material.
2. Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in manner not called for under Contract
Documents.
3. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been placed by reason
of failure of Contractor to conform to provisions of Contract Documents.
4. Material not unloaded from transporting vehicle.
5. Defective Work not accepted by Owner.
6. Material remaining on hand after completion of Work.
1.09 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Partial Payment: No partial payments will be made for materials and equipment delivered or
stored unless Shop Drawings and preliminary operation and maintenance manuals are
accepted by Engineer. Thereafter, partial payment for materials and equipment delivered and
stored, but not yet incorporated in work, shall not exceed 90% of the equipment or material
value.
B. Final Payment: Will be made only for products incorporated in Work and following approval of
final operations and maintenance manuals; remaining products, for which partial payments
have been made, shall revert to Contractor unless otherwise agreed, and partial payments
made for those items will be deducted from final payment.
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 29 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Payment Procedures
1.10 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR UNDELIVERED, PROJECT-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURED OR
FABRICATED EQUIPMENT
A. Notwithstanding above provisions, partial payments for undelivered (not yet delivered to Site
or not stored in the vicinity of Site) products specifically manufactured for this Project,
excluding off the shelf or catalog items, will be made for products listed below when all
following conditions exist:
1. Partial payment request is supported by written acknowledgment from Suppliers that
invoice requirements have been met.
2. Equipment is adequately insured, maintained, stored, and protected by appropriate
security measures.
3. Each equipment item is clearly marked and segregated from other items to permit
inventory and accountability.
4. Authorization has been provided for access to storage Site for Engineer and Owner.
5. Equipment meets applicable Specifications of these Contract Documents.
B. Applicable Items:
Specification Section Specific Product
26 29 23 Low Voltage Variable
Frequency Drives
C. Payment shall not exceed 15% of the equipment value, not including shipping and handling
charges for undelivered, project-specific manufactured equipment and will only be made
following Shop Drawing approval.
D. Failure of Contractor to continue compliance with above requirements shall give cause for
Owner to withhold payments made for such equipment from future partial payments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 29 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Payment Procedures
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of:
1. Submittals Related to Project Management and Coordination.
2. Utility Notification and Coordination.
3. Work Sequencing /Constraints.
4. Facility Operations.
5. Adjacent Facilities and Properties.
6. Owner’s Occupancy.
7. Partial Utilization by the Owner.
8. Physical Conditions.
9. Construction Photographs.
10. Audio-Video Recordings.
11. Cutting, Fitting and Patching.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational:
1. Statement of Qualification (SOQ) for land surveyor or civil engineer.
2. Photographs and other records of examination.
3. Video Recordings: Submit one copy, including updated copy of project video log, within 5
days of being taken.
1.03 UTILITY NOTIFICATION AND COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with various utilities within Project limits. Notify applicable utilities prior
to commencing Work, if damage occurs, or if conflicts or emergencies arise during Work.
B. Before excavation, contact Texas811 System, Inc. for location and marking of underground
utilities operated by utility agencies other than the OWNER. Contact information: Texas811
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
System, Inc., 11880 Greenville Ave Suite 120, Dallas, TX 75243, phone number 800-344-
8377, website: www.texas811.org .
1.04 WORK SEQUENCING/CONSTRAINTS
A. Include the following work sequences in the Progress Schedule required under Section 01 32
00.
B. This Section identifies several construction constraints that must be reflected in the
Contractor project coordination. An overall outline is presented in this Section for the
Construction coordination, demolition, and seasonal/process constraints that shall be
considered during construction. The sequence of Work for this Project must reflect the
constraints identified herein.
C. Definitions:
1. Peak Flow Demand periods shall, in general, be from May 01 through October 31. Actual
Peak Flow Demand periods shall be as determined by the Owner based on weather,
flows entering plant, actual demand and plant operation requirements.
2. Low Flow Demand periods shall be any time period which is not within the defined Peak
Flow Demand periods.
3. Low flow period for a given day under any Flow Demand Period shall be from 2:00 a.m.
to 6:00 a.m.
4. Minor Shutdown: Any shutdown requiring less than 8 hours.
5. Major Shutdown: Any shutdown other than a minor shutdown.
D. Shutdown of Plant Operations:
1. Provide 14 days advance notice to Engineer and Owner of need for a minor shutdown.
2. Provide 30 days advance notice to Engineer and Owner of need for a major shutdown.
3. Contractor shall schedule a shutdown coordination meeting with Owner and Engineer
one week prior to each shutdown.
4. Do not proceed with work affecting a facility’s operation without obtaining Owner and
Engineer advance approval of the need for, and duration of, such work. The Owner will
endeavor to grant Contractor requests where possible. However, because Owner’s
primary responsibility is to produce potable water, the requested timing may not be
possible.
5. Any and all plant shutdowns shall require a shutdown plan, including detailed schedule,
backup tools and equipment, personnel involved, contingency plan, and any procedures
involved in restarting the process or facility. Owner’s approval of the Shutdown Plan is
required prior to any shutdowns.
6. Shutdowns will be allowed, but shall only be allowed in Low Flow Demand periods and
with at least half of the water treatment plant’s rated capacity and facilities in operation.
Shutdowns may be limited to low flow periods.
7. No minor or major shutdowns allowed within 7 days of a previous shutdown.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
E. Incorporate the Following Construction Constraints into the Work:
1. Substantial completion by April 1st, 2020.
2. VFD shop drawings shall be produced within three weeks of Bid Selection.
3. MCC 1 cannot be fully shut down.
4. Pumps
a. Only one pump can be shut down at a time.
5. Peak Flow Demand Periods: This time period is anticipated to be during dry and hot
weather periods. It is anticipated that temporary plant shutdown would be limited to minor
shutdowns during low flow periods during a given day.
6. Low Demand Flow Periods: This time period is anticipated to be during wet and cool
weather periods. It is anticipated that temporary plant shutdowns could occur for up to 24
hours during this time period. Minor and major shutdowns are allowed.
7. Influent (source) and partially treated water is available at the Lake Lewisville Water
Treatment Plant site. Final tie-in and start-up will not occur until the Lake Lewisville
Water Treatment Plant’s improvements are substantially complete and ready for
operation as evident by successful completion of Functional Testing and Performance
Testing as specified in Section 01 79 00, DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING.
a. Water for Functional Testing and Performance Testing will be provided by one or a
combination of the following sources as chosen by Contractor and approved by
Owner and Engineer:
1) Potable water (use of potable water shall be at the Contractor’s cost and will
2) require an independent service).
3) Partially Treated Water from the Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant. If this
option is chosen by Contractor, Contractor will be responsible for interties and
temporary routing of reclaimed water piping, and providing temporary tie-in or
pumping of the effluent to the unit processes. Contractor shall submit routing,
flow control, and spill prevention plan to the Owner and Engineer for approval.
8. Start-Up of Unit Processes may occur with Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant’s
partially treated water, as specified above, or potable water, if available.
9. An appropriate degree of treated water shall be used for Facility Performance
Demonstration.
1.05 FACILITY OPERATIONS
A. Continuous operation of Owner’s facilities is of critical importance. Schedule and conduct
activities to enable existing facilities to operate continuously, unless otherwise specified, and
to minimize the number of shutdowns of the plant and existing unit processes.
B. Perform Work continuously during critical connections and changeovers, as required, to
prevent
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
C. interruption of Owner’s operations.
D. Conduct Work outside regular working hours on prior written consent of Owner to meet
Project schedule and avoid undesirable conditions.
E. Be responsible for planning, designing, and providing various temporary services, utilities,
connections, temporary piping, bypass facilities and temporary connections, and similar items
to maintain continuous operations of Owner’s facility. Sequences other than those specified
will be considered upon written request to Owner and Engineer, provided they afford
equivalent continuity of operations.
F. Do not close lines, open or close valves, or take other action which would affect the operation
of existing systems, except as specifically required by the Contract Documents and after
authorization by Owner and Engineer. Such authorization will be considered within 48 hours
after receipt of Contractor’s written request.
G. Any tanks or pipelines requiring drainage prior to construction will be drained by the Owner’s
staff to the maximum extent possible utilizing existing piping and drains where they exist.
Contractor shall provide temporary pumping and effort to complete drainage of tank or
pipeline as required. Provide minimum 7 days’ notice to Engineer and Owner of need to drain
a facility, unless otherwise specified.
H. Power outages will be considered upon 48 hours written request to Owner and Engineer.
Describe the reason, anticipated length of time, and areas affected by the outage in the
written request. Provide temporary provisions for continuous power supply to critical existing
facility components, is requested by Owner.
I. Coordinate proposed work with Engineer and Owner before implementing unit shutdowns.
Under no circumstances shall Work end if such actions may inadvertently cause a cessation
of any facility operation. In such cases, remain onsite until necessary repairs are complete
and facility is brought back online.
J. Relocation of Existing Facilities:
1. During construction, it is expected that minor relocations of Work will be necessary.
2. Provide complete relocation of existing structures and Underground Facilities, including
piping, utilities, equipment and structures, electrical conduit wiring, electrical duct bank,
and other necessary items.
3. Use only new materials for relocated facility. Match materials of existing facility, unless
otherwise shown or specified.
4. Perform relocations to minimize downtime of existing facilities.
5. Install new portions of existing facilities in their relocated position prior to removal of
existing facilities, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer.
1.06 ADJACENT FACILITIES AND PROPERTIES
A. Examination:
1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is started, Contractor,
Engineer, and affected property owners and utility owners shall make a thorough
examination of pre-existing conditions including existing buildings, structures, and other
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
improvements in vicinity of Work, as applicable, which could be damaged by construction
operations.
2. Periodic reexamination shall be jointly performed to include, but not limited to, cracks in
structures, settlement, leakage, and similar conditions.
B. Documentation:
1. Record and submit documentation of observations made on examination inspections for
signature of Engineer and Contractor and in accordance with paragraphs “Construction
Photographs” and “Audio-Video Recordings”.
2. Upon receipt, Engineer will review, sign, and return one record copy of documentation to
Contractor to be kept on file in field office. Such documentation shall be used as
indisputable evidence in ascertaining whether and to what extent damage occurred as a
result of Contractor’s operations, and is for the protection of adjacent property owners,
Contractor, and Owner.
1.07 OWNER’S OCCUPANCY
A. Owner will occupy the premises during the period of construction for the conduct of its normal
operations. Cooperate with Owner in all construction operations to minimize conflict and to
facilitate Owner usage.
1.08 PARTIAL UTILIZATION BY THE OWNER
A. Schedule operations for completion of portions of the Work, as designated under Work
Sequence/Constraints, herein, for Owner’s occupancy or separate operation prior to
Substantial Completion of the entire Work.
B. Unless agreed in writing prior to Owner’s use, the following conditions shall apply:
1. Contractor’s Responsibilities:
a. Allow access for Owner’s personnel.
b. Allow operation of ventilation and electrical systems.
c. All other responsibilities as specified in the General Conditions.
2. Owner’s Responsibilities:
a. Operate ventilating systems and pay cost of same.
b. Assume responsibility of power requirements.
c. Assume responsibility for security and fire protection in utilized areas, but not
extending to Contractor’s materials and equipment in utilized areas.
d. Assume responsibility for property insurance of utilized areas.
3. Other Conditions of Owner’s Use: The correction period for the occupied or separately
operated portion of Work shall commence at the date of Substantial Completion for that
separate part.
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
1.09 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
A. Exercise reasonable care to verify locations of existing subsurface facilities and utilities.
B. Areas immediate and adjacent to planned excavations shall be thoroughly checked by means
of visual examination and with electronic metal and pipe detection equipment for indications
of underground utilities and facilities.
C. Make exploratory excavation where existing underground facilities or utilities may potentially
conflict with proposed excavations and facilities or where there is reasonable cause to verify
the presence or absence of, or to obtain physical information regarding underground facilities
or utilities. Conduct exploratory excavations as acceptable to and in the presence of Engineer
prior to proceeding with major excavation in the area and sufficiently in advance of
construction to avoid possible delays to Contractor’s Work. Promptly take measurements,
photographs, and obtain survey data.
1.10 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographically document all phases of the project including preconstruction, construction
progress, and post-construction.
B. Engineer shall have the right to select the subject matter and vantage point from which
photographs are to be taken.
C. Photograph Format: Reference Section 01 34 00 for photograph requirements.
D. Preconstruction and Post-Construction:
1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is started, and again upon
issuance of Substantial Completion, take exposures of all areas of the Construction Site
and property adjacent to perimeter of Construction Site.
2. Particular emphasis shall be directed to structures both inside and outside the Site.
E. Construction Progress Photos:
1. Photographically demonstrate progress of construction, showing every aspect of Site and
adjacent properties as well as interior and exterior of new or impacted structures.
2. Take photos as frequent as required to document all major aspects of construction.
Coordinate with Engineer.
1.11 AUDIO-VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. Prior to beginning Work on Construction Site or of a particular area of the Work, and again
within 10 days following date of Substantial Completion, video-graph Construction Site and
property adjacent to Construction Site.
B. In the case of preconstruction recording, no Work shall begin in the area prior to Engineer’s
C. review and approval of content and quality of video for that area.
D. Particular emphasis shall be directed to physical condition of existing vegetation, structures,
and pavements within Construction Site and areas adjacent to and within the right-of-way or
easement, and on Contractor storage and staging areas.
IFB 7213 7 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
E. Engineer shall have right to select subject matter and vantage point from which videos are to
be taken.
F. Video Format and Quality:
1. DVD format, with sound.
2. Video:
a. Produce bright, sharp, and clear images with accurate colors, free of distortion and
other forms of picture imperfections.
b. Electronically, and accurately display the month, day, year, and time of day of the
recording.
3. Audio:
a. Audio documentation shall be done clearly, precisely, and at a moderate pace.
b. Indicate date, project name, and a brief description of the location of taping,
including:
1) Facility name.
2) Street names or easements.
3) Addresses of private property.
4) Direction of coverage, including engineering stationing, if applicable.
4. Documentation:
a. CD Label:
1) CD number (numbered sequentially, beginning with 001).
2) Project name.
3) Date and time of coverage.
5. Project Video Log: Maintain an ongoing log that incorporates above noted label
information for videotapes on Project.
6. Reference specification Section 01 34 00 for additional requirements.
1.12 REFERENCE POINTS AND SURVEYS
A. Location and elevation of benchmarks are shown on Drawings.
B. Dimensions for lines and elevations for grades of structures, appurtenances, and utilities are
indicated on the Drawings, together with the other pertinent information required for laying out
Work. If conditions vary from those indicated, immediately notify Engineer.
IFB 7213 8 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
C. Any existing survey points or other control markers destroyed without proper authorization
will be replaced by Owner of the survey points or control markers at the Contractor’s
expense.
D. Contractor’s Responsibilities:
1. Provide additional survey and layout required to layout the Work.
2. Locate and protect reference points prior to stating site preparation.
3. Check and establish exact location of existing facilities prior to construction of new
facilities and any connections thereto.
4. In event of discrepancy in data or staking provided by Owner, request clarification before
proceeding with Work.
5. Retain professional land surveyor or civil engineer registered in state of Project who shall
perform or supervise engineering surveying necessary for additional construction staking
and layout.
6. Maintain complete accurate log of survey Work as it progresses as a Record Document.
7. On request of Engineer, submit documentation.
8. Provide competent employee(s), tools, stakes, and other equipment and materials as
Engineer may require to:
a. Establish control points, lines, and easement boundaries.
b. Check layout, survey, and measurement Work performed by others.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PATCHING
A. Cut, fit, adjust, or patch Work and work of others, including excavation and backfill as
required, to make Work complete.
B. Obtain prior written authorization of Engineer and Owner before commencing work to cut or
otherwise alter:
1. Structural or reinforcing steel, structural column or beam, elevated slab, trusses, or other
structural member.
2. Weather- or moisture-resistant elements.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.
4. Work of others.
C. Refinish surfaces to provide an even finish.
1. Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection.
IFB 7213 9 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
2. Refinish entire assemblies.
3. Finish restored surfaces to such planes, shapes, and textures that no transition between
existing work and Work is evident in finished surfaces.
D. Restore existing work, Underground Facilities, and surfaces that are to remain in completed
Work including concrete-embedded piping, conduit, and other utilities as specified and as
shown.
E. Make restorations with new materials and appropriate methods as specified for new Work of
similar nature; if not specified, use recommended practice of manufacturer or appropriate
trade association.
F. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces
and fill voids.
G. Remove specimens of installed Work for testing when requested by Engineer.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 10 Section 01 31 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Management and Coordination
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 31 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Meetings
SECTION 01 31 19
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Requirements for conducting conferences and meetings for the purposes of
addressing issues related to the Work, reviewing and coordinating progress of the Work and
other matters of common interest, and includes the following:
1. General Requirements.
2. Qualifications of Meeting Participants.
3. Preconstruction Conference.
4. Progress Meetings.
5. Pre-Installation Meetings.
6. Post Construction Meeting.
B. Related sections:
1. None.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor will schedule physical arrangements for meetings throughout progress of Work,
prepare meeting agenda with regular participant input and distribute with written notice of
each meeting, preside at meetings, record minutes to include significant proceedings and
decisions, and reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 5 days after each meeting to
participants and parties affected by meeting decisions.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF MEETING PARTICIPANTS
A. Representatives of entities participating in meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act
on behalf of entity each represents.
1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Contractor shall be prepared to discuss the following subjects, as a minimum:
1. Required schedules.
2. Status of Bonds and insurance.
3. Sequencing of critical path work items.
4. Progress payment procedures.
5. Project changes and clarification procedures.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 31 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Meetings
6. Use of site, access, office and storage areas, security and temporary facilities.
7. Major product delivery and priorities.
8. Contractor’s safety plan and representative.
B. Attendees will include:
1. Owner’s representatives.
2. Contractor’s office representative.
3. Contractor’s resident superintendent.
4. Contractor’s quality control representative.
5. Subcontractor’s representatives whom Contractor may desire or Engineer may request to
attend.
6. Engineer’s representatives.
7. Others as appropriate.
C. Upon issuance of Notice to Proceed, or earlier when mutually agreeable, ENGINEER will
arrange a preconstruction conference in a convenient place for most persons invited, in
accordance with the General Conditions.
D. Attending Preconstruction Conference: CONTRACTOR's superintendent, OWNER,
ENGINEER, representatives of utilities, major subcontractors and others involved in
performance of the Work, and others necessary to agenda.
E. ENGINEER will preside at conference.
F. Purpose of conference: To establish working understanding between parties and to discuss
Construction Schedule, shop drawing and other submittals, cost breakdown of major lump
sum items, processing of submittals and applications for payment, and other subjects
pertinent to execution of the Work.
G. Agenda will include:
1. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
2. Distribution and discussion of list of major subcontractors and suppliers.
3. Proposed progress schedules and critical construction sequencing.
4. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
5. Project coordination.
6. Designation of responsible personnel.
7. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 31 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Meetings
b. Proposal requests.
c. Submittals.
d. Change Orders.
e. Applications for Payment.
f. Record Documents.
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, construction, and storage areas.
b. OWNER's requirements.
9. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids.
10. Shoring requirements and submittal of CONTRACTOR’s geotechnical report.
11. Temporary utilities.
12. Safety and first aid procedures.
13. Security procedures.
14. Housekeeping procedures.
H. ENGINEER will record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within 5 days of
meeting to participants and interested parties.
1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. CONTRACTOR will schedule regular progress meetings at site, conducted weekly, to review
the Work progress, progress schedule, Shop Drawing and Sample submissions schedule,
Application for Payment, contract modifications, and other matters needing discussion and
resolution. At one meeting each month the Contractor’s updated narrative progress report
and overall schedule will be a topic of discussion.
B. Attendees will include:
1. Owner’s representative(s), as appropriate.
2. Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers, as appropriate.
3. Engineer’s representative(s).
4. Others as appropriate.
C. Conduct progress meetings at least once every week in CONTRACTOR's field office,
ENGINEER's field office, or other mutually agreed upon place.
D. Distribute to each anticipated participant written notice and agenda of each meeting at least 2
days before meeting.
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 31 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Meetings
E. Require attendance of CONTRACTOR's superintendent and subcontractors who are or are
proximate to be actively involved in the Work, or who are necessary to agenda.
F. Invite OWNER, ENGINEER, utility companies when the Work affects their interests, and
others necessary to agenda.
G. Complete and bring Application for Payment and Progress Schedule to progress meeting.
H. Prepare and distribute agenda.
I. Preside at meetings.
J. Purpose of progress meetings: To expedite work of subcontractors or other organizations that
are not meeting scheduled progress, resolve conflicts, and coordinate and expedite execution
of the Work.
K. Review progress of the Work, Progress Schedule, narrative report, Application for Payment,
record documents, and additional items of current interest that are pertinent to execution of
the Work.
L. Verify:
1. Actual start and finish dates of completed activities since last progress meeting.
2. Durations and progress of activities not completed.
3. Reason, time, and cost data for Change Order Work that will be incorporated into
Progress Schedule and application for payment.
4. Percentage completion of items on Application for Payment.
5. Reasons for required revisions to Progress Schedule and their effect on Contract Time
and Contract Price.
M. Discuss potential problems which may impede scheduled progress and corrective measures.
N. CONTRACTOR will record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within 7 days
of meeting to participants and interested parties.
1.06 QUALITY CONTROL AND COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Scheduled by Engineer on regular basis and as necessary to review test and inspection
reports, and other matters relating to quality control of Work and work of other contractors.
B. Attendees will include:
1. Contractor.
2. Contractor’s designated quality control representative.
3. Subcontractors and Suppliers, as necessary.
4. Engineer’s representatives.
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 31 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Meetings
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. General: Scheduled by CONTRACTOR on regular basis and as necessary to coordinate with
manufacturers and installers. Meet with manufacturers and installers of major units of
construction which require coordination between subcontractors. Major units of construction
which require pre-installation meetings include:
1. 480V 500HP Variable Frequency Drives.
B. Distribute to each anticipated participant written notice and agenda of each meeting at least 4
days before meeting.
C. Schedule meeting at least 7 days in advance of installation.
D. Conduct meetings in CONTRACTOR's field office or other mutually agreed upon place.
E. Require attendance of Superintendent, appropriate manufacturers and installers of major
units of constructions, and affected subcontractors.
F. Invite OWNER and ENGINEER.
G. Preside at meetings.
H. Record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within 3 days of meeting to
participants and interested parties.
1.08 FACILITY STARTUP MEETINGS
A. Schedule and attend a minimum of 2 facility startup meetings for each Variable Frequency
Drive. The first of such meetings shall be held prior to submitting the Facility Startup Plan, as
specified in Section 01 79 00, DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING, and shall include
preliminary discussions regarding such plan.
B. Agenda items shall include, but not be limited to, content of Facility Startup Plan, coordination
needed between various parties in attendance, and potential problems associated with
startup.
C. Attendees will include:
1. Contractor.
2. Contractor’s designated quality control representative.
3. Subcontractors and equipment Manufacturer’s representatives whom Contractor deems
to be directly involved in facility startup.
4. Engineer’s representatives.
5. Owner’s operations personnel.
6. Others as required by Contract Documents or as deemed necessary by Contractor.
1.09 POST CONSTRUCTION MEETING
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 31 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Meetings
A. Meet with and inspect the Work at 6 months after date of Substantial Completion with
OWNER and ENGINEER.
B. Arrange meeting at least 7 days before meeting.
C. Meet in OWNER’s office or other mutually agreed upon place.
D. Inspect the Work and draft list of items to be completed or corrected.
E. Review service and maintenance contracts, and take appropriate corrective action when
necessary.
F. Complete or correct defective work and extend correction period accordingly.
G. Require attendance of Superintendent, appropriate manufacturers and installers of major
units of constructions, and affected subcontractors.
1.10 OTHER MEETINGS
A. In accordance with Contract Documents and as may be required by Owner and Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
1 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
SECTION 01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Preparation, submittal, and maintenance of computerized progress
schedule and reports, contract time adjustments, and payment requests, including the
following:
1. Preliminary Schedule.
2. Baseline Schedule.
3. Summary Schedule.
4. Weekly Schedule.
5. Schedule Updates.
6. Schedule Revisions.
7. Time Impact Analyses.
8. Final Schedule Submittal.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures.
2. Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination
3. Section 01 31 19 – Project Meetings.
4. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Submit at least 7 days prior to preconstruction
conference.
2. Detailed Progress Schedule:
a. Submit initial Detailed Progress Schedule within 14 days after Effective Date of the
Agreement.
b. Submit an Updated Progress Schedule at each update, in accordance with Article
Detailed Progress Schedule.
3. Submit with Each Progress Schedule Submission:
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
2 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
a. Contractor’s certification that Progress Schedule submission is actual schedule
b. being utilized for execution of the Work.
c. Electronic files compatible with latest version of Project Planner (P3) by Primavera
Systems, Inc.
d. Progress Schedule: Legible copies.
e. Narrative Progress Report: Same number of copies as specified for Progress
Schedule.
4. Prior to final payment, submit a final Updated Progress Schedule.
1.03 RESPONSIBLE PERSON
A. Designate, in writing and within 5 calendar days after Notice of Award, person responsible for
preparation, maintenance, updating and revision of all schedules.
B. Qualifications of Responsible Person:
1. Authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR.
2. Five years verifiable experience in preparation of complex construction schedules for
projects of similar value, size and complexity.
3. Knowledge of CPM scheduling utilizing Primavera Project Planner software.
C. References: Submit written reference of 3 project owners who have personal experience with
this scheduler on previous projects. Identify name, address, telephone number, project name
and cost.
D. Scheduler shall be dedicated full time to this project, located on-site. All scheduling software
and hardware shall be located on-site. Scheduler shall attend all project meetings called for
under Section 01 31 19, PROJECT MEETINGS.
E. ENGINEER reserves the right to disapprove scheduler when submitted by CONTRACTOR if
not qualified. ENGINEER reserves the right to remove scheduler from the project if found to
be incompetent.
1.04 SCHEDULING FORMAT AND SOFTWARE
A. Schedule Format: Utilize critical path method (CPM) format.
B. Prepare computerized schedule utilizing Primavera Project Planner, most current version.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide one licensed copy of the scheduling software to the
ENGINEER, registered in the ENGINEER’s name, for the duration of the project.
1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING MEETING
A. ENGINEER will conduct Preconstruction Scheduling Meeting with CONTRACTOR’s Project
Manager, General Superintendent and scheduler within 7 calendar days after Notice of
Award. This meeting is separate from the Preconstruction Conference Meeting and is
intended to cover schedule issues exclusively.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
3 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
B. At the meeting, scheduling requirements shall be reviewed with CONTRACTOR. These
include schedule preparation, reporting requirements, manpower and equipment loading,
updates, revisions, and schedule delay analysis. CONTRACTOR shall present their schedule
methodology, planned sequence of operations, resource loading methodology and present
their proposed activity coding structure.
C. Coding Structure: CONTRACTOR shall submit proposed coding structure, identifying the
code fields and the associated code values it intends to use in the project schedule. The
coding structure shall, at a minimum, include code fields for Project Segment or Phase, Area
of Work, Type of Work, Submittal/Procurement/Construction and Responsibility/
Subcontractor. Refer to paragraph 1.10H for listing of activity categories to be included in the
schedule.
1.06 PREPARATION
A. Preparation and submittal of Progress Schedule represents CONTRACTOR's intention to
execute the Work within specified time and constraints. Failure to conform to requirement
may result in termination for cause under Article 16, SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
TERMINATION, of the General Conditions.
B. CONTRACTOR's bid covers all costs associated with the execution of the Work in
accordance with the Progress Schedule.
C. During preparation of the preliminary Progress Schedule, ENGINEER will facilitate
CONTRACTOR's efforts by being available to answer questions regarding sequencing
issues, scheduling constraints, interface points, and dependency relationships.
D. Prepare schedule utilizing Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM).
E. Prepare schedule utilizing activity durations in terms of working days. Do not exceed 15
working day duration on activities except concrete curing, submittal review, and equipment
fabrication and deliveries. Where duration of continuous work exceeds 15 working days,
subdivide activities by location, stationing, or other sub-element of the Work. CONTRACTOR
shall coordinate holidays to be observed with the OWNER and incorporate them into the
schedule as non-working days.
F. Failure to include an activity required for execution of the Work does not excuse
CONTRACTOR from completing the Work and portions thereof within specified times and at
price specified in Agreement. Failure of CONTRACTOR to include required schedule
constraints, sequences or milestones in schedule shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of
obligation to conform to requirements of Contract. Acceptance of schedule shall not waive
Contract requirements. In event of conflict between accepted schedule and Contract
requirements, terms of Contract shall govern at all times, unless requirements are waived in
writing by the OWNER.
G. Reference schedule to calendar days with beginning of Contract Time as Day "1".
H. Baseline Schedule and Project Completion: Should CONTRACTOR submit a Baseline
Schedule showing project completion more than 20 working days prior to Contract completion
date, OWNER may issue Change Order, at no cost to OWNER, revising time of performance
of Work and Contract completion date to match CONTRACTOR’s schedule completion date.
Contract milestone dates, if any, shall be adjusted accordingly.
I. Contract float is for the mutual benefit of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Changes to the
project that can be accomplished within this available period of float may be made by
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
4 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
OWNER without extending the Contract time, by utilizing float. No time extensions shall be
granted nor delay damages owed until Work extends beyond currently accepted Contract
completion date. Likewise, CONTRACTOR may utilize float to offset delays other than delays
caused by OWNER. Mutual use of float shall continue until all available float shown by
schedule has been utilized by either OWNER or CONTRACTOR, or both. At that time,
extensions of the Contract time will be granted by OWNER for valid OWNER-caused or third
party-caused delays which affect the planned completion date and which have been properly
documented and demonstrated by CONTRACTOR.
J. Resource Loading and Leveling: CONTRACTOR shall input manpower and equipment data
on each schedule activity. Manpower data shall consist of the man-hours estimated to
perform each task, categorized by trade. Equipment data shall consist of equipment hours
estimated to perform each task, categorized by piece of equipment. CONTRACTOR shall
optimize and level manpower and equipment requirements. Resource leveling shall reflect a
reasonable plan for accomplishing Work. Individual activities may be sequenced within limits
of available float. Critical or near critical paths resulting from use of manpower or equipment
restraints shall be kept to a minimum. Near critical path identified as path with 15 or less
working days of float.
K. Schedule Logic: Schedule shall be assembled to show order in which CONTRACTOR
proposes to carry out Work, indicate restrictions of access, availability of Work areas, and
availability and use of manpower, materials and equipment. The following criteria shall form
basis for assembly of schedule logic:
1. Which activities must be completed before subsequent activities can be started or
performed?
2. Which activities can be performed concurrently?
3. Which activities must be started immediately following completed activities?
4. What major facility, equipment or manpower restrictions are required for sequencing
these activities?
L. Non-sequestering of Float: Pursuant to float sharing requirements of Contract, use of float
suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or logic, special lead or lag logic
restraints, extended activity durations or imposed dates shall be cause for rejection of any
schedule submittal.
M. Major Subcontractor, Parallel Prime Contractor Sign Off: CONTRACTOR shall provide written
confirmation of concurrence from all major subcontractors and independent prime
CONTRACTORS on site with all schedule submittals. Term “major subcontractor” as used in
this Section means any subcontractor, at any tier, with a subcontract worth 5 percent or more
of the total cost of the Work.
N. Imposed Dates, Hidden Logic Prohibited: CONTRACTOR shall not use imposed dates or
hidden logic in preparation of schedule.
O. Interim Milestone Dates, Operational Constraints: In event there are interim milestone dates
and/or operational constraints set forth in Contract, CONTRACTOR shall show them on
schedule as specified in Contract. CONTRACTOR shall not use Zero Total Float constraint or
Mandatory Finish Date on such Contract requirements.
P. Schedule Windows for Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed Equipment or Materials:
Immediately after Award of Contract, CONTRACTOR shall obtain from ENGINEER
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
5 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
anticipated delivery dates of OWNER furnished equipment or materials. These dates shall be
shown on schedule in same manner indicated by ENGINEER.
Q. Cost Loading: All schedules shall be cost loaded. Only on-site construction activities shall be
cost loaded. The sum total of all cost loaded activities shall equal the current value of the
Contract, including change orders, at all times. Upon acceptance by OWNER, the Baseline
Schedule shall also be the Schedule of Values required under Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT
PROCEDURES. The monthly Schedule Updates shall be the monthly Payment Application
required under Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT PROCEDURES. Submittal and acceptance of
these schedules shall be a condition precedent to the making of any payments under this
Contract.
1.07 SUBMITTAL OF PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit preliminary and baseline schedule in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract
as modified by this Section 01 32 00, CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.
B. Submit, on a monthly basis, updated schedules as specified. Submit final schedule update as
specified.
C. Submit revised schedules and time impact analyses as specified.
D. Submit Schedules in the Media and Number of Copies as Follows:
1. Three sets of the CPM network and/or barchart (as specified by the OWNER) on D-size
sheets. Color-coding to be specified by the OWNER.
2. Three sets of Tabular reports listing all activities sorted numerically identifying duration,
early start, late start, early finish, late finish, total float, and all predecessor/successor
information.
3. Two sets of portable drives, with 500 GB storage capacity containing the computerized
CPM Schedule data.
4. Three prints of the Summary Schedule.
1.08 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Preliminary Schedule within 10 calendar days after Notice To
Proceed. Preliminary Schedule shall contain detailed plan of operations for first 90 calendar
days of Work after receipt of Notice to Proceed.
B. In addition to basic requirements outlined in General Conditions, show a detailed schedule,
beginning with Notice to Proceed, for minimum duration of 90 days, and a summary of
balance of Project through Final Completion.
C. Show activities including, but not limited to the following:
1. Notice to Proceed.
2. Permits.
3. Submittals, with review time. Contractor may use Schedule of Submittals specified in
Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
6 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
4. Early procurement activities for long lead equipment and materials.
5. Initial Site work.
6. Earthwork.
7. Specified Work sequences and construction constraints.
8. Contract Milestone and Completion Dates.
9. Owner-furnished products delivery dates or ranges of dates.
10. Major structural, mechanical, equipment, electrical, architectural, and instrumentation and
control Work.
11. System startup summary.
12. Project close-out summary.
13. Demobilization summary.
D. Update Preliminary Progress Schedule monthly; as part of progress payment process.
Failure to do so may result in the Owner withholding all or part of the monthly progress
payment until the Preliminary Progress Schedule is updated in a manner acceptable to
Engineer.
E. Format: In accordance with Article Progress Schedule Critical Path Network.
F. Update monthly to reflect actual progress and occurrences to date, including weather delays.
G. ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall meet within 7 calendar days after receipt of
Preliminary Schedule to review and make necessary adjustments. CONTRACTOR shall
submit revised preliminary schedule within 5 calendar days after meeting.
H. CONTRACTOR shall submit schedule of manpower and costs for all activities on revised
Preliminary Schedule with revised Preliminary Schedule. Schedule of manpower and costs
shall be realistic and level so as not to have unusual manpower requirements.
I. Schedule of costs shall be Schedule of Values required under Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT
PROCEDURES for first 90 calendar days of Work. Submittal and acceptance of Preliminary
Schedule is condition precedent to making of progress payments under Section 01 29 00,
PAYMENT PROCEDURES and payments for mobilization costs otherwise provided for in the
Contract. No pay item Work shall commence until Preliminary Schedule and schedule of
costs have been accepted by OWNER.
J. Accepted Preliminary Schedule shall be incorporated unchanged, as first 90 calendar days of
activity in CONTRACTOR’s Baseline Schedule.
K. Preliminary Schedule shall be updated monthly during first 90 calendar days after Notice to
Proceed. Updated Preliminary Schedule shall be the payment application required under
Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT PROCEDURES.
1.09 BASELINE SCHEDULE
A. General: Comprehensive computer-generated schedule using CPM, generally as outlined in
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
7 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) 580, “Construction Project Planning and
Scheduling Guidelines.” If a conflict occurs between the AGC publication and this
Specification, this Specification shall govern. Adjust or confirm schedules in accordance with
General Conditions on a monthly basis and submit to ENGINEER.
B. Contents:
1. Schedule shall begin with the date of Notice to Proceed and conclude with the date of
Final Completion.
2. Identify Work calendar basis using days as a unit of measure.
3. Show complete interdependence and sequence of construction and Project-related
activities reasonably required to complete the Work.
4. Identify the Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities, and clearly
identify critical path of activities.
5. Reflect sequences of the Work, restraints, delivery windows, review times, Contract
Times and Project Milestones set forth in the Agreement and Section 01 31 00,
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION.
C. No more than 45 calendar days after Notice of Award, CONTRACTOR shall submit the
Baseline Schedule for all Work of the project. Baseline Schedule shall show sequence and
interdependence of all activities required for complete performance of all Work, beginning
with date of Notice to Proceed and concluding with date of final completion of Contract.
D. Baseline Schedule shall conform to requirements of the following Article, "Network Details
and Graphical Output.”
E. Acceptance of the Baseline Schedule by the OWNER is a condition precedent to making
payments under Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT PROCEDURES after the first 90 calendar
days after Notice to Proceed.
1.10 NETWORK DETAILS AND GRAPHICAL OUTPUT
A. Produce a clear, legible, and accurate calendar based, time scaled, graphical network
diagram. Group activities related to the same physical areas of the Work. Produce the
network diagram based upon the early start of all activities.
B. Include for each activity, the description, activity number, estimated duration in working days,
total float and all activity relationship lines.
C. Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence in which Work is planned to
be accomplished. Incorporate the basic concept of the precedence diagram network method
to show how the start of one activity is dependent upon the start or completion of preceding
activities and its completion restricts the start of following activities.
D. Indicate the critical path for the project.
E. Delineate the specified contract duration and identify the planned completion of the Work as
a milestone. The time period between the planned and Contract completion dates, if any,
shall be shown on the schedule as an activity identified as project float unless a Change
Order is issued pursuant to paragraph 1.6.H.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
8 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
F. Identify system shutdown dates, system tie-in dates, specified interim completion or
milestone dates and contract completion date as milestones. Include, in addition to
Construction Activities:
1. Submission dates and review periods for major equipment submittals, shoring submittals,
and indicator pile program:
a. Shoring Reviews: Allow 4-week review period for each shoring submittal.
b. Pile Indicator Program: Allow 3-week review period for analysis of program.
2. Any activity by the OWNER or the ENGINEER that may affect progress or required
completion dates.
3. Equipment and long-lead material deliveries over 8 weeks.
4. Approvals required by regulatory agencies or other third parties.
5. No activity duration exclusive of those for Submittals review and product
fabrication/delivery, shall be less than 1 day and not more than 14 days, unless otherwise
approved.
6. Activity duration for Submittal review shall not be less than review time specified unless
clearly identified and prior written acceptance has been obtained from Engineer.
7. If Contractor provides an accepted schedule with an early completion date, Owner
reserves the right to reduce Contract Times to match the early completion date by issuing
a deductive Change Order at no change in Contract Price.
G. Produce network diagram on 22 inch by 34 inch sheets with grid coordinate system on the
border of all sheets utilizing alpha and numeric designations.
1. Title Block: Show name of Project, Owner, date submitted, revision or update number,
and the name of the scheduler. Updated schedules shall indicate data date.
2. Identify horizontally across top of schedule the time frame by year, month, and day.
3. Identify each activity with a unique number and a brief description of the Work associated
with that activity.
4. Indicate the critical path.
5. Show, at a minimum, the controlling relationships between activities.
6. Plot activities on a time-scaled basis, with the length of each activity proportional to the
current estimate of the duration.
7. Plot activities on an early start basis unless otherwise requested by Engineer.
8. Provide a legend to describe standard and special symbols used.
H. Identify the Execution of the Following, Omitting Items Not Applicable to the Work:
1. Obtaining permits, submittals for early product procurement, and long lead time items.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
9 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
2. Mobilization and other preliminary activities.
3. Initial Site work.
4. Specified Work sequences, constraints, and Milestones.
5. Substantial Completions date(s) of Subcontract Work.
6. All required submittals and submittal review times showing 30 calendar day duration for
such activities and equal amount of time for re-submittal reviews.
7. Equipment and materials procurement/fabrication/delivery.
8. Delivery dates for Owner-furnished products, as specified in Section 01 11 00,
SUMMARY OF WORK.
9. Excavation.
10. Site work.
11. Structural steel work.
12. Architectural features work.
13. Conveying systems work.
14. Equipment work.
15. Mechanical work.
16. Electrical work.
17. Instrumentation and control work.
18. Interfaces with Owner-furnished equipment.
19. Other important work for each major facility.
20. Shoring design and submission of detailed shoring submittals. Identify submission as a
milestone.
21. Shoring review, shoring materials procurement, shoring installation and shoring removal.
22. Piles.
23. Backfill and compaction.
24. Dewatering.
25. Grading, subbase, base, paving, and curb and gutters.
26. Fencing and landscaping.
27. Concrete, including installation of forms and reinforcement, placement of concrete,
curing, stripping, finishing and patching.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
10 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
28. Tests for leakage of concrete structures intended to hold water.
29. Masonry.
30. Metal fastenings, framing, structures, and fabrications.
31. Wood structures, finish carpentry, architectural woodwork, and plastic fabrications.
32. Waterproofing and dampproofing, insulation, roofing and flashing, and sealants.
33. Doors and windows, including hardware and glazing.
34. Finishes including coating and painting, flooring, ceiling, and wall covering.
35. Building specialties including furnishings, laboratory equipment, and toilet and bath
accessories.
36. Process equipment, including identification of ordering lead time, factory testing and
installation.
37. Pumps and drives, including identification of ordering lead time, factory testing and
installation.
38. Conveying equipment including hoists and cranes, conveyor systems, and materials
handling equipment, including identification of ordering lead time and installation.
39. Other mechanical equipment including fans and heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
equipment.
40. Trenching, pipe laying, and trench backfill and compaction.
41. Piping, fittings and appurtenances, including identification of ordering and fabrication lead
time, layout, installation and testing.
42. Valves, gates and operators, including identification of order lead time, installation and
testing.
43. Plumbing specialties.
44. Electric transmission, service, and distribution equipment, including identification of
ordering lead time, and factory testing.
45. Other electrical work including lighting, heating and cooling, and special systems,
including identification of ordering lead time.
46. Instrumentation and controls, including identification of ordering lead time.
47. Control Panel Readiness Testing as set forth in Section 26 90 00.
48. Preliminary testing of equipment, instrumentation and controls.
49. Site Acceptance Testing as set forth in Section 26 90 00.
50. Final testing, including preparation time.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
11 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
51. Seven-day operational test.
52. Substantial Completion: Substantial completion activity shall meet all requirements set
forth in Section 00 73 00, Supplementary Conditions.
53. Punch list work. Equipment and system startup and test activities.
54. Project closeout and cleanup.
55. Operation and maintenance training.
I. Schedule Report:
1. 8-1/2” x 11” white paper, unless otherwise approved.
2. List information for each activity in tabular format, including, at a minimum:
a. Activity Identification Number.
b. Activity Description.
c. Original Duration.
d. Remaining Duration.
e. Early Start Date (Actual start on Updated Progress Schedules).
f. Early Finish Date (Actual finish on Updated Progress Schedules).
g. Late Start Date.
h. Late Finish Date.
i. Total Float.
3. Sort reports, in ascending order, as listed below:
a. Activity number sequence with predecessor and successor activity.
J. Cost -Loading:
1. Note the estimated cost to perform each Work activity, with the exception of Submittals or
Submittal reviews, in the network in a tabular listing.
2. The sum of all activity costs shall equal the Contract Price. An unbalanced or front-end-
loaded schedule will not be acceptable.
3. The accepted cost-loaded Progress Schedule shall constitute the Schedule of Values
specified in Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT PROCEDURES.
1.11 SUMMARY SCHEDULE
A. Provide Summary Schedule which consolidates groups of activities associated with Major
Items of Work shown on Baseline Schedule. Summary Schedule is intended to give an
overall indication of the project schedule without a large amount of detail.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
12 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
B. Summary Schedule shall be updated and submitted monthly and after each Schedule Update
or Schedule Revision.
1.12 SCHEDULE OF SHOP DRAWING AND SAMPLE SUBMITTALS
A. After Preliminary Schedule has been submitted and accepted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR
shall submit a list of all shop drawings and sample submittals anticipated in first 90 calendar
days after Notice to Proceed using early start dates.
B. Submittal of this preliminary list shall be a condition precedent to making of progress
payments during the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.
C. After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall
print out and submit list of all shop drawings and sample submittals for all Work using early
start dates. This listing will contain all submittals required for the entire Work including those
listed above.
D. Submittal of final list shall be a condition precedent to making of progress payments after the
first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.
E. These schedules shall conform to the requirements of Articles 11, 12, and 13 of the General
Conditions.
1.13 MANPOWER SCHEDULES
A. After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall
submit a schedule histogram depicting total craft manpower and craft manpower for
CONTRACTOR’s own labor forces and those of each subcontractor. This manpower
schedule shall be submitted electronically on a portable drive in Excel format, with 1 paper
copy.
B. Submittal of this manpower data shall be a condition precedent to making of progress
payments after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.
1.14 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
A. After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall
submit a tabular report listing each major piece of construction equipment to be used in
performing the Work. This report will list major equipment for CONTRACTOR and each
subcontractor. This tabular report of equipment shall be submitted electronically on a
computer disk in Excel format with 1 paper copy.
B. Submittal of this equipment data shall be a condition precedent to making of progress
payments after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.
1.15 WEATHER DAY ALLOWANCE
A. Include as a separate identifiable activity on the critical path, an activity labeled "Weather
Days Allowance." Insert this activity at the end of the schedule.
B. Duration of Weather Days Allowance is specified in Conditions of the Contract.
C. Insert an activity in critical path to reflect weather day occurrences when weather days are
experienced and accepted by ENGINEER. Identify this activity as a weather delay.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
13 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
D. Reduce duration of Weather Days Allowance activity as weather delays are experienced and
inserted into the Schedule. Remaining weather days in Weather Day Allowance at completion
of project is considered float.
1.16 ALLOWANCE FOR OWNER CAUSED DELAY
A. Include as a separate identifiable activity on the critical path, an activity labeled "Allowance
for OWNER-Caused Delay.” Insert this activity at the end of the schedule, following the
Project Completion Milestone.
B. Duration of this activity is specified in Bid Form. The duration of this OWNER- Caused Delay
Allowance is in addition to the contractual time frame.
C. Insert an activity in critical path to reflect OWNER-caused delay occurrences when OWNER-
caused delay days are experienced and accepted by ENGINEER. Identify this activity as an
OWNER-caused delay.
D. Reduce duration of OWNER-Caused Delay Allowance activity as OWNER-caused delays are
experienced and inserted into the schedule. Remaining days in OWNER- Caused Delay
Allowance at completion of project is considered float.
1.17 REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF SCHEDULES
A. ENGINEER will review Baseline Schedules, Schedule Updates, Schedule Revisions and
Time Impact Analyses to ascertain compliance with specified project constraints, compliance
with milestone dates, reasonableness of durations and sequence, accurate inter-relationships
and completeness.
B. ENGINEER and OWNER will issue written comments following completion of review of
Baseline Schedule within 21 calendar days after receipt. Written comments on review of
Schedule Updates and Schedule Revisions and Time Impact Analyses will be returned to
CONTRACTOR within 14 calendar days after receipt by ENGINEER.
C. Revise and resubmit schedule in accordance with ENGINEER’s comments within 7 calendar
days after receipt of such comments, or request joint meeting to resolve objections. If a
meeting is requested the CONTRACTOR and all major subcontractors shall participate in the
meeting with ENGINEER. Revise and resubmit schedule within 7 calendar days after
meeting.
D. When schedule reflects OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's agreement of project approach and
sequence, schedule will be accepted by OWNER. Use accepted schedule for planning,
organizing and directing the work and for reporting progress. Provide all items specified in
Article 1.7, "Submittal of Project Schedules.”
E. Engineer’s acceptance will demonstrate agreement that:
1. Proposed schedule is accepted with respect to:
a. Contract Times, including Final Completion are within the specified times.
b. Specified Work sequences and constraints are shown as specified.
c. Access restrictions are accurately reflected.
d. Startup and testing times are as specified.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
14 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
e. Submittal review times are as specified.
f. Startup testing duration is as specified and timing is acceptable.
2. In all other respects, Engineer’s acceptance of Contractor’s schedule indicates that in the
Engineer’s judgment, the schedule represents reasonable plan for constructing Project in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review will not make any change in
Contract requirements. Lack of comment on any aspect of schedule that is not in
accordance with the Contract Documents will not thereby indicate acceptance of that
change, unless Contractor has explicitly called the nonconformance to Engineer’s
attention in submittal. Schedule remains Contractor’s responsibility and Contractor
retains responsibility for performing all activities, for activity durations, and for activity
sequences required to construct Project in accordance with the Contract Documents.
F. Unacceptable Preliminary Progress Schedule:
1. Make requested corrections; resubmit within 7 days.
2. Until acceptable to Engineer as Baseline Progress Schedule, continue review and
revision process, during which time Contractor shall update schedule on a monthly basis
to reflect actual progress and occurrences to date.
G. Unacceptable Detailed Progress Schedule:
1. Make requested corrections; resubmit within 7 days.
2. Until acceptable to Engineer as Baseline Progress Schedule, continue review and
revision process.
H. Narrative Report: All changes to activity duration and sequences, including addition or
deletion of activities subsequent to Engineer’s acceptance of Baseline Progress Schedule
shall be delineated in Narrative Report current with proposed Updated Progress Schedule.
1.18 UPDATING THE SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
A. Updated Progress Schedule shall reflect:
1. Progress of Work to within 5 working days prior to submission.
2. Approved changes in Work scope and activities modified since submission.
3. Delays in Submittals or re-submittals, deliveries, or Work.
4. Adjusted or modified sequences of Work.
5. Other identifiable changes.
6. Revised projections of progress and completion.
B. Report of changed logic.
C. Produce detailed sub schedules during Project, upon request of Owner or Engineer, to further
define critical portions of the Work such as facility shutdowns.
D. If Contractor fails to complete activity by its latest scheduled completion date and this Failure
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
15 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
is anticipated to extend Contract Times (or Milestones), Contractor shall, within 7 days of
such failure, submit a written statement as to how Contractor intends to correct
nonperformance and return to acceptable current Progress Schedule. Actions by Contractor
to complete the Work within Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be justification for
adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Times.
E. Owner may order Contractor to increase plant, equipment, labor force or working hours if
Contractor fails to:
1. Complete an activity by its completion date.
2. Satisfactorily execute Work as necessary to prevent delay to overall completion of
Project, at no additional cost to Owner.
F. Update the schedule prior to monthly progress meeting. Submit a written report of significant
changes in progress meeting. A detailed written list of all changes to the previous schedule
submittal contained in the Schedule Update shall be submitted at the monthly progress
meeting.
G. Submit updated schedule and materials specified under Article 1.7 "Submittal of Progress
H. Schedules,” 5 calendar days before the progress meeting.
I. Since monthly Schedule Update is the application for progress payment required under
Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT PROCEDURES, submittal and acceptance of the monthly
Schedule Update is a condition precedent to the making of any progress payments.
J. Prepare update using most recent accepted version of schedule. Include:
1. Actual start dates of activities that have been started.
2. Actual finish dates of activities that have been completed.
3. Percentage of completion of activities that have been started but not finished.
4. Actual dates on which milestones were achieved.
5. Activities shall not be updated by inputting percent complete figures only without also
inputting actual dates.
6. Retained logic shall be used in preparing Schedule Updates.
7. When necessary, input remaining durations for activities whose finish dates cannot be
calculated accurately with a percent complete figure only.
8. Revisions to the schedule may be included that have been previously approved in under
the following Article, "Revisions to Schedule.”
K. Submit written narrative report in conjunction with each Schedule Update. Describe:
1. Activities added to or deleted from schedule. Identify added activities in manner distinctly
different from original activity designations.
2. Changes in sequence or estimated duration of activities.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
16 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
3. Current or anticipated problems and delays affecting progress, impact of these problems
and delays and measures taken to mitigate impact.
4. Assumptions made and activities affected by incorporating change order work into the
schedule.
5. Cost and other resource loading requirements shall be adhered to concerning activities
added to or deleted from the schedule.
L. Identify overall progress of each Major Item of Work in the Summary Schedule.
M. Should monthly Schedule Update show project completion earlier than current Contract
completion date CONTRACTOR shall show early completion time as schedule activity,
identified as “Project Float.”
N. Should monthly Schedule Update show project completion later than current Contract
completion date CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a Schedule Revision in
accordance with the following Article, "Revisions to Schedule.”
1.19 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULE
A. Submit Revised Schedule within 5 Days:
1. When delay in completion of any activity or group of activities indicates an overrun of the
contract time or milestone dates by 20 working days or 5 percent of the remaining
duration, whichever is less.
2. When delays in submittals, deliveries, or work stoppages are encountered making
necessary the replanning or rescheduling of activities.
3. When the schedule does not represent the actual progress of activities.
4. When any change to the sequence of activities, the completion date for major portions of
the work, or when changes occur which affect the critical path.
5. When Contract modification necessitates schedule revision, submit schedule analysis of
change order work with cost proposal.
B. Submit revised schedule and materials as specified under Article "Submittals of Progress
Schedules."
C. Make revisions on most recently accepted version of schedule.
D. Schedule Revisions shall not be prepared or submitted with Schedule Updates. They shall be
separate submittals and shall be noted as Schedule Revisions.
E. Only upon acceptance of a revision by the OWNER shall it be reflected in the next monthly
Schedule Update.
F. Schedule Revisions submitted for the purpose of mitigating a CONTRACTOR- caused project
delay (Recovery Schedule) shall not be implemented until the OWNER reviews and accepts
the Schedule Revision.
1.20 PAYMENT REQUESTS AND CASH FLOW
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
17 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
A. After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by the OWNER, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit on a monthly basis, a tabular report showing anticipated
earnings each month of the contract period. This tabulation will be based on the summation
of the cost-loaded activities each month. CONTRACTOR shall submit an updated payment
schedule each month showing actual earned amounts and anticipated remaining earnings.
B. Utilize cost loaded monthly Schedule Updates as the applications for payment specified in
Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT PROCEDURES. Payment application shall be a listing in Excel
format of all schedule activities showing cost and percentage completion during the current
month for which payment is sought. Submittal of the monthly Schedule Update shall be a
condition precedent to the issuance of any payment under this Contract.
1.21 WEEKLY SCHEDULE
A. Submit to ENGINEER, on the last working day of every week, a progress schedule showing
the activities completed during the previous week and the CONTRACTOR's schedule of
activities for the following 2 weeks.
B. The Weekly Schedule may be a CPM schedule or a bar chart but shall utilize the logic and
conform to the status of the current progress schedule. In the event that the Weekly Schedule
no longer conforms to the current schedule CONTRACTOR may be required to revise the
schedule in accordance with Article 1.19, "Revisions to Schedule."
C. The activity designations used in the Weekly Schedule shall be consistent with those used in
the Baseline Schedule and the monthly Schedule Updates.
D. The format of the Weekly Schedule shall be as agreed upon between the CONTRACTOR
and the ENGINEER.
1.22 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Requirements for Schedule of Values are specified in Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT
PROCEDURES, and Paragraph 1.6.Q, Cost Loading.
B. Submit, in conjunction with the Progress Schedule, a Schedule of Values identifying costs of
all on-site construction activities as generated by the cost loaded schedule. Equate the
aggregate of these costs to the Lump Sum Contract Price.
1.23 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT TIMES
A. Contract time will be adjusted only for causes specified in Contract Documents. Adjustments
in the Contract time shall be governed by the principles of this Article and shall be made in
accordance with the provisions of Article 11, “Amending the Contract Documents, Changes
With Work” of the General Conditions.
1. Non-excusable Delay: Actions or inactions of the CONTRACTOR, or events for which the
CONTRACTOR has assumed contractual responsibility (including actions or inactions of
subcontractors, suppliers or materialmen at any tier) which would independently delay
the completion of the Work beyond the current Contract completion date shall be
designated as non-excusable delay. The CONTRACTOR shall not receive any time
extension for such delays.
2. Excusable Delay: Events which are unforeseeable, outside the control of, and without the
fault or negligence of either the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR (or any party for whom
either is responsible), which would independently delay the completion of the Work
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
18 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
beyond the current Contract completion date shall be designated as excusable delay.
The CONTRACTOR is entitled to a time extension only and shall not receive any other
damages.
3. Compensable Delay: Actions or inactions of the OWNER, or events for which the
OWNER has assumed contractual responsibility, which would independently delay the
completion of the Work beyond the current Contract completion date shall be designated
as compensable delay. The CONTRACTOR is entitled to a time extension and delay
damages.
4. Concurrent Delay: Concurrent delay is any combination of the above three types of delay
occurring on the same calendar date(s), except in cases where the combination consists
of two or more instances of the same type of delay occurring on the same calendar
date(s). When one cause of delay is OWNER- caused or caused by an event which is
beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of either the OWNER or the
CONTRACTOR and the other CONTRACTOR-caused, the CONTRACTOR is entitled
only to a time extension and no delay damages.
B. If the CONTRACTOR believes that the OWNER has impacted its work, such that the project
completion date will be delayed, the CONTRACTOR must submit proof demonstrating the
delay to the critical path. This proof, in the form of a Time Impact Analysis, may entitle the
CONTRACTOR to an adjustment of contract time.
C. Time Impact Analysis:
1. The Time Impact Analysis submitted by the CONTRACTOR shall utilize the accepted
schedule update that is current relative to the time frame of the delay event (change
order, third party delay, or other OWNER-caused delay). The CONTRACTOR shall
represent the delay event in the schedule by 1) inserting new activities associated with
the delay event into the schedule, 2) revising activity logic, or 3) revising activity
durations.
2. If the project schedule’s critical path and completion date are impacted as a result of
adding this delay event to the schedule, a time extension equal to the magnitude of the
impact may be warranted.
3. The Time Impact Analysis submittal shall consist of 1) a fragment of the portion of the
schedule affected by the delay event, 2) a narrative explanation of the delay issue and
how it impacted the schedule, and 3) a compact disc containing the schedule file used to
perform the Time Impact Analysis.
D. When a delay to the project as a whole can be avoided by revising preferential sequencing or
logic, and the CONTRACTOR chooses not to implement the revisions, the CONTRACTOR
will be entitled to a time extension and no compensation for extended overhead.
E. Indicate clearly that the CONTRACTOR has used, in full, all project float available for the
work involved in the request, including any float that may exist between the CONTRACTOR's
planned completion date and the Contract completion date. Utilize the latest version of the
Schedule Update accepted at the time of the alleged delay, and all other relevant information,
to determine the adjustment of the contract time.
F. Float shall be for the mutual benefit of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. Adjustment of
the Contract Times will be granted only when the Contract Float has been fully utilized and
only when the revised date of completion of the Work has been pushed beyond the contract
completion date. Adjustment of the Contract Times will be made only for the number of days
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
19 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
that the planned completion of the work has been extended.
1. Float time is a Project resource available to both parties to meet contract Milestones and
Contract Times.
2. Use of float suppression techniques, such as preferential sequencing or logic, special
lead/lag logic restraints, and extended activity times are prohibited. Use of float time
disclosed or implied by use of alternate float-suppression techniques shall be shared to
proportionate benefit of Owner and Contractor.
3. Pursuant to above float-sharing requirement, no time extensions will be granted nor delay
damages paid until a delay occurs, which:
4. Impacts Project’s critical path,
5. Consumes all available float or contingency time, and
6. Extends Work beyond contract completion date.
G. Actual delays in activities which do not affect the critical path work or which do not move the
CONTRACTOR's planned completion date beyond the Contract completion date will not be
the basis for an adjustment to the contract time.
H. The CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to job-site or home office overhead beyond the
CONTRACTOR's originally planned occupancy of the site if completion of the project occurs
within the specified contract time.
I. Notify ENGINEER of a request for contract time adjustment. Submit request in accordance
with GC.11, Article 11, “Amending the Contract Documents, Changes With Work” of the
General Conditions. In cases where the CONTRACTOR does not submit a request for
contract time adjustment for a specific change order, delay, or CONTRACTOR request within
the specified period of time, then it is mutually agreed that the particular change order, delay,
or CONTRACTOR request has no time impact on the Contract completion date and no time
extension is required.
J. The ENGINEER will, within 30 calendar days after receipt of a contract time adjustment,
request any supporting evidence, review the facts and advise the CONTRACTOR in writing.
K. The new Progress Schedule data, if accepted by the OWNER, shall be included in the next
monthly Schedule Update.
L. When the OWNER has not yet made a final determination as to the adjustment of the
contract time, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment to be
reflected in the Progress Schedule, reflect that amount of time adjustment in the Progress
Schedule as the ENGINEER may accept as appropriate for such interim purpose. It is
understood and agreed that any such interim acceptance by the ENGINEER shall not be
binding and shall be made only for the purpose of continuing to schedule the Work, until such
time as a final determination as to any adjustment of the contract time acceptable to the
ENGINEER has been made. Revise the Progress Schedule prepared thereafter in
accordance with the final decision.
M. Claims Based on Contract Times:
1. Where Engineer has not yet rendered formal decision on Contractor’s Claim for
adjustment of Contract Times, and parties are unable to agree as to amount of
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
20 Section 01 32 00
Construction Progress Documentation
adjustment to be reflected in Progress Schedule, Contractor shall reflect an interim
adjustment in the Progress Schedule as acceptable to Engineer.
2. It is understood and agreed that such interim acceptance will not be binding on either
Contractor or Owner, and will be made only for the purpose of continuing to schedule
Work until such time as formal decision has been rendered as to an adjustment, if any, of
the Contract Times.
3. Contractor shall revise Progress Schedule prepared thereafter in accordance with
Engineer’s formal decision.
1.24 FINAL SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL
A. As a condition precedent to the release of retainage, the final Schedule Update shall be
identified by the CONTRACTOR as the As-Built Schedule.
B. The As-Built Schedule shall reflect the exact manner in which the project was constructed by
reflecting actual start and completion dates for all activities accomplished on the project.
C. The As-Built Schedule shall be signed and certified by the CONTRACTOR’s Project Manager
and scheduler as being an accurate record of the way in which the project was actually
constructed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 32 90
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Safety Plan
SECTION 01 32 90
SAFETY PLAN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Development and maintenance of a Construction Safety Plan.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. OSHA
1.03 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PLAN
A. Detail the Methods and Procedures to comply with Federal, and Local Health and Safety
Laws, Rules and Requirements for the duration of the Contract Times. Include the following:
1. Identification of the Certified or Licensed Safety Consultant, who will prepare, initiate,
maintain and supervise safety programs, and procedures.
2. Procedures for providing workers with an awareness of safety and health hazards
expected to be encountered in the course of construction.
3. Safety equipment appropriate to the safety and health hazards expected to be
encountered during construction. Include warning devices, barricades, safety equipment
in public right-of-way and protected areas, and safety equipment used in multi-level
structures.
4. Methods for minimizing employees' exposure to safety and health hazards expected
during construction.
5. Procedures for reporting safety or health hazards.
6. Procedures to follow to correct a recognized safety and health hazard.
7. Procedures for investigation of accidents, injuries, illnesses and unusual events that have
occurred at the construction site.
8. Periodic and scheduled inspections of general work areas and specific work stations.
9. Training for employees and workers at the jobsite.
10. Methods of communication of safe working conditions, work practices and required
personal protection equipment.
B. Assume responsibility for every aspect of Health and Safety on the jobsite, including the
health and safety of subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons on the jobsite:
1. Forward available information and reports to the Safety Consultant who shall make the
necessary recommendations concerning worker health and safety at the jobsite.
2. Employ additional health and safety measures specified by the Safety Consultant, as
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 32 90
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Safety Plan
necessary, for workers in accordance with OSHA guidelines.
C. Transmit to OWNER and ENGINEER copies of reports and other documents related to
accidents or injuries encountered during construction.
PART 2 - GENERAL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of:
1. Submittals Related to Project Submittals as related to:
a. Action Submittals
b. Informational Submittals
B. Related sections:
1. 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures.
2. 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination.
3. 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation.
4. 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures.
5. 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data.
6. 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by Contractor that requires
Engineer’s approval.
B. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by Contractor that does not require Engineer’s
approval.
1.03 PROCEDURES
A. Direct Submittals to Engineer.
B. Contractor will submit all submittals electronically using the Info Exchange project website to
facilitate the transfer of submittals and related files.
C. Transmittal of Submittal:
1. Contractor shall:
a. Review each submittal and check for compliance with Contract Documents.
b. Stamp each submittal with uniform approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.
1)Stamp to include Project name, submittal number, Specification number, Con-
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
tractor’s reviewer name, date of Contractor’s approval and statement certifying
that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with
Contract Documents.
2)Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor’s approval stamp
and will return them without action.
2. Complete, sign, and transmit with each submittal package, one Transmittal of
Contractor’s Submittal form. A blank Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal form may be
provided by Engineer.
3. Identify Each Submittal with the Following:
a. Numbering and Tracking System:
1)Submittal No. 8300-001, etc.
b. Sequentially number each submittal.
c. Resubmission of submittal shall have original number with sequential alphabetic
suffix (ie: Resubmittal No. 8300-001-A).
1)Specification section and paragraph to which submittal applies.
2)Project title and Engineer’s project number.
3)Date of transmittal.
4)Names of Contractor, subcontractor or Supplier and Manufacturer as
appropriate.
4. Identify and describe each deviation or variation from Contract Documents.
D. Format:
1. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of Contract Documents.
2. Package submittal information by individual Specification section. Do not combine
different Specification sections together in submittal package, unless otherwise directed
in Specification.
3. Present in a clear and thorough manner and in sufficient detail to show kind, size,
arrangement, and function of components, materials, and devices, and compliance with
Contract Documents.
4. Index with labeled tab dividers in orderly manner.
E. Timeliness: Schedule and submit in accordance Schedule of Submittals, and requirements of
individual Specification sections.
F. Processing Time:
1. Time for review shall commence on Engineer’s receipt of submittal.
2. Engineer will act upon Contractor’s submittal and transmit response to Contractor not
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
later than 30 days after receipt, unless otherwise specified.
3. Re-submittals will be subject to same review time.
4. No adjustment of Contract Times or Price will be allowed due to delays in progress of
Work caused by rejection and subsequent re-submittals.
G. Re-submittals: Clearly identify each correction or change made.
H. Incomplete Submittals:
1. Engineer will return entire submittal for Contractor’s revision if preliminary review deems
it incomplete.
2. When any of the following are missing, submittal will be deemed incomplete:
a. Contractor’s review stamp completed and signed.
b. Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal completed and signed.
3. Submittals not required by Contract Documents:
4. Will not be reviewed and will be returned stamped “Not Subject to Review.”
5. Engineer will keep one copy and return all remaining copies to Contractor.
I. Coordination with Project:
1. It is the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to coordinate all equipment furnished with project
elevations and dimensions. Approval of the submittal does not relieve the
CONTRACTOR of the responsibility.
2. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating all project aspects and project
changes with all submittals.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification sections.
B. Contractor will submit all submittals electronically using the Info Exchange project website (or
other OWNER approved system) to facilitate the transfer of submittals and related files.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Identify and Indicate:
a. Applicable Contract Drawing and Detail number, products, units and assemblies, and
system or equipment identification or tag numbers.
b. Equipment and Component Title: Identical to title shown on Drawings.
c. Critical field dimensions and relationships to other critical features of Work. Note
dimensions established by field measurement.
d. Project-specific information drawn accurately to scale.
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
2. Manufacturer’s standard schematic drawings and diagrams as follows:
a. Modify to delete information that is not applicable to the Work.
b. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the
Work.
3. Product Data: Provide as specified in individual Specifications.
4. Foreign Manufacturers: When proposed, include following additional information:
a. Names and addresses of at least two companies that maintain technical service
representatives close to Project.
b. Complete list of spare parts and accessories for each piece of equipment.
D. Samples:
1. Copies: One, unless otherwise specified in individual Specifications.
2. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review
of quality. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a. Manufacturer name.
b. Model number.
c. Material.
d. Sample source.
3. Manufacturer’s Color Chart: Units or sections of units showing full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available.
4. Full-size Samples:
a. Size as indicated in individual Specification section.
b. Prepared from same materials to be used for the Work.
c. Cured and finished in manner specified.
d. Physically identical with product proposed for use.
E. Action Submittal Dispositions: Engineer will review, mark, and stamp as appropriate, and
distribute marked-up copies as noted:
1. Furnish as Submitted:
a. Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal.
b. Distribution
1) One electronic copy furnished to Resident Project Representative.
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
2) One electronic copy retained in Engineer’s file.
3) One electronic copy returned to Contractor appropriately annotated.
2. Furnish as Corrected or Noted:
a. Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal, in
accordance with Engineer’s notations.
b. Distribution:
1) One electronic copy furnished to Resident Project representative.
2) One electronic copy retained in Engineer’s file.
3) One electronic copy to Contractor appropriately annotated.
3. Revise and Resubmit:
4. Make corrections or obtain missing portions, and resubmit.
5. Except for portions indicated, Contractor may begin to incorporate product(s) or
6. implement Work covered by submittal, in accordance with Engineer’s notations.
7. Distribution:
1) One electronic copy furnished to Resident Project Representative.
2) One electronic copy retained in Engineer’s file.
3) One electronic copy to Contractor appropriately annotated.
8. Rejected:
a. Contractor may not incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal.
b. Distribution:
1) One electronic copy furnished to Resident Project Representative.
2) One electronic copy retained in Engineer’s file.
3) One electronic copy returned to Contractor appropriately annotated.
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Contractor will submit all submittals electronically using the Info Exchange project
website to facilitate the transfer of submittals and related files.
2. Refer to individual Specification sections for specific submittal requirements.
3. Engineer will review each submittal. If submittal meets conditions of the Contract,
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
Engineer will forward electronic copies to appropriate parties. If Engineer determines
submittal does not meet conditions of the Contract and is therefore considered
unacceptable, Engineer will retain one electronic copy and return one electronic copy
with review comments to Contractor, and require that submittal be corrected and
resubmitted.
4. Application for Payment: In accordance with Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT
PROCEDURES.
5. Certificates:
a. General:
1)Provide notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for
preparing certification.
2)Signed by officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of
that entity.
6. Welding: In accordance with individual Specification sections.
7. Installer: Prepare written statements on Manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that installer
complies with requirements as specified in individual Specification sections.
8. Material Test: Prepared by qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s standard form,
9. indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.
10. Certificates of Successful Testing or Inspection: Submit when testing or inspection is
required by Laws and Regulations or governing agency or specified in individual
Specification sections.
11. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: In accordance with Section 01 79 00,
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING.
12. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation: In accordance with Section 01 79 00,
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING.
B. Construction Photographs and Video: In accordance with Section 01 31 00, PROJECT
MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION, and as may otherwise be required in Contract
Documents.
C. Contract Closeout Submittals: In accordance with Section 01 77 00, CLOSEOUT
PROCEDURES.
D. Contractor-Design Data:
1. Written and graphic information.
2. List of assumptions.
3. List of performance and design criteria.
4. Summary of loads or load diagram, if applicable.
5. Calculations.
6. List of applicable codes and regulations.
7. Name and version of software.
8. Information requested in individual Specification section.
IFB 7213 7 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Written or published information that documents Manufacturer’s
recommendations, guidelines, and procedures in accordance with individual Specification
sections.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: As required in Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
G. Schedules:
1. Schedule of Submittals: Prepare separately or in combination with Progress Schedule as
specified in Section 01 32 00, CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.
a. Show for Each, at a Minimum, the Following:
1)Specification section number. Identification by numbering and tracking system as
specified under Paragraph
2)“Transmittal of Submittal”.
3)Estimated date of submission to Engineer, including reviewing and processing
time.
b. On a monthly basis, submit updated schedule to Engineer if changes have
occurred or re-submittals are required.
2. Schedule of Values: In accordance with Section 01 29 00, PAYMENT PROCEDURES.
3. Schedule of Estimated Progress Payments: In accordance with Section 01 32 00,
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.
4. Progress Schedules: In accordance with Section 01 32 00, CONSTRUCTION
PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.
H. Special Guarantee: Supplier’s written guarantee as required in individual Specification
sections.
I. Statement of Qualification: Evidence of qualification, certification, or registration as required
in Contract Documents to verify qualifications of professional land surveyor, engineer,
materials testing laboratory, specialty Subcontractor, trade, Specialist, consultant, installer,
and other professionals.
J. Submittals Required by Laws, Regulations, and Governing Agencies:
1. Submit promptly notifications, reports, certifications, payrolls, and otherwise as may be
required, directly to the applicable Federal, State, or local governing agency or their
representative.
2. Transmit to Engineer for Owner's records one electronic copy of correspondence and
transmittals (to include enclosures and attachments) between Contractor and governing
agency.
K. Test and Inspection Reports:
1. General: Shall contain signature of person responsible for test or report.
IFB 7213 8 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
2. Factory:
a. Identification of product and Specification section, type of inspection or test with
referenced standard or code.
b. Date of test, Project title and number, and name and signature of authorized person.
c. Test results.
d. If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in compliance with Contract
Documents, identify corrective action necessary to bring into compliance.
e. Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer.
f. Other items as identified in individual Specification sections.
3. Field: As a minimum, include the following:
a. Project title and number.
b. Date and time.
c. Record of temperature and weather conditions.
d. Identification of product and Specification section.
e. Type and location of test, Sample, or inspection, including referenced standard or
code.
f. Date issued, testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and name
and signature of laboratory inspector.
g. If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in compliance with Contract
Documents, identify corrective action necessary to bring into compliance.
h. Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer.
i. Other items as identified in individual Specification sections.
4. Testing and Startup Data: In accordance with Section 01 79 00, DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING.
5. Training Data: In accordance with Section 01 79 00, DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING.
1.06 FINAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit final copy of all submitted information to OWNER as component of Final Close Out.
Prepare final data in electronic media format.
B. Organizational Format:
1. Identify electronic files with title “FINAL PROJECT SUBMITTALS” and list each submittal
with the following information on each file’s cover sheet:
IFB 7213 9 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
a. Project title.
b. Designate applicable system, equipment, material, or finish.
c. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
d. Identity of general subject matter covered in manual.
e. Identity of equipment number and Specification section.
2. Provide Title Page file with the following:
a. Contractor name, address, and telephone number.
b. Subcontractor, Supplier, installer, or maintenance contractor’s name, address, and
telephone number, as appropriate.
1) Identify area of responsibility of each.
2) Provide name and telephone number of local source of supply for parts and
replacement.
3. Provide electronic searchable Table of Contents for all files:
a. Arranged in systematic order with consecutive page numbers.
b. Identify each product by product name and other identifying numbers or symbols as
set forth in Contract Documents.
4. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data, or neatly identified
5. Material shall be suitable for reproduction, with quality equal to original.
6. All drawings and oversized figures shall be presented electronically in 11x 17 format.
C. Electronic Media Format:
1. Portable Document Format (PDF):
a. After all preliminary data has been found to be acceptable to Engineer, submit
Operation and Maintenance data in PDF format on CD.
b. Files to be exact duplicates of Engineer-accepted preliminary data. Arrange by
specification number and name.
c. Files to be fully functional, fully viewable and fully searchable in most recent version
of Adobe Acrobat.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 10 Section 01 33 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Submittal Procedures
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 34 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Photographic and Videographic Documentation
SECTION 01 34 00
PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes Requirements for:
1. Pre-construction photographs.
2. Pre-construction videos.
3. Post-construction photographs.
4. Post-construction videos.
B. The purpose of the photographs and videos is to document the condition of the facilities prior
to the CONTRACTOR beginning work at the Project site and after Substantial Completion of
the Work.
C. Areas to be photographed and videoed shall include the site of the Work and all existing
facilities either on or adjoining the Project site, including the interior of existing structures, that
could be damaged as a result of the CONTRACTOR’s Work.
D. The scope of the photographic and videographic documentation shall be the sole
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, but shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER.
E. Related sections:
1. Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination
2. Section 01 31 19 – Project Meetings.
3. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
4. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site with notation of vantage points marked for location
and direction of each photograph. Include the same label information as the corresponding
set of photographs.
B. Photographs:
1. Paper Media:
a. Submit 4 prints of each photographic view within 7 days of taking photographs.
b. Format:
1) Four-by-six inch photos.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 34 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Photographic and Videographic Documentation
2) Photographs shall be enclosed in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for
standard three-ring binders.
c. Identification: On back or below each print, provide the following information:
1) Name of project.
2) Date photograph was taken.
3) Description of vantage point, indicating location and direction by compass point.
2. Digital Media:
a. Provide photos as individual, indexed JPG files with the following characteristics:
1) Compression shall be set to preserve quality over file size.
2) Highest resolution JPG images shall be submitted. Resizing to a smaller size
when high resolution JPGs are available shall not be permitted.
3) JPG image resolution shall be 4000 by 3000 or higher.
4) Images shall have rectangular clean images. Artistic borders, beveling, drop
shadows, etc. are not permitted.
C. Videos:
1. Submit 4 copies of each video within 7 days of recording.
2. Videos shall be submitted in a digital color video format on a DVD suitable for playback
on a standard DVD player.
3. Identification: On each copy provide a label with the following information:
a. Name of project.
b. Date video was recorded.
D. Pre-Construction Photographs and Videos: Submit prior to beginning work at the Project site
or prior to the Preconstruction Conference specified in Section 01 31 19, whichever occurs
earlier. Reference Section 01 31 00 for additional requirements.
E. Post-Construction Photographs and Videos: Submit with project closeout documents as
specified in Section 01 77 00. Reference Section 01 31 00 for additional requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MEDIA
A. Paper Media:
1. Commercial grade, glossy surface, acid-free photographic paper.
B. Digital Media:
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 34 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Photographic and Videographic Documentation
1. One hundred and twenty millimeters, 700-MB, 80-minute CD compatible with latest
version of Microsoft Windows.
C. Videos:
1. One hundred and twenty millimeters, DVD compatible with standard DVD players.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Photographs (Paper and Digital Media):
1. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is
being taken so stamp is integral to photograph.
B. Videos:
1. Display continuous running time.
2. At start of each video recording, record weather conditions from local newspaper or
television and the actual temperature reading at Project Site.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 34 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Photographic and Videographic Documentation
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 35 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Special Procedures
SECTION 01 35 00
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Special procedures for locating and verifying concealed existing facilities.
1.02 CONCEALED EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Verify locations of utilities and facilities which may exist by consulting with the OWNER, utility
companies, and Texas811 System, Inc. or other service available in area of Project (see
dig/call information on the Drawings):
1. Abide by easement and right-of-way restrictions.
B. Notify the OWNER, owners of facilities when the Work will be in progress. Make
arrangements for potential emergency repairs in accordance with requirements of owners of
utility facilities, including individual or residential facilities.
C. Assume responsibility for repair of facilities damaged by performance of the Work.
D. Expose sanitary and storm sewers, water, gas, electric, telephone utility lines, and other
underground facilities indicated to permit survey location prior to commencement of Work in
affected area:
1. Expose in ample time to permit relocation of interfering utilities with minimum delaying
effect on contract time.
E. Work required for raising, lowering, or relocating utilities not indicated will be performed by
affected utility owners or as part of the Work at option of affected owners of utilities:
1. When part of the Work, perform work in accordance with standards of affected utility
owner, and adjustment to Contract Price and Contract Times will be made as stipulated
in conditions of contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 35 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Special Procedures
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 35 20
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Alteration Project Procedures
SECTION 01 35 20
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements and procedures for performing alterations to existing
facilities.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions.
2. Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.
3. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Alterations Schedule: Submit in accordance with requirements for Progress Schedules.
1.03 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES
A. Perform Work in sequences and within times specified in Section 01 14 00.
B. Submit separate detailed sub-schedule for alterations, coordinated with construction
schedules. Indicate:
1. Each stage of Work and dates of occupancy of areas.
2. Date of Substantial Completion for each area of alterations as appropriate.
3. Trades and Subcontractors employed in each stage.
1.04 WORK INVOLVED WITH EXISTING OPERATING FACILITIES
A. Perform the Work while existing facility is in operation.
B. Do not jeopardize operation or materially reduce efficiency of existing facility.
C. Coordinate the WORK with OPERATION of the FACILITY:
1. Do not begin alterations of designated portions of the Work until specific permission has
been granted in writing by OWNER in each case.
2. ENGINEER will coordinate the planned procedure with facility manager.
3. Complete as quickly as possible and with as little delay as possible, connections to
existing equipment and utilities, and other operations that interfere with the operation of
existing facility.
D. Operational functions of the facility that are required to be performed to facilitate the Work will
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 35 20
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Alteration Project Procedures
be performed by facility personnel only.
E. Plant Superintendent will cooperate in every way practicable to assist in expediting the Work.
F. When necessary for the proper operation or maintenance of portions of the facility,
reschedule Work operations so that the Work will not conflict with necessary operations or
maintenance of the facility.
1.05 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING, AND PROTECTION
A. Assign relocation, removal, cutting, and patching to trades qualified to perform in manner
which causes least damage and provide means of returning surfaces to appearance of new
construction.
B. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as needed to prevent
damage to remaining existing and new construction.
C. Provide temporary enclosures as specified in Section 01 50 00 to separate construction
areas from existing building and from areas occupied by OWNER, and to provide weather
protection
1.06 SALVAGE MATERIALS
A. Salvage Materials: Equipment removed from existing facility.
B. Materials Designated for Salvage:
1. Variable Frequency Drives
C. Handling and Storage:
1. Prevent damage to salvaged equipment during removal, handling, and transportation of
salvaged materials.
2. Prepare Salvaged Materials for Storage:
a. Valves
b. Pumps
c. Grating
d. Manholes (uninstalled)
3. Store Salvaged Materials in locations determined by OWNER:
D. Pay costs associated with salvaging materials, including handling, transporting, and storage.
1.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify existing materials which shall be patched, extended, or matched.
B. In addition to demolition specified in Section 26 41 19, and Construction specifically indicated
on the Drawings, cut, move or remove items as necessary to provide access or to allow
alteration and new construction to proceed, including:
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 35 20
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Alteration Project Procedures
1. Repair or removal of hazardous or unsanitary conditions.
2. Removal of abandoned items and items serving no useful purpose, such as abandoned
piping, conduit and wiring.
3. Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as
abandoned furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood, rusted metals,
and deteriorated concrete.
4. Cleaning of surfaces and removal of surface finishes needed to install new construction
and finishes.
5. Disposal of items removed and not salvaged.
C. Cut and remove minimum amount of existing construction in manner which avoids damage to
adjacent work.
D. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster, and metals by methods which terminate
surfaces in straight line at natural points of division.
1.03 CLEANING
A. Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in Sections 01 50 00 and 01 77 00.
B. Clean OWNER-occupied areas daily.
C. Clean spillage, overspray and heavy collection of dust in OWNER-occupied areas
immediately.
D. At completion of each portion of Work, clean area and make surfaces ready for successive
portions of Work.
E. At completion of alterations in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to condition
suitable for use by OWNER.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 35 20
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Alteration Project Procedures
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 41 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Regulatory Requirements
SECTION 01 41 00
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Regulatory requirements:
1. Building code.
2. Electrical code.
3. Energy code.
4. Fire code.
5. Mechanical code.
6. Plumbing code.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. International Code Council (ICC):
1. International Building Code (IBC), 2012.
2. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2015.
3. International Fire Code (IFC), 2012.
4. International Mechanical Code (IMC), 2012.
5. International Plumbing Code (IPC), 2012.
6. Any amendments to the above codes made by the City of Denton
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code, 2011.
C. National Electric Code Council:
1. National Electric Code (NEC), NFPA 70, 2011
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Building code:
a. International Building Code.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 41 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Regulatory Requirements
2. Electrical code:
a. NFPA 70: National Electric Code.
3. Energy conservation code:
a. International Energy Conservation Code.
4. Fire code:
a. International Fire Prevention Code.
5. Mechanical codes:
a. International Mechanical Code.
6. Plumbing code:
a. International Plumbing Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 42 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement References
SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of:
1. References to Standards and Specifications of Technical Societies
2. Abbreviations used to reference Technical Societies
1.02 REFERENCE TO STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TECHNICAL SOCIETIES
A. Reference to standards and specifications of technical societies and reporting and resolving
discrepancies associated therewith shall be as provided in the General Conditions, and as
may otherwise be required herein and in the individual Specification sections.
B. Work specified by reference to published standard or specification of government agency,
technical association or trade association, professional society or institute, testing agency, or
other organization shall meet requirements or surpass minimum standards of quality for
materials and workmanship established by designated standard or specification.
C. Where so specified, products or workmanship shall also meet or exceed additional
prescriptive or performance requirements included within Contract Documents to establish a
higher or more stringent standard of quality than required by referenced standard.
D. Where two or more standards are specified to establish quality, product and workmanship
shall meet or exceed requirements of most stringent.
E. Where both a standard and a brand name are specified for a product in Contract
Documents, proprietary product named shall meet or exceed requirements of specified
reference standard.
F. Copies of Standards and Specifications of Technical Societies:
1. Copies of applicable referenced standards have not been bound in these Contract
Documents.
2. Where copies of standards are needed by Contractor, obtain a copy or copies directly
from publication source and maintain in an orderly manner at the Site as Work Site
records, available to Contractor’s personnel, Subcontractors, Owner, and Engineer.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Abbreviations for trade organizations and government agencies: Following is a list of
construction industry organizations and government agencies to which references may be
made in the Contract Documents, with abbreviations used.
1. AA Aluminum Association
2. AABC Associated Air Balance Council
3. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
4. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 42 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement References
5. ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers’ Association
6. ACI American Concrete Institute
7. AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies
8. AGA American Gas Association
9. AGMA American Gear Manufacturers’ Association
10. AI Asphalt Institute
11. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
12. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
13. AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
14. ALS American Lumber Standards
15. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
16. ANSI American National Standards Institute
17. APA The Engineered Wood Association
18. API American Petroleum Institute
19. APWA American Public Works Association
20. ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
21. ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers
22. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
23. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc.
24. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
25. ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing
26. ASTM ASTM International
27. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
28. AWPA American Wood Preservers’ Association
29. AWPI American Wood Preservers’ Institute
30. AWS American Welding Society
31. AWWA American Water Works Association
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 42 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement References
32. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association
33. CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturer
34. CDA Copper Development Association
35. CGA Compressed Gas Association
36. CIS PI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
37. CMAA Crane Manufacturers’ Association of America
38. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
39. CS Commercial Standard
40. CSA Canadian Standards Association
41. CSI Construction Specifications Institute
42. DIN Deutsches Institute für Normung e.V.
43. DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association
44. EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
45. EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents’ Committee
46. ETL Electrical Test Laboratories
47. FAA Federal Aviation Administration
48. FCC Federal Communications Commission
49. FDA Food and Drug Administration
50. FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency
51. FIPS Federal Information Processing Standards
52. PM Factory Mutual
53. Fed. Spec. Federal Specifications (FAA Specifications)
54. FS Federal Specifications and Standards (Technical Specifications)
55. GA Gypsum Association
56. GANA Glass Association of North America
57. ID Hydraulic Institute
58. HMI Hoist Manufacturers’ Institute
59. IBC International Building Code
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 42 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement References
60. ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
61. ICC International Code Council
62. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers’ Association
63. IFC International Fire Code
64. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
65. IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
66. IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute
67. IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturer’s Alliance
68. International Mechanical Code
69. Association of the Non-woven Fabrics Industry
70. International Plumbing Code
71. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation
72. International Organization for Standardization
73. Independent Testing Laboratory
74. Joint Industry Conferences of Hydraulic Manufacturers
75. Marble Institute of America
76. Military Specifications
77. Monorail Manufacturers’ Association
78. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
79. NACE NACE International
80. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
81. NEC National Electrical Code
82. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
83. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association
84. NESC National Electrical Safety Code
85. NETA International Electrical Testing Association
86. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
87. NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 42 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement References
88. NICET National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
89. NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
90. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
91. NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories
92. NSF NSF International
93. NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers
94. NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
95. NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
96. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act (both Federal and State)
97. PCI Pre-cast/Pre-stressed Concrete Institute
98. PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute
99. PPI Plastic Pipe Institute
100. PS Product Standards Section-U.S. Department of Commerce
101. RMA Rubber Manufacturers’ Association
102. RUS Rural Utilities Service
103. SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
104. SDI Steel Deck Institute
105. SDI Steel Door Institute
106. SJI Steel Joist Institute
107. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
108. SPI Society of the Plastics Industry
109. SSPCThe Society for Protective Coatings
110. SWI Steel Window Institute
111. TEMATubular Exchanger Manufacturers’ Association
112. TCA Tile Council of North America
113. TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
114. UBC Uniform Building Code
115. UFC Uniform Fire Code
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 42 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement References
116. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
117. UMC Uniform Mechanical Code
118. USBRU.S. Bureau of Reclamation
119. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
120. WWPA Western Wood Products Association
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
SECTION 01 42 40
ABBREVIATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Abbreviations and meanings.
1.02 INTERPRETATIONS
A. Interpret abbreviations by context in which abbreviations are used.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Abbreviations Used to Identify Reference Standards:
1. AA Aluminum Association
2. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
3. AAN American Association of Nurserymen
4. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
5. ABC Associated Air Balance Council
6. ABPA Acoustical and Board Products Association
7. ACI American Concrete Institute
8. ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories
9. ADC Air Diffusion Council
10. ABMA
11. AGA American Bearing Manufacturers' Association (formerly AFBMA, Anti- Friction
Bearing Manufacturers' Association)
12. American Gas Association
13. AGC Associated General Contractors
14. AGMA American Gear Manufacturers' Association
15. AI Asphalt Institute
16. AIA American Institute of Architects
17. AIMA Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association
18. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
19. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
20. AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
21. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
22. AMG Arizona Masonry Guild
23. ANSI American National Standards Institute
24. APA American Plywood Association
25. API American Petroleum Institute
26. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
27. ASAHCAmerican Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants
28. ASHRAE
29. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
30. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
31. ASTM International (Former name American Society for Testing and Materials. Still used
in specifications.)
32. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
33. AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
34. AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
35. AWS American Welding Society
36. AWSC American Welding Society Code
37. AWWA American Water Works Association
38. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
39. BIA Brick Institute of America
40. BSI Building Stone Institute
41. CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
42. CPSC U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission
43. CRA California Redwood Association
44. CRI Carpet and Rug Institute
45. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
46. CS Commercial Standards
47. CSI Construction Specifications Institute
48. CTI Ceramic Tile Institute
49. DHI Door and Hardware Institute
50. EIFS Exterior Insulation and Finish System
51. EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
52. FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
53. FIA Factory Insurance Association
54. FM Factory Mutual
55. FS Federal Specifications
56. FTI Facing Tile Institute
57. GA Gypsum Association
58. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
59. IBC International Building Code
60. ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
61. ICC International Code Council
62. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
63. MAG Maricopa Association of Governments
64. MIA Marble Institute of America
65. ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
66. MS Military Specifications
67. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
68. NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Association
69. NBHA National Builders Hardware Association
70. NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
71. NEC National Electrical Code
72. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
73. NETA International Electrical Testing Association
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
74. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
75. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
76. NFPA National Forest Products Association
77. NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
78. NMWIANational Mineral Wood Insulation Association
79. NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association
80. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
81. NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
82. NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association
83. PCA Portland Cement Association
84. PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
85. PDCA Paint and Decorating Contractors of America
86. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
87. PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute
88. PS Product Standard
89. RTI Resilient Tile Institute
90. SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
91. SCPA Structural Clay Products Association
92. SDI Steel Door Institute
93. SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
94. SJI Steel Joist Institute
95. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
96. SSPC Society for Protective Coatings-Steel Structures Painting Council
97. TCA Tile Council of America
98. UBC Uniform Building Code (ICBO)
99. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
100. UNS Unified Numbering System
101. USDAUnited States Department of Agriculture
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
102. VA Vermiculite Association
103. WCLA West Coast Lumberman's Association
104. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
105. WPA Western Pine Association
106. WPOA Western Plumbing Officials Association
107. WRC Welding Research Council
108. WSCPA Western States Clay Products Association
109. WWPA Western Wood Products Association
B. Abbreviations Used in Specifications:
1. a year or years (metric unit)
2. Aampere or amperes
3. am ante meridian (before noon)
4. ac alternating current
5. ac-ft acre-foot or acre-feet
6. atm atmosphere
7. AWG American Wire Gauge
8. bbl barrel or barrels
9. bd board
10. bhp brake horsepower
11. bil gal billion gallons
12. BOD biochemical oxygen demand
13. Btu British thermal unit or units
14. Btuh British thermal units per hour
15. bu bushel or bushels
16. Cdegrees Celsius
17. cal calorie or calories
18. cap capita
19. cd candela or candelas
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
20. cfm cubic feet per minute
21. Ci curie or curies
22. cm centimeter or centimeters
23. cmu concrete masonry unit
24. CO carbon monoxide
25. Co. Company
26. CO2 carbon dioxide
27. COD chemical oxygen demand
28. Corp. Corporation
29. counts/min counts per minute
30. cu cubic
31. cu cm cubic centimeter or centimeters
32. cu ft cubic foot or feet
33. cu ft/day cubic feet per day
34. cu ft/hr cubic feet per hour
35. cu ft/min cubic feet per minute
36. cu ft/sec cubic feet per second
37. cu in cubic inch or inches
38. cu m cubic meter or meters
39. cu yd cubic yard or yards
40. d day (metric units)
41. day day (English units)
42. db decibels
43. DB dry bulb (temperature)
44. dc direct current
45. diam diameter
46. DO dissolved oxygen
47. DS dissolved solids
IFB 7213 7 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
48. emf electromotive force
49. fpm feet per minute
50. Fdegrees Fahrenheit
51. ft feet or foot
52. fcfoot-candle or foot candles
53. ft/day feet per day
54. ft/hr feet per hour
55. ft/min feet per minute
56. ft/sec feet per second
57. g gram or grams
58. Ggravitational force
59. gal gallon or gallons
60. gal/day gallons per day
61. gal/min gallons per minutes
62. gal/sec gallons per second
63. gfd gallons per square foot per day
64. g/L grams per liter
65. gpd gallons per day
66. gpd/ac gallons per day per acre
67. gpd/capgallons per day per capita
68. gpd/sq ft gallons per day per square foot
69. gph gallons per hour
70. gpm gallons per minute
71. gps gallons per second
72. h hour or hours (metric units)
73. ha hectare or hectares
74. hp high point
75. hp horsepower
IFB 7213 8 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
76. hp-hr horsepower-hour or horsepower-hours
77. hr hour or hours (English units)
78. Hz hertz
79. ID inside diameter
80. ihp indicated horsepower
81. Inc. Incorporated
82. inch inch
83. inches inches
84. inches/sec inches per second
85. J joule or joules
86. JTU Jackson turbidity unit or units
87. k kips
88. Kkelvin
89. Kthermal conductivity
90. kcal kilocalorie or kilocalories
91. kcmil thousand circular mils
92. kg kilogram or kilograms
93. km kilometer or kilometers
94. kN kilonewton or kilonewtons
95. kPa kilopascal or kilopascals
96. ksi kips per square inch
97. kV kilovolt or kilovolts
98. kVA kilovolt-ampere or kilovolt-amperes
99. kW kilowatt or kilowatts
100. kWh kilowatt hour
101. L liter or liters
102. lb/1000 cu ft pounds per thousand cubic foot
103. lb/acre-ft pounds per acre-foot
IFB 7213 9 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
104. lb/ac pounds per acre
105. lb/cu ft pounds per cubic foot
106. lb/day/cu ft pounds per day per cubic foot
107. lb/day/acre pounds per day per acre
108. lb/sq ft pounds per square foot
109. lin linear, lineal
110. lin ft linear foot or feet
111. lm lumen or lumens
112. log logarithm (common)
113. ln logarithm (natural)
114. lx lux
115. m meter or meters
116. M molar (concentration)
117. mA milliampere or milliamperes
118. max maximum
119. mCi millicurie or millicuries
120. meq milliequivalent
121.μF microfarad or microfarads
122. MFBM thousand feet board measure
123. mfr manufacturer
124. mg milligram or milligrams
125. mgd/ac million gallons per day per acre
126. mgd million gallons per day
127. mg/L milligrams per liter
128.μg/L micrograms per liter
129.μm micrometer or micrometers
130. mile mile
131. mil. gal million gallons
IFB 7213 10 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
132. miles miles
133. min minimum
134. min minute or minutes
135. MLSSmixed liquor suspended solids
136. MLVSS miixed liquor volatile suspended solids
137. mm millimeter or millimeters
138. mol wt molecular weight
139. mol mole
140. Mpa megapascal or megapascals
141. mph miles per hour
142. MPN most probable number
143. mR milliroentgen or milliroentgens
144. Mrad megarad or megarads
145. mV millivolt or millivolts
146. MW megawatt or megawatts
147. N newton or newtons
148. N normal (concentration)
149. No. number
150. Nos numbers
151. NRC noise reduction coefficient
152. NTU or ntu nephelometric turbidity unit
153. oc on center
154. OD outside diameter
155. ORP oxidation-reduction potential
156. OT ortho-tolidine
157. OTA ortha-tolidine-arsenite
158. oz ounce or ounces
159. oz/sq ft ounces per square foot
IFB 7213 11 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
160. Pa pascal or pascals
161. pl plate or property line
162. pm post meridiem (afternoon)
163. ppb parts per billion
164. ppm parts per million
165. ppt parts per thousand
166. pr pair
167. psf/hr pounds per square foot per hour
168. psf pounds per square foot
169. psi pounds per square inch
170. psia pounds per square inch absolute
171. psig pounds per square inch gauge
172. PVC polyvinyl chloride
173. qt quart or quarts
174. R radius
175. R roentgen or roentgens
176. rad radiation absorbed dose
177. RH relative humidity
178. rpm revolutions per minute
179. rps revolutions per second
180. S second (metric units)
181. S Siemens (mho)
182. SDI sludge density index or silt density index
183. sec second (English units)
184. SI International System of Units
185. sp static pressure
186. sp gr specific gravity
187. sp ht specific heat
IFB 7213 12 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
188. sq square
189. cm2 or sq cm square centimeter or centimeters
190. sq ft square feet or foot
191. sq inch square inch
192. sq inches square inches
193. km2 or sq km square kilometer or kilometers
194. m2 or sq m square meter or meters
195. mm2 or sq mm square millimeter or millimeters
196. sq yd square yard or yards
197. SS suspended solids
198. STC Sound Transmission Class
199. SVI sludge volume index
200. TDS total dissolved solids
201. TKN total Kjeldahl nitrogen
202. TLM median tolerance limit
203. TOC total organic carbon
204. TOD total oxygen demand
205. TOW top of weir
206. TS total solids
207. TSS total suspended solids
208. TVS total volatile solids
209. U U Factor/U Value
210. U Coefficient of Heat Transfer
211. U heat transfer coefficient
212. UNS Uniform Numbering System
213. US United States
214. V volt or volts
215. VA volt-ampere or volt-amperes
IFB 7213 13 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
216. VFD Variable Frequency Drive
217. W watt or watts
218. WB wet bulb
219. wg water gauge
220. wk week or weeks
221. wt weight
222. yd yard or yards
223. yr year or years (English unit)
C. Abbreviations Used on Drawings: As listed on Drawings or in Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 14 Section 01 42 40
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Abbreviations
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 45 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Quality Control
SECTION 01 45 00
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Quality control and control of installation.
2. Tolerances.
3. References.
4. Mock-up requirements.
5. Authority and duties of Owner’s representative or inspector.
6. Sampling and testing.
7. Testing and inspection services.
8. Contractor’s responsibilities.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 45 24 - Special Tests and Inspections.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by
manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.
H. When specified, products will be tested and inspected either at point of origin or at Work site:
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 45 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Quality Control
1. Notify Engineer in writing well in advance of when products will be ready for testing and
inspection at point of origin.
2. Do not construe that satisfactory tests and inspections at point of origin is final
acceptance of products. Satisfactory tests or inspections at point of origin do not preclude
retesting or re-inspection at Work site.
I. Do not ship products which require testing and inspection at point of origin prior to testing and
inspection.
1.03 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When Manufacturers' tolerances conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E 329 - Standard for Agencies Engaged
in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction.
B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards,
comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or
are required by applicable codes.
C. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents,
except where specific date is established by code.
D. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
E. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
from Engineer before proceeding.
1.05 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS
A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this Section and identified in respective
product specification sections.
B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
C. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work.
D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Engineer and is specified in product specification
sections to be removed; remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Engineer.
1.06 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE OR INSPECTOR
A. Owner’s Project Representative employed or retained by Owner is authorized to inspect the
Work.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 45 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Quality Control
B. Inspections may extend to entire or part of the Work and to preparation, fabrication, and
manufacture of products for the Work.
C. Deficiencies or defects in the Work which have been observed will be called to Contractor’s
D. attention.
E. Inspector will not:
1. Alter or waive provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Inspect Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures for
3. construction.
4. Accept portions of the Work, issue instructions contrary to intent of Contract Documents,
or act as foreman for Contractor.
5. Supervise, control, or direct Contractor’s safety precautions or programs; or inspect for
safety conditions on Work site, or of persons thereon, whether Contractor’s employees or
others.
F. Inspector will:
1. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist Engineer in determining
when the Work is, in general, proceeding in accordance with Contract Documents.
2. Report to Engineer whenever Inspector believes that Work is faulty, defective, does not
conform to Contract Documents, or has been damaged; or whenever there is defective
material or equipment; or whenever Inspector believes the Work should be uncovered for
observation or requires special procedures.
1.07 SAMPLING AND TESTING
A. General:
1. Prior to delivery and incorporation in the Work, submit listing of sources of materials,
when specified in sections where materials are specified.
2. When specified in sections where products are specified:
a. Submit sufficient quantities of representative samples of character and quality
required of materials to be used in the Work for testing or examination.
b. Test materials in accordance with standards of national technical organizations.
B. Sampling:
1. Furnish specimens of materials when requested.
2. Do not use materials which are required to be tested until testing indicates satisfactory
compliance with specified requirements.
3. Specimens of materials will be taken for testing whenever necessary to determine quality
of material.
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 45 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Quality Control
4. Assist Engineer in preparation of test specimens at site of work, such as soil samples and
concrete test cylinders.
C. Testing:
1. Owner will employ and pay for services of independent testing laboratory to perform
routine tests of materials to confirm compliance with requirements of Contract
Documents:
a. Mill tests, soil compaction test, and other specified tests shall be paid for by
Contractor.
2. When protesting failed tests of material in place or to be used, take additional specimens
and have specimens tested:
a. When original test proves to have been in error, file claim for reimbursement of direct
costs for sampling and testing.
D. Test standards:
1. Perform sampling, specimen preparation, and testing of materials in accordance with
specified standards, and when no standard is specified, in accordance with standard of
nationally recognized technical organization.
2. Physical characteristics of materials not particularly specified shall conform to standards
published by ASTM, where applicable.
3. Standards and publication references in Contract Documents shall be edition or revision
in effect on date stipulated in the Contract Documents.
1.08 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
A. Contractor will employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm; known as
Contractor’s independent testing firm, to perform Contractor quality control testing as required
in the technical specifications for various work and materials.
B. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an “Owner’s independent testing firm” to
perform testing and inspection as required in the technical specifications for various work and
materials or stipulated in Section 01 45 24 to confirm Contractor’s compliance with Contract
Documents. If Engineer or Owner’s independent testing firm is not properly certified to
perform specialty inspections required by the building department, Owner will employ and
pay for a quality specialty inspection firm to perform required testing and inspection.
C. The Contractor’s independent testing firm will perform tests, inspections and other services
specified in individual specification sections and as required by Owner and requested by the
Engineer.
D. The qualifications of laboratory that will perform the testing, contracted by the Owner or by
the Contractor, shall be as follows:
1. Has authorization to operate in the state where the project is located.
2. Meets “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification,”
3. published by American Council of Independent Laboratories.
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 45 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Quality Control
4. Meets requirements of ASTM E 329.
5. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time specialist on staff to review services.
6. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable
to National Bureau of Standards (NBS) or accepted values of natural physical constants.
7. Will submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference
Laboratory of NBS during most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies
of deficiencies reported by inspection.
E. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off-
site testing inspections and source quality control as required by Engineer or Owner.
F. Reports will be submitted by Contractor’s independent testing firm and by Owner’s
independent testing firm to Engineer, Contractor, and Owner in triplicate, indicating
observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract
Documents. Each report shall include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number.
4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
5. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
6. Record of temperature and weather conditions.
7. Date of test.
8. Identification of product and specification section.
9. Location of sample or test in Project.
10. Type of inspection or test.
11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents.
12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer.
G. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner’s independent testing firm, furnish samples of
materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental
labor as requested.
1. Notify Engineer and Owner’s independent testing firm 48 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring testing.
2. Make arrangements with Owner’s independent testing firm and pay for additional
samples and tests required for Contractor’s use.
H. Limitations of authority of testing Laboratory: Owner’s independent testing firm or Laboratory
is not authorized to:
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 45 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Quality Control
1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of
Contract Documents.
2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor.
4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
I. Testing and employment of an Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory shall not
relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
J. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements
shall be performed by same Owner’s independent testing firm on instructions by Engineer.
Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing
charges from Contract Sum/Price.
K. The Owner’s independent testing firm responsibilities will include:
1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in
performance of services.
3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.
4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of
Work or products.
6. Perform additional tests required by Engineer.
7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.
L. Owner’s independent testing firm individual test reports: After each test, Owner’s independent
testing firm will promptly submit electronically and three hard copies of report to Engineer and
to Contractor. When requested by Engineer, the Owner’s independent testing firm will provide
interpretation of test results. Include the following:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name of inspector.
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications section.
6. Location in Project.
7. Type of inspection or test.
IFB 7213 7 Section 01 45 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Quality Control
8. Date of test.
9. Certified test results stamped and signed by a registered Engineer in the State of Texas.
10. Summary of conformance with Contract Documents.
M. Owner’s independent testing firm will provide monthly report of certification to identify all work
performed for special inspections and other contract requirements on this project. The
following certified monthly report at a minimum will include but not limited to:
1. Results of testing.
2. Testing logs.
3. Outstanding deficiencies.
4. Various statistical data.
5. Testing curves (up to 4 types) as required by the Engineer.
1.09 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory personnel and provide access
to construction and manufacturing operations.
B. Secure and deliver to Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory adequate quantities of
representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
C. Provide to Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory and Engineer preliminary mix
design proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by
testing laboratory.
D. Furnish electronically and 5 hard copies of product test reports.
E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
1. To provide access to construction to be tested.
2. To obtain and handle samples at Work site or at source of product to be tested.
3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
4. For storage and curing of test samples.
F. Notify Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory 48 hours in advance of when
observations, inspections and testing is needed for laboratory to schedule and perform in
accordance with their notice of response time.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 8 Section 01 45 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Quality Control
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 45 24
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Special Tests and Inspections
SECTION 01 45 24
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: This Section describes the requirements for providing special tests and
inspections.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units and Related Units.
2. ASTM C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
3. ASTM C780, Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation
of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
4. ASTM C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.
5. ASTM C1314, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.
B. International Building Code (IBC).
1.03 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section describes special tests and inspections of structural assemblies and
components to be performed in compliance with IBC.
B. These special tests and inspections are in addition to the requirements specified in Section
01 45 00, and by the individual Sections.
C. The OWNER will employ one or more inspectors who will provide special inspections
during construction.
1.04 INSPECTION
A. Duties of Special Inspector:
1. General: Required duties of the Special Inspector are described in IBC.
1.05 TESTS
A. Selection of the material required to be tested shall be by the OWNER's Testing
Laboratory and not the CONTRACTOR.
1.06 SPECIAL TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. Testing laboratory: Special tests will be performed by the OWNER's testing laboratory as
specified in Section 01 45 00.
B. OWNER reserves the right to positive material identification tests.
1. Contractor must make materials available for testing.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 45 24
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Special Tests and Inspections
C. The following types of work require special inspection as described in IBC. Refer to the
following verification, testing and inspection schedules.
1. Appendix A, Cast-In-Place Concrete Special Inspection Schedule.
2. Appendix B, Essential Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Inspection Schedule.
3. Appendix C, Essential Masonry Special Inspection Schedule.
4. Appendix D, Soils Verification And Inspection Schedule.
5. Appendix E, Structural Steel Special Inspection Schedule.
6. Appendix F. Other Special Inspection.
1.07 OTHER SPECIFIC TESTS
A. Masonry shall be tested in accordance with IBC.
1. Minimum strength of units shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C140.
2. Minimum strength of grout shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1019.
3. Prior to construction, obtain samples of the aggregates, additives, and water; mix
and test in laboratory in accordance with ASTM C270.
4. During construction, sample and test masonry for consistency prior to use on each
structure in accordance with ASTM C780.
5. When approved by the building official, if installed masonry does not meet
requirements, conduct prism tests in accordance with ASTM C1314.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SCHEDULE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall allow time necessary for Special Inspections as listed above.
B. Sufficient notice shall be given so that the Special Inspections can be performed. This
includes time for off-site Special Inspectors to plan the inspection and travel to site.
3.02 PROCEDURE
A. The Special Inspector will immediately notify the ENGINEER of any corrections required and
follow notification with appropriate documentation.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall not proceed until the work is satisfactory to the ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 45 24
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Special Tests and Inspections
APPENDIX A
ESSENTIAL ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL AND
ELECTRICAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE
Frequency of InspectionVerification and Inspection Reference
Standard
Continuous
During Task
Listed
Periodic
During
Task
Listed
1.Suspended ceiling system including anchorage.–X
2. Anchorage of electrical equipment for emergency
standby power.
–X
3. Anchorage of other electrical or mechanical
equipment on floors or roofs.
–X
4.Anchorage of ducts.–X
5.Anchorage of pipes.–X
6.Steel storage racks supporting pipelines.–X
7.Elevator installation.–X
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 45 24
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Special Tests and Inspections
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 50 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Temporary Facilities and Controls
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnishing, maintaining, and removing construction facilities and temporary controls,
including temporary utilities, construction aids, barriers and enclosures, security, access
roads, temporary controls, project sign, field offices and sheds, and removal after
construction.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions.
2. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation
3. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
4. Section 01 34 00 – Photographic and Videographic Documentation
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Association of Nurserymen: American Standards for Nursery Stock.
2. Federal Emergency Management Agency.
3. NFPA, National Fire Prevention Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction
Operations.
4. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA); Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA):
568B, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
5. U.S. Department of Agriculture: Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds.
6. U.S. Weather Bureau: Rainfall-Frequency Atlas of the U.S. for Durations from 30 Minutes
to 24 Hours and Return Periods from 1 to 100 Years.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. General: For products specified to be furnished under this Section, submit product data in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.
2. For Temporary Piping Systems:
a. Submit layout drawings showing proposed routing of piping, including proposed pipe
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 50 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Temporary Facilities and Controls
support and pipe restraint locations.
b. Submit product data for piping, fittings, appurtenances, restraints, supports, and all
other components of the temporary piping system.
c. Submit all information at least 28 days prior to when each temporary piping system is
scheduled to be installed and allow 14 days for review and comment by ENGINEER
and OWNER.
3. For Temporary Pumping Systems:
a. Submit pump data, performance curves, and other operating information as specified
in Section 01 33 00.
b. Submit sketches showing layout of temporary pumping system, including pump
quantity, configuration in wet well, and proposed piping layout specified in Paragraph
c. 1.02 B.
d. Submit piping headloss calculations based on proposed temporary piping system
layout.
e. Submit all information at least 28 days prior to when the temporary pumping system
is scheduled to be installed and allow 14 days for review and comment by
ENGINEER and OWNER.
4. Copies of permits and approvals for construction as required by Laws and Regulations
and governing agencies.
5. Temporary Utility Submittals:
a. Electric power supply and distribution plans.
b. Water supply and distribution plans.
c. Drainage plans.
d. Sanitary sewer.
6. Temporary Construction Submittals:
a. Access Roads: Routes, cross-sections, and drainage facilities.
b. Parking area plans.
c. Contractor’s field office, storage yard, and storage building plans, including gravel
d. surfaced area.
e. Fencing and protective barrier locations and details.
f. Engineer’s field office plans.
g. Staging area location plan.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 50 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Temporary Facilities and Controls
h. Traffic and Pedestrian Control and Routing Plans: As specified herein, and
proposed revisions thereto.
7. Temporary Control Submittals:
a. Noise control plan.
b. Plan for disposal of waste materials and intended haul routes.
1.04 MOBILIZATION
A. Mobilization shall Include, but Not be Limited to, these Principal Items:
1. Obtaining required permits.
2. Moving Contractor’s field office and equipment required for first month operations onto
Site.
3. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
4. Providing onsite communication facilities, including telephones.
5. Providing onsite sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified and as required
by Laws and Regulations, and governing agencies.
6. Arrange for and erection of Contractor’s work and storage yard.
7. Posting OSHA required notices and establishing safety programs and procedures.
8. Have Contractor’s superintendent at Site full time.
B. Use area designated for Contractor’s temporary facilities as shown on Drawings.
1.05 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. Comply with Owner’s safety rules while on Owner’s property.
B. Keep Owner informed of serious onsite accidents and related claims.
C. Use of Explosives: No blasting or use of explosives will be allowed onsite.
1.06 VEHICULAR TRAFFIC
A. Traffic Routing Plan: Show sequences of construction affecting use of roadways, time
required for each phase of the Work, provisions for decking over excavations and phasing of
operations to provide necessary access, and plans for signing, barricading, and striping to
provide passages for pedestrians and vehicles.
1.07 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Temporary Electrical Power:
1. Arrange with local utility to provide adequate temporary electrical service.
2. Provide and maintain adequate jobsite power distribution facilities conforming to
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
4 Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities and Controls
applicable Laws and Regulations.
3. Provide, maintain, and pay for electric power for performance of the Work except for
power required for the final 7-day operational test:
a. When using permanent facilities, provide separate meter and reimburse OWNER for
power used in connection with performance of the Work.
B. Temporary Water:
1. Pay for and construct facilities necessary to furnish potable water for human consumption
and non-potable water for use during construction.
2. Remove temporary piping and connections and restore affected portions of the facility to
original condition before Substantial Completion.
3. Pay for water used for construction prior to Substantial Completion. OWNER will provide
water for 7-day final test.
C. Temporary Sanitary Facilities:
1. Provide suitable and adequate sanitary facilities that are in compliance with applicable
Laws and Regulations.
2. At completion of the Work, remove sanitary facilities and leave site in neat and sanitary
condition.
D. Temporary Fire Protection: Provide sufficient number of fire extinguishers of type and
capacity required to protect the Work and ancillary facilities.
E. First Aid: Post first aid facilities and information posters conforming to requirements of OSHA
and other applicable Laws and Regulations in readily accessible locations.
F. Utilities in Existing Facilities: See Section 01 14 00, WORK RESTRICTIONS.
1.08 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide railings, kick plates, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by Laws and
Regulations and as required for adequate protection of life and property.
B. Use construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary facilities
of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move loads.
C. Design temporary supports with adequate safety factor to assure adequate load bearing
capability:
1. When requested, submit design calculations by professional registered engineer prior to
application of loads.
2. Submitted design calculations are for information and record purposes only.
D. Accident Prevention:
1. Exercise precautions throughout construction for protection of persons and property.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
5 Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities and Controls
2. Observe safety provisions of applicable Laws and Regulations.
3. Guard machinery and equipment, and eliminate other hazards.
4. Make reports required by authorities having jurisdiction, and permit safety inspections of
the Work.
5. Before commencing construction work, take necessary action to comply with provisions
for safety and accident prevention.
E. Warning Devices and Barricades: Adequately identify and guard hazardous areas and
conditions by visual warning devices and, where necessary, physical barriers:
1. Devices shall conform to minimum requirements of OSHA and State agency which
administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.
F. Hazards in Protected Areas: Mark or guard excavations in areas from which public is
excluded, in manner appropriate for hazard.
G. Above Grade Protection: On multi-level structures, provide safety protection that meets
requirements of OSHA and State agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project
is located.
H. Protect existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items to be preserved on Project site
from injury, damage or destruction by vehicles, equipment, worker or other agents with
substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with hazards.
I. Fences:
1. Enclose site of the Work with fence adequate to protect the Work against acts of theft,
violence and vandalism.
2. Enclose temporary offices and storage areas with fence adequate to protect temporary
facilities against acts of theft, violence and vandalism.
3. When entire or part of site is to be permanently fenced, permanent fence may be built to
serve for both permanent and temporary protection of the work site, provided that
damaged or defaced fencing is replaced prior to Substantial Completion.
4. Protect temporary and permanent openings and close openings in existing fences to
prevent intrusion by unauthorized persons. Bear responsibility for protection of plant and
material on site of the Work when openings in existing fences are not closed.
5. During night hours, weekends, holidays, and other times when no work is performed at
site, provide temporary closures or enlist services of security guards to protect temporary
openings.
6. Fence temporary openings when openings are no longer necessary.
1.09 SECURITY
A. Make adequate provision for protection of the work area against fire, theft, and vandalism,
and for protection of public against exposure to injury.
1.10 ACCESS ROADS
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
6 Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities and Controls
A. General:
1. Build and maintain access roads to and on site of the Work to provide for delivery of
material and for access to existing and operating plant facilities on site.
2. Build and maintain dust free roads which are suitable for travel at 20 miles per hour.
B. Off-Site Access Roads:
1. Build and maintain graded earth roads.
2. Build roads only in public right-of-way or easements obtained by OWNER.
3. Obtain rights-of-way or easements when electing to build along other alignment.
C. On-Site Access Roads:
1. Maintain access roads to storage areas and other areas to which frequent access is
required.
2. Maintain similar roads to existing facilities on site of the Work to provide access for
maintenance and operation.
3. Protect buried vulnerable utilities under temporary roads with steel plates, wood planking,
or bridges.
4. Maintain on-site access roads free of mud. Under no circumstances shall vehicles leaving
the site track mud off the site onto the public right-of-way.
1.11 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Noise Control:
1. In inhabited areas, particularly residential, perform operations in manner to minimize
noise.
2. In residential areas, take special measures to suppress noise during night hours.
1.12 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary buildings and furnishings before inspection for Substantial Completion or
when directed.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.
C. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 24 inches and grade to match
surrounding conditions.
D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.
1.13 TEMPORARY PROCESS PUMPING
A. For this contract, no temporary pumping is believed to be required to complete the work. To
achieve the Contractor’s plan to complete the work, Contractor may require and shall provide
temporary pumping system to pump flow as required to complete the work.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
7 Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities and Controls
1. Anticipated pressure will vary based on headlosses developed and the final length of
installed temporary piping. CONTRACTOR shall calculate headlosses and provide pump
with sufficient pressure to meet flow requirements. Calculations shall be sealed and
signed by a professional engineer registered in the state in which the project is located.
2. Pump(s) shall be capable of passing a solid with a sphere size of 3 inches.
3. Temporary pumps shall be capable of matching plant flow rates through the use of
variable flow rate pumping. The use of cycled pumping (i.e, on/off) is not acceptable.
Provide all wiring and controls necessary to match plant flow rate based on 4-20 mA
signal available at the Operations Building.
4. Provide and pay for all power required to operate temporary pumps.
5. All electrical and instrumentation components will comply with applicable code
requirements for the area where the temporary pump is located.
6. Temporary pumping will be required 24 hours per day during the time period when
pumping is required and is critical to the proper operation of the OWNER’S treatment
plant. Provide 24-hour on-site supervision of pumps to ensure that pumps are always
operational and performing as required. Notify the OWNER immediately if temporary
pumping cannot be provided.
7. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for repairing any damage or reimbursing the
OWNER for any regulatory fines or additional plant staff time resulting from the
CONTRACTOR’S failure to maintain temporary pumping.
8. Provide 100 percent backup (a.k.a., standby, redundant, etc.) pumping capacity equal to
the required process flow rate. Backup system shall be capable of providing required
pumping capacity immediately upon failure of primary pumping system.
9. All necessary spare equipment and appurtenances shall be available on-site to allow
immediate repair and/or replacement of any pumping system component that is not
functioning properly.
B. Providing temporary piping systems as specified in Paragraph 1.14.
C. Temporary pumping of other process flows is not allowed unless approved in writing by the
OWNER.
D. After Temporary Process Pumping System is no Longer Required:
1. Remove temporary process pumping system.
2. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary process pumping
system.
3. Restore existing facilities to original condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
8 Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities and Controls
A. General:
1. Perform Work within right-of-way and easements in a systematic manner that minimizes
inconvenience to property owners and the public.
2. Schedule the Work so construction will not interfere with irrigation of cultivated lands or
pasturelands. Construction may proceed during irrigation season, provided Contractor
constructs temporary irrigation ditches, turnouts, and miscellaneous structures
acceptable to property owners.
3. Provide continuous access for livestock through farm areas. Do not cut off ready access
to portions of farmlands in which livestock are pastured. Maintain existing fences required
to restrain livestock. Keep gates closed and secure.
4. Maintain in continuous service all existing oil and gas pipelines, underground power,
telephone or communication cable, water mains, irrigation lines, sewers, poles and
overhead power, and all other utilities encountered along line of the Work, unless other
arrangements satisfactory to owners of said utilities have been made.
5. Where completion of the Work requires temporary or permanent removal or relocation of
existing utility, coordinate all activities with owner of said utility and perform all work to
their satisfaction.
6. Protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain underground pipes, conduits, drains, and
other underground utility construction uncovered or otherwise affected by construction
operations.
7. In areas where Contractor’s operations are adjacent to or near a utility, such as gas,
telephone, television, electric power, water, sewer, or irrigation system, and such
operations may cause damage or inconvenience, suspend operations until arrangements
necessary for protection have been made by Contractor.
8. Notify property owners and utility offices that may be affected by construction operation at
least 2 days in advance: Before exposing a utility, obtain utility owner’s permission.
Should service of a utility become interrupted due to Contractor’s operation, notify proper
authority immediately. Cooperate with said authority in restoring service as promptly as
possible and bear costs incurred.
9. Do not impair operation of existing sewer system. Prevent construction material,
pavement, concrete, earth, volatile and corrosive wastes, and other debris from entering
sewers, pump stations, or other sewer structures.
10. Maintain original Site drainage wherever possible.
B. Site Security:
1. Erect a temporary security fence for protection of existing facilities. Maintain fence
throughout construction period. Obtain Engineer’s written permission before removal of
temporary security fencing.
2. Provide and maintain additional temporary security fences as necessary to protect the
Work and Contractor-furnished products not yet installed.
C. Barricades, Lights, Signs, and Equipment:
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
9 Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities and Controls
1. Provide as required by the Department of Transportation in the state having jurisdiction
and in sufficient quantity to safeguard public and the Work.
2. Provide as necessary to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and affected
roads, streets, and alleyways, inside and outside of fenced area, and as required to
ensure public safety and the safety of Contractor’s employees, other employer’s
employees, and others who may be affected by the Work.
3. Provide to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from potential damage.
4. Locate to enable access by facility operators and property owners.
5. Protect streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to traffic
by effective barricades with acceptable warning signs.
6. Locate barricades at the nearest intersecting public thoroughfare on each side of the
blocked section.
7. Illuminate barricades and obstructions with warning lights from sunset to sunrise.
D. Trees and Plantings:
1. Protect from damage and preserve trees, shrubs, and other plants outside limits of the
Work and within limits of the Work, which are designated on the Drawings to remain
undisturbed.
E. Existing Structures:
1. Where Contractor contemplates removal of small structures such as mailboxes,
signposts, and culverts that interfere with Contractor’s operations, obtain approval of
property owner and Engineer.
2. Move mailboxes to temporary locations accessible to postal service.
3. Replace items removed in their original location and a condition equal to or better than
original.
F. Finished Construction: Protect finished floors and concrete floors exposed as well as those
covered with composition tile or other applied surfacing.
G. Waterways: Keep ditches, culverts, and natural drainages continuously free of construction
materials and debris.
H. Dewatering: Construct, maintain, and operate cofferdams, channels, flume drains, sumps,
pumps, or other temporary diversion and protection works. Furnish materials required, install,
maintain, and operate necessary pumping and other equipment for the environmentally safe
removal and disposal of water from the various parts of the Work. Maintain foundations and
parts of the Work free from water.
3.02 STORAGE YARDS AND BUILDINGS
A. Coordinate requirements with Section 01 60 00, PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS.
B. Temporary Storage Yards: Construct temporary storage yards for storage of products that
are not subject to damage by weather conditions.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
10 Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities and Controls
C. Temporary Storage Buildings:
1. Provide environmental control systems that meet recommendations of manufacturers of
equipment and materials stored.
2. Arrange or partition to provide security of contents and ready access for inspection and
inventory.
3. Store combustible materials (paints, solvents, fuels) in a well-ventilated and remote
building meeting safety standards.
4. Provide, at a minimum, one temporary storage building or storage trailer to house
specified spare part during the duration of construction and until spare parts are accepted
by Owner and Engineer.
3.03 PARKING AREAS
A. Control vehicular parking to preclude interference with public traffic or parking, access by
B. emergency vehicles, Owner’s operations, or construction operations.
C. Provide parking facilities for personnel working on the Project. No employee or equipment
parking will be permitted on Owner’s existing parking areas, except as specifically designated
for Contractor’s use.
3.04 VEHICULAR TRAFFIC
A. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding closing or restricting use of public streets or
highways. No public or private road shall be closed, except by written permission of proper
authority. Assure the least possible obstruction to traffic and normal commercial pursuits.
B. Conduct the Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether vehicular or
pedestrian.
C. Whenever it is necessary to cross, close, or obstruct roads, driveways, and walks, whether
public or private, provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary
expedients for accommodation of public and private travel.
D. Coordinate traffic routing with that of others working in same or adjacent areas.
3.05 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. In accordance with General Conditions, as may be specified in other Specification sections,
and as required herein.
B. Wet down exterior surfaces prior to sweeping to prevent blowing of dust and debris. At least
weekly, sweep all floors (basins, tunnels, platforms, walkways, roof surfaces), and pick up all
debris and dispose.
C. Provide approved containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and
rubbish. At least at weekly intervals, dispose of such waste materials, debris, and rubbish
offsite.
D. At least weekly, brush sweep entry drive and roadways, and all other streets and walkways
affected by the Work and where adjacent to the Work.
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
11 Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities and Controls
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement
12 Section 01 50 00
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 60 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Product Requirements
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of the required new products for the project:
1. Providing and delivering.
2. Design and environmental requirements.
3. Shipment.
4. Delivery and Inspection.
5. Handling, Storage and Protection.
6. Inspection and Installation.
B. Related sections:
1. 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Products:
1. New items for incorporation in the Work whether purchased by Contractor or Owner for
the Project, or taken from previously purchased stock and may also include existing
materials or components required for reuse.
2. Includes the terms material, equipment, machinery, components, subsystem, system,
hardware, software, and terms of similar intent and is not intended to change meaning of
such other terms used in Contract Documents, as those terms are self-explanatory and
have well recognized meanings in construction industry.
3. Items identified by Manufacturer’s product name, including make or model designation,
indicated in Manufacturer’s published product literature, that is current as of the date of
the Contract Documents.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Where Contractor design is specified, design of installation, systems, equipment, and
components, including supports and anchorage, shall be in accordance with provisions of
latest edition of International Building Code (IBC) by International Code Council.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Altitude: Provide materials and equipment suitable for installation and operation under rated
conditions at elevations shown on Drawings.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 60 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Product Requirements
B. Provide equipment and devices installed outdoors or in unheated enclosures capable of
continuous operation within an ambient temperature range of 0 °F to 104 °F.
1.05 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
A. When practical, have the factory assemble products, mark or tag separate parts and
assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts that may be
damaged by the elements with strippable protective coating.
B. Package products to facilitate handling and protect from damage during shipping, handling,
and storage. Mark or tag outside of each package or crate to indicate its purchase order
number, bill of lading number, contents by name, name of Project and Contractor, equipment
number, and approximate weight. Include complete packing list and bill of materials with each
shipment.
C. Extra Materials, Special Tools, Test Equipment, and Expendables:
1. Furnish as Required by Individual Specifications.
2. Schedule:
a. Ensure that shipment and delivery occur concurrently with shipment of associated
equipment.
b. Transfer to Owner shall occur immediately subsequent to Contractor's acceptance of
equipment from Supplier.
3. Packaging and Shipment:
a. Package and ship extra materials and special tools to avoid damage during long term
storage in original cartons insofar as possible, or in appropriately sized, hinged-cover,
wood, plastic, or metal box.
b. Prominently Displayed on Each Package, the Following:
1) Manufacturer’s part nomenclature and number, consistent with Operation and
2) Maintenance Manual identification system.
3) Applicable equipment description.
4) Quantity of parts in package.
5) Equipment manufacturer.
4. Deliver materials to the site.
5. Notify Engineer upon arrival for transfer of materials.
6. Replace extra materials and special tools found to be damaged or otherwise inoperable
at time of transfer to Owner.
D. Request a minimum 7-day advance notice of shipment from manufacturer. Upon receipt of
Manufacturer’s advance notice of shipment, promptly notify Engineer of anticipated date of
equipment arrival.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 60 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Product Requirements
E. Factory Test Results: Reviewed and accepted by Engineer before product shipment as
required in individual Specification sections.
1.06 DELIVERY AND INSPECTION
A. Deliver products in accordance with accepted current Progress Schedule and coordinate to
avoid conflict with the Work and conditions at Site. Deliver anchor bolts and templates
sufficiently early to permit setting prior to placement of structural concrete.
B. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in Manufacturer’s original container or packaging,
with identifying labels intact and legible. Include on label, date of manufacture and shelf life,
where applicable.
C. Unload products in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions for unloading or as specified,
and record receipt of products at Site. Promptly inspect for completeness and evidence of
damage during shipment.
D. Remove damaged products from Site, and expedite delivery of identical new undamaged
products, and remedy incomplete or lost products to provide that specified, so as not to delay
progress of the Work.
1.07 HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Handle and store products in accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions and in a
manner to prevent damage. Store in approved storage yards or sheds provided in
accordance with Section 01 50 00, TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS. Provide
Manufacturer’s recommended maintenance during storage, installation, and until products
are accepted for use by Owner.
B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic
inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified
conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. Keep running account of products in.
storage to facilitate inspection and to estimate progress payments for products delivered, but
not installed in the Work.
C. Store VFDs, electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and equipment with bearings in
weather- tight structures maintained above 60 °F. Protect electrical, instrumentation, and
control products, and insulation against moisture, water, and dust damage. Connect and
operate continuously all space heaters furnished in electrical equipment.
D. Store fabricated products above ground on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining, and
store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid surface to prevent mixing with
foreign matter. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet
coverings; provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.
E. Store finished products that are ready for installation in dry and well-ventilated areas. Do not
subject to extreme changes in temperature or humidity.
F. After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage due to traffic and
construction operations. Remove coverings when no longer needed.
G. Hazardous Materials: Prevent contamination of personnel, storage building, and Site. Meet
requirements of product specification, codes, and manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 60 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Product Requirements
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide the Manufacturers standard materials suitable for service conditions unless otherwise
specified in the individual Specifications.
B. Where product specifications include a named Manufacturer, with or without model number,
and also include performance requirements, named Manufacturer’s products must meet the
performance specifications.
C. Like items of products furnished and installed in the Work shall be end products of one
Manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for
appearance, operation and maintenance, spare parts and replacement, Manufacturer’s
services, and implement same or similar process instrumentation and control functions in
same or similar manner.
D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically
permitted by Contract Documents.
E. Provide interchangeable components of the same Manufacturer, for similar components,
unless otherwise specified.
F. Equipment, components, systems, sub-systems: Design and manufacture with due regard for
health and safety of operation, maintenance, and accessibility, durability of parts, and shall
comply with applicable OSHA, State, and local health and safety regulations.
G. Regulatory Requirement: Coating materials shall meet Federal, State, and local requirements
limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds and for worker exposure.
H. Safety Guards: Provide for all belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, or other moving or
rotary parts. Cover rotating part on all sides. Design for easy installation and removal. Use
16- gauge or heavier; galvanized steel, aluminum coated steel, or galvanized or aluminum
coated ½” mesh expanded steel. Provide galvanized steel accessories and supports,
including bolts.
I. For outdoors application, prevent entrance of rain and dripping water.
J. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
1. Provide the Work in accordance with the 2009 International Building Code. Where
required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to
provide a basis for approval under NEC.
2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an
applied UL listing mark.
K. Equipment Finish:
1. Provide Manufacturer’s standard finish and color, except where specific color is indicated.
2. If Manufacturer has no standard color, provide equipment with gray finish as approved by
Engineer.
L. Special Tools and Accessories: Furnish to Owner, upon acceptance of equipment, all
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 60 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Product Requirements
accessories required to place each item of equipment in full operation. These accessory
items include, but are not limited to, adequate oil and grease (as required for first lubrication
of equipment after field testing), light bulbs, fuses, hydrant wrenches, valve keys, hand
wheels, chain operators, special tools, and other spare parts as required for maintenance.
M. Lubricant: Provide initial lubricant recommended by equipment Manufacturer in sufficient
quantity to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace consumption during testing, startup, and
operation until final acceptance by Owner.
2.02 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
A. General:
1. Manufacture parts to U.S.A. standard sizes and gauges.
2. Two or more items of the same type shall be identical, by the same Manufacturer, and
interchangeable.
3. Design structural members for anticipated shock and vibratory loads.
4. Use 1/4” minimum thickness for steel that will be submerged, wholly or partially, during
normal operation.
5. Modify standard products as necessary to meet performance Specifications.
B. Lubrication System:
1. Require no more than weekly attention during continuous operation.
2. Convenient and accessible. Oil drains with bronze or stainless steel valves and fill-plugs
easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform.
3. Locate drains to allow convenient collection of oil during oil changes without removing
equipment from its installed position.
4. Provide constant-level oilers or oil level indicators for oil lubrication systems.
5. For grease type bearings, which are not easily accessible, provide and install stainless
steel tubing; protect and extend tubing to convenient location with suitable grease fitting.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where Specifications call for factory testing to be witnessed by Engineer, notify Engineer not
less than 14 days prior to scheduled test date, unless otherwise specified.
B. Calibration Instruments: Bear the seal of a reputable laboratory certifying instrument has
been calibrated within the previous 12 months to a standard endorsed by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
C. Factory Tests: Perform in accordance with accepted test procedures and document
successful completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 60 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Product Requirements
A. Inspect materials and equipment for signs of pitting, rust decay, or other deleterious effects of
storage. Do not install material or equipment showing such effects. Remove damaged
material or equipment from the Site and expedite delivery of identical new material or
equipment. Delays to the Work resulting from material or equipment damage that
necessitates procurement of new products will be considered delays within Contractor’s
control.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless
specifically dimensioned.
B. No shimming between machined surfaces is allowed.
C. Install the Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise
specified.
D. Repaint painted surfaces that are damaged prior to equipment acceptance.
E. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval of
Engineer.
F. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in accordance with
Manufacturer’s instructions, and as may be specified. Retain a copy of Manufacturers’
instruction at Site, available for review at all times.
G. For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in the Work:
1. Use special care in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation to assure proper
function in the completed Work.
2. Arrange for transportation, storage, and handling of products that require offsite storage,
restoration, or renovation. Include costs for such Work in the Contract Price.
3.03 FIELD FINISHING
A. In accordance with Section 09 90 00, PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS and
individual Specification sections.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Perform required adjustments, tests, operation checks, and other startup activities.
3.05 LUBRICANTS
A. Fill lubricant reservoirs and replace consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior
to acceptance of equipment by Owner.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of the required closeout procedures for the
project:
1. Providing and delivering informational submittals.
2. Preparing, maintaining, providing and delivering Record Documents.
3. Furnishing Releases from Agreements.
4. Furnishing Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities.
5. Providing Warranties and Bonds.
6. Providing Certificate of Final Completion.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures.
2. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation.
3. Section 01 72 20 – Field Engineering.
4. Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data.
5. Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Submit Prior to Application for Final Payment.
a. Record Documents: As required in General Conditions.
b. Approved Shop Drawings and Samples: As required in the General Conditions.
c. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: In accordance with Section 01 78 23, and as
required in individual Specification sections.
d. Certificates of Testing and Inspection: As required in the General Conditions, these
General Requirements sections, and the individual Specifications sections.
e. Training Sessions: In accordance with Section 01 79 00, and individual Specifications
sections.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
f. Certificate of Substantial Completion.
g. Special bonds, Special Guarantees, and Service Agreements.
2. Form of Submittal:
a. Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2” by 11” three ring, side binders with hardback,
cleanable, plastic covers.
1) Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title Warranties and Bonds, with
title of Project; name; address, and telephone number of Contractor and
equipment Supplier, and name of responsible principal.
2) Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the of the Project Manual,
with each item identified with the number and title of the Specification section in
which specified, and the name of the product or Work item.
3) Separate each warranty or Bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of
Contents. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary.
List Subcontractor, Supplier, and Manufacturer, with name, address, and tele-
phone number of responsible contact for service and warranty issues.
3. Preparation of Submittal:
a. Obtain notarized warranties and Bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible
Subcontractor, Supplier, and Manufacturer, within 10 days after completion of the
applicable item or Work, except for items put into use with Owner’s permission, leave
date of beginning of time warranty until date of Substantial Completion is determined.
4. Time of Submission: Submit within 10 days after the date of Date of Substantial
Completion and prior to submission of Final Application of Payment.
a. Spare parts and special tools as required by individual Specification sections.
b. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: As required in General Conditions.
c. Releases or Waivers of Liens and Claims: As required in General Conditions.
d. Releases from Agreements.
e. Final Application for Payment: Submit in accordance with procedures and
requirements stated in Section 01 29 00.
f. Extra Materials: As required by individual Specification sections.
1.03 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Quality Assurance:
1. Furnish qualified and experienced person, whose duty and responsibility shall be to
maintain record documents.
2. Accuracy of Records:
3. Coordinate changes within record documents, making legible and accurate entries on
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
each sheet of Drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show
change.
4. Purpose of Project record documents is to document factual information regarding
aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the
Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive Site measurement, investigation, and
examination.
5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that a change in the Work has
occurred.
6. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, request Engineer’s review and
approval of current status of record documents. Failure to properly maintain, update, and
submit record documents may result in a deferral by Engineer to recommend whole or
any part of Contractor’s Application for Payment, either partial or final.
7. Maintain at Project site, available to OWNER and ENGINEER, 1 copy of the Contract
Documents, shop drawings and other submittals, in good order.
1.04 RELEASES FROM AGREEMENTS
A. Furnish Owner written releases from property owners or public agencies where side
agreements or special easements have been made, or where Contractor’s operations have
not been kept within the Owner’s construction right-of-way.
B. In the Event Contractor is Unable to Secure Written Releases:
1. Inform Owner of the reasons.
2. Owner or its representatives will examine the Site, and Owner will direct Contractor to
complete the Work that may be necessary to satisfy terms of the side agreement or
special easement.
3. Should Contractor refuse to perform this Work, Owner reserves right to have it done by
separate contract and deduct cost of same from Contract Price, or require Contractor to
furnish a satisfactory bond in a sum to cover legal Claims for damages.
4. When Owner is satisfied that the Work has been completed in agreement with Contract
Documents and terms of side agreement or special easement, right is reserved to waive
requirement for written release if:
5. Contractor’s failure to obtain such statement is due to grantor’s refusal to sign, and this
refusal is not based upon any legitimate Claims that Contractor has failed to fulfill terms
of side agreement or special easement, or
6. Contractor is unable to contact or has had undue hardship in contacting grantor.
1.05 EVIDENCE OF COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF GOVERNING
AUTHORITIES
A. Submit the Following:
1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificates of Inspection:
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
a. Mechanical.
b. Electrical.
1.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Provide executed Warranty or Guaranty Form if required by Contract Documents.
B. Provide specified additional warranties, guarantees, and bonds from manufacturers and
suppliers.
1.07 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION
A. When 7-day operational test has been successfully completed, ENGINEER will certify that
new facilities are operationally complete. ENGINEER will submit a list of known items (punch
list) still to be completed or corrected prior to contract completion.
B. List of items to be completed or corrected will be amended as items are resolved by
CONTRACTOR.
C. When all items have been completed or corrected, submit written certification that the entire
work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents and request final inspection.
D. Upon completion of final inspection, ENGINEER will either prepare a written acceptance of
the entire work or advise CONTRACTOR of work not complete. If necessary, inspection
procedures will be repeated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General:
1. Promptly following commencement of Contract Times, secure from Engineer at no cost to
Contractor, one complete set of Contract Documents. Drawings will be full size.
2. Label or stamp each record document with title, “RECORD DOCUMENTS,” in neat large
3. printed letters.
4. Record information concurrently with construction progress and within 24 hours after
receipt of information that change has occurred. Do not cover or conceal Work until
required information is recorded.
B. Preservation:
1. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use
record documents for construction purposes.
2. Make documents and Samples available at all times for observation by Engineer.
C. Making Entries on Drawings:
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
1. Use an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe change by
graphic line and note as required.
a. Make annotations with erasable colored pencil conforming to the following color
code:
Additions:Red
Deletions:Green
Comments Blue
Dimensions:Graphite
2. Date entries.
3. Call attention to entry by “cloud” drawn around area or areas affected.
4. Legibly mark to record actual changes made during construction, including, but not
limited to:
5. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finished first floor data if not shown
or where depth differs from that shown.
6. Horizontal and vertical locations of existing and new Underground Facilities and
appurtenances, and other underground structures, equipment, or Work, and Reference to
at least two measurements to permanent surface improvements.
7. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction referenced
to visible and accessible features of the structure.
8. Locate existing facilities, piping, equipment, and items critical to the interface between
existing physical conditions or construction and new construction.
9. Changes made by Addenda and Field Orders, Work Change Directive, Change Order,
and Engineer’s written interpretation and clarification using consistent symbols for each
and showing appropriate document tracking number.
10. Dimensions on Schematic Layouts: Show on record drawings, by dimension, the
centerline of each run of items that are described in previous subparagraph above.
11. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as “cast iron drain,” “galv. water,” and the
like.
12. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item (“under slab,” “in ceiling plenum,”
“exposed,” and the like).
13. Make identification so descriptive that it may be related reliably to Specifications.
14. Mark and record field changes and detailed information contained in submittals and
change orders.
15. Record actual depths, horizontal and vertical location of underground pipes, duct banks
and other buried utilities. Reference dimensions to permanent surface features.
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
16. Identify specific details of pipe connections, location of existing buried features located
during excavation, and the final locations of piping, equipment, electrical conduits,
manholes, and pull boxes.
17. Identify location of spare conduits including beginning, ending and routing through pull
boxes, and manholes. Record spare conductors, including number and size, within spare
conduits, and filled conduits.
18. Provide schedules, lists, layout drawings, and wiring diagrams.
D. Maintain Documents Separate From Those Used for Construction:
1. Label documents "RECORD DOCUMENTS."
E. Keep Documents Current:
1. Record required information at the time the material and equipment is installed and
before permanently concealing.
F. Deliver record documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title,
CONTRACTOR's name and address, list of documents, and signature of CONTRACTOR.
G. During progress meetings, record documents will be reviewed to ascertain that changes have
been recorded.
H. Final Schedule Submittal in accordance with Section 01 32 00.
3.02 FINAL CLEANING
A. At completion of the Work or of a part thereof and immediately prior to Contractor’s request
for certificate of Substantial Completion; or if no certificate is issued, immediately prior to
Contractor’s notice of completion, clean entire Site or parts thereof, as applicable.
1. Leave the Work and adjacent areas affected in a cleaned condition satisfactory to Owner.
2. Remove grease, dirt, dust, paint or plaster splatter, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other
foreign materials from exposed surfaces.
3. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish and match adjacent
surfaces.
4. Clean all windows.
5. Clean and wax wood, vinyl, or painted floors.
6. Broom clean exterior paved driveways and parking areas.
7. Hose clean sidewalks, loading areas, and others contiguous with principal structures.
8. Rake and clean all other surfaces.
9. Remove snow and ice from access to buildings.
10. Replace air-handling filters and clean ducts, blowers, and coils of ventilation units
operated during construction.
IFB 7213 7 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
11. Leave water courses, gutters, and ditches open and clean.
12. Perform final cleaning prior to inspections for Final Acceptance.
13. Employ skilled workers who are experienced in cleaning operations.
14. Use cleaning materials which are recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be
cleaned.
15. Prevent scratching, discoloring, and otherwise damaging surfaces being cleaned.
16. Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
17. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of site work:
a. Police yards and grounds to keep clean.
18. Remove dust, cobwebs, and traces of insects and dirt.
19. Clean grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, paint, blemishes,
sealants, plaster, concrete, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces, and
fixtures and equipment.
20. Remove non-permanent protection and labels.
21. Polish waxed woodwork and finish hardware.
22. Wash tile.
23. Wax and buff hard floors, as applicable.
24. Wash and polish glass, inside and outside.
25. Wash and shine mirrors.
26. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine.
27. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
28. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters when heating, ventilation, and air
conditioning units were operated during construction.
29. Clean ducts, blowers and coils when units were operated without filters during
construction.
30. Clean light fixtures and replace burned-out or dim lamps.
B. Use only cleaning materials recommended by Manufacturer of surfaces to be cleaned.
3.03 WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Arrange for and dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris off-site:
1. Prior to making disposal on private property, obtain written permission from OWNER of
such property.
IFB 7213 8 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
B. Do not fill ditches, washes, or drainage ways which may create drainage problems.
C. Do not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances during disposal operations.
D. Maintain disposal site in safe condition and good appearance.
E. Complete leveling and cleanup prior to Final Acceptance of the Work.
3.04 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR
A. Touch-up or repair finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, and installations that
have been damaged prior to inspection for Final Acceptance.
B. Refinish or replace entire surfaces which cannot be touched-up or repaired satisfactorily.
3.05 FINAL CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF SYSTEMS OF PLANT FACILITIES
A. Clean channels, pipe, basins, reservoirs, and tanks before running of 7-day test, or before
facility goes on stream when 7-day test is not required.
B. Wash, wherever practicable, or broom sweep channels, pipe, basins, reservoirs, and tanks.
C. Disinfect piping intended to carry potable water as follows or in accordance with American
Water Works Association Standards.
D. Provide ample sampling outlets in pipe for testing.
E. Fill pipe with chlorine solution of sufficient strength to retain residual of not less than 10 parts
per million at end of 24 hours.
F. After disinfection, rinse entire potable water system with potable water sufficient to reduce
chlorine residual to not more than 0.6 parts per million throughout system before system is
put into service.
3.06 FINAL CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF SYSTEMS OF POTABLE WATER MAINS
A. Clean interior of pipe and fittings.
B. When pipe contains dirt that cannot be removed by flushing, swab pipe interiors with solution
containing not less than 500 parts per million of chlorine until clean.
C. Flush 12 inch in diameter and smaller pipe as thoroughly as available water sources will
permit.
D. Fill pipe with chlorine solution of sufficient strength to provide 10 parts per million chlorine
residual at end of 24 hours.
E. Flush pipes with potable water until chlorine residual is less than 0.6 parts per million before
pipe are put into service.
3.07 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A. Submit following Closeout Submittals upon completion of the Work and at least 7 days prior
to submitting Application for Final Payment:
IFB 7213 9 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
1. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
4. Warranties and Bonds.
5. Keys and Keying Schedule.
6. Evidence of Payment and Release of Stop Payment Notices as outlined in Conditions of
the Contract.
7. Release of claims as outlined in Conditions of the Contract.
8. Survey Record Documents as specified in Section 01 72 20.
9. Certificate of Final Completion.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 10 Section 01 77 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Closeout Procedures
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 78 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Operation and Maintenance Data
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Detailed information for the preparation, submission, and Engineer’s review of Operations
and Maintenance (O&M) Data, as required by individual Specification sections.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Preliminary Data: Initial and subsequent submissions for Engineer’s review.
B. Final Data: Engineer-accepted data, submitted as specified herein.
C. Maintenance Operation: As used on Maintenance Summary Form is defined to mean any
routine operation required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of equipment.
Examples of typical maintenance operations are lubrication, belt tensioning, adjustment of
pump packing glands, and routine adjustments.
1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Equipment and System Data:
1. Preliminary Data:
a. Do not submit until Shop Drawing for equipment or system has been reviewed and
approved by Engineer.
b. Submit prior to shipment date.
2. Final Data:
a. Submit Instructional Manual Formatted data not less than 30 days prior to equipment
or system field functional testing.
B. Materials and Finishes Data:
1. Preliminary Data: Submit at least 15 days prior to request for final inspection.
2. Final Data: Submit within 10 days after final inspection.
1.04 DATA FORMAT
A. Prepare preliminary data in the form of an instructional manual. Prepare final data in the form
of an instructional manual and in electronic media format.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 78 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Operation and Maintenance Data
B. Instructional Manual Format:
1. Binder: Commercial quality, permanent, three-ring or three-post binders with durable
plastic cover.
2. Size: 8-1/2” x 11” minimum.
3. Cover: Identify manual with typed or printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
DATA” and list:
a. Project title.
b. Designate applicable system, equipment, material, or finish.
c. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
d. Identity of general subject matter covered in manual.
e. Identity of equipment number and Specification section.
4. Title Page:
a. Contractor name, address, and telephone number.
b. Subcontractor, Supplier, installer, or maintenance contractor’s name, address, and
telephone number, as appropriate.
1) Identify area of responsibility of each.
2) Provide name and telephone number of local source of supply for parts and
replacement.
5. Table of Contents:
a. Neatly typewritten and arranged in systematic order with consecutive page numbers.
b. Identify each product by product name and other identifying numbers or symbols as
set forth in Contract Documents.
6. Paper: 20-pound minimum, white for typed pages.
7. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data, or neatly typewritten.
8. Three-hole punched data for binding and composition; arrange printing so that punched
holes do not obliterate data.
9. Material shall be suitable for reproduction, with quality equal to original. Photocopying of
material will be acceptable, except for material containing photographs.
C. Electronic Media Format:
1. Portable Document Format (PDF):
a. After all preliminary data has been found to be acceptable to Engineer, submit
Operation and Maintenance data in PDF format on CD.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 78 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Operation and Maintenance Data
b. Files to be exact duplicates of Engineer-accepted preliminary data. Arrange by
specification number and name.
c. Files to be fully functional and viewable in most recent version of Adobe Acrobat.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures of Submittal
1. Contractor shall:
a. Submit all submittals electronically using the Info Exchange project website to
facilitate the transfer of submittals and related files.
b. Submit all required final hard copies and required electronic copies as specified
herein.
B. Informational:
1. Data Outline: Submit one electronic copy via the Info Exchange website of a detailed
outline of proposed organization and contents of Final Data prior to preparation of
Preliminary Data.
2. Preliminary Data:
a. Submit one electronic copy for Engineer’s review.
b. If data meets conditions of the Contract:
1) One electronic copy will be returned to Contractor.
2) One electronic copy will be forwarded to Resident Project Representative. 3).
One electronic copy will be retained in Engineer’s file
c. If data does not meet conditions of the Contract:
1) One electronic copy will be returned to Contractor with Engineer’s comments
2) (on separate document) for revision.
3) Engineer’s comments will be retained in Engineer’s file.
4) One electronic copy will be retained in Engineer’s file.
5) Re-submit one electronic copy revised in accordance with Engineer’s comments.
3. Final Data: Submit two hard copies and one electronic copy in each format specified
herein.
1.06 DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Content for Each Unit (or Common Units) and System:
1. Product Data:
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 78 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Operation and Maintenance Data
a. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to specific product.
b. Clearly annotate each sheet to:
1) Identify specific product or part installed.
2) Identify data applicable to installation.
3) Delete references to inapplicable information.
c. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
d. Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests.
e. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
f. Original Manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, detailed assembly drawings showing
each part with part numbers and sequentially numbered parts list, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
g. Spare parts ordering instructions.
h. Where applicable, identify installed spares and other provisions for future work (e.g.,
reserved panel space, unused components, wiring, and terminals).
2. As-installed, color-coded piping diagrams.
3. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.
4. Drawings: Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Format:
1) Provide reinforced, punched, binder tab; bind in with text. 2). Reduced to 8-1/2” x
11”, or 11” x 17” folded to 8-1/2” x 11”.
2) Where reduction is impractical, fold and place in 8-1/2” x 11” envelopes bound in
text.
3) Identify Specification section and product on Drawings and envelopes.
b. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
c. Control and flow diagrams.
d. Coordinate drawings with Project record documents to assure correct illustration of
completed installation.
5. Instructions and Procedures: Within text, as required to supplement product data.
a. Format:
1) Organize in consistent format under separate heading for each different pro-
cedure.
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 78 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Operation and Maintenance Data
2) Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 3). Provide
information sheet for Owner’s personnel, including:
a) Proper procedures in event of failure.
b) Instances that might affect validity of guarantee or Bond.
b. Installation Instructions: Including alignment, adjusting, calibrating, and checking.
1) Operating Procedures:
2) Startup, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions.
3) Test procedures and results of factory tests where required.
4) Regulation, control, stopping, and emergency instructions.
5) Description of operation sequence by control Manufacturer.
6) Shutdown instructions for both short and extended duration.
7) Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable.
8) Safety precautions.
9) Special operating instructions.
c. Maintenance and Overhaul Procedures:
1) Routine maintenance.
2) Guide to troubleshooting.
3) Disassembly, removal, repair, reinstallation, and re-assembly.
6. Guarantee, Bond, and Service Agreement: In accordance with Section 01 77 00.
B. Content for Each Electric or Electronic Item or System:
1. Description of Unit and Component Parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
1) Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests.
2) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
3) Interconnection wiring diagrams, including control and lighting systems.
2. Circuit Directories of Panelboards:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 78 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Operation and Maintenance Data
c. Communications.
3. List of electrical relay settings, and control and alarm contact settings.
4. Electrical interconnection wiring diagram, including control and lighting systems.
5. As-installed control diagrams by control Manufacturer.
6. Operating Procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Safety precautions.
d. Special operating instructions.
7. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine maintenance.
b. Guide to troubleshooting.
c. Adjustment and checking.
d. List of relay settings, control and alarm contact settings.
8. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions.
9. List of original Manufacturer’s spare parts, Manufacturer’s current prices, and
10. recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
C. Maintenance Summary:
1. Compile individual Maintenance Summary for each applicable equipment item, respective
unit or system, and for components or sub-units.
2. Format: Use only 8-1/2” x 11” size paper.
3. Include detailed lubrication instructions and diagrams showing points to be greased or
oiled; recommend type, grade, and temperature range of lubricants and frequency of
lubrication.
4. Recommended Spare Parts:
a. Data to be consistent with Manufacturer’s Bill of Materials/Parts List furnished in
b. O&M manuals.
c. “Unit” is the unit of measure for ordering the part.
d. “Quantity” is the number of units recommended.
IFB 7213 7 Section 01 78 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Operation and Maintenance Data
e. “Unit Cost” is the current purchase price.
1.07 DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Content for Architectural Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes:
1. Manufacturer’s data, giving full information on products:
a. Catalog number, size, and composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.
2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance:
a. Manufacturer’s recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
3. Content for Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products:
4. Manufacturer’s data, giving full information on products:
a. Applicable standards.
b. Chemical composition.
c. Details of installation.
5. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 8 Section 01 78 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Operation and Maintenance Data
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
SECTION 01 79 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of the required demonstration and training for
the project:
1. Providing and delivering informational submittals.
2. Submitting required qualifications of Manufacturer’ Representative.
3. Preparing, maintaining, providing and delivering Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance
and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
4. Furnishing required Training.
5. Furnishing required Equipment Testing, Unit Processes and Facility Performance
Demonstration.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 31 19 – Project Meetings.
2. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation.
3. Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data.
4. Section 01 75 60 – Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up.
5. Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Person-Day: One person for 8 hours within regular Contractor working hours.
B. Facility: Entire Project, or an agreed-upon portion including all unit processes.
C. Functional Test: Test or tests in presence of Engineer and Owner to demonstrate that
installed equipment meets Manufacturer’s installation, calibration, and adjustment
requirements and other requirements as specified.
D. Performance Test: Test or tests performed after any required functional test in presence of
Engineer and Owner to demonstrate and confirm individual equipment meets performance
requirements specified in individual sections.
E. Unit Process: As used in this Section, a unit process is a portion of the facility that performs a
specific process function, such as, but not limited to:
1. Flash Mixing.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
2. Flocculation/clarification.
3. Chemical metering and injection (all chemical systems)
4. Thickening
5. Pumping
6. Dewatering
F. Facility Performance Demonstration:
1. A demonstration, conducted by Contractor, with assistance of Owner, to demonstrate and
document the performance of the entire operating facility, manually and automatically (if
required), based on criteria developed in conjunction with Owner and as accepted by
Engineer.
2. Such demonstration is for the purposes of:
a. Verifying to Owner entire facility performs as a whole, and
b. Documenting performance characteristics of completed facility for Owner’s records.
Neither the demonstration nor the evaluation is intended in any way to make
performance of a unit process or entire facility the responsibility of Contractor, unless
such performance is otherwise specified.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Training Schedule: Submit not less than 21 days prior to start of equipment installation
and revise as necessary for acceptance.
2. Lesson Plan: Submit proposed lesson plan not less than 21 days prior to scheduled
training and revise as necessary for acceptance.
3. Training Session Tapes: Furnish Owner with two complete sets of tapes fully indexed and
cataloged with printed label stating session and date taped.
4. Facility Startup and Performance Demonstration Plan.
5. Functional and performance test results.
6. Completed Unit Process Startup Form for each unit process.
7. Completed Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form.
1.04 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Authorized representative of the Manufacturer, factory trained, and experienced in the
technical applications, installation, operation, and maintenance of respective equipment,
subsystem, or system, with full authority by the equipment Manufacturer to issue the
certifications required of the Manufacturer. Additional qualifications may be specified
elsewhere.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
B. Representative subject to acceptance by Owner and Engineer. No substitute representatives
will be allowed unless prior written approval by such has been given.
1.05 FACILITY STARTUP AND PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION PLAN
A. Develop a written plan, in conjunction with Owner’s operations personnel; to include the
following:
1. Step-by-step instructions for startup of each unit process and the complete facility.
2. Unit Process Startup Form (sample attached), to minimally include the following:
a. Description of the unit process, including equipment numbers/nomenclature of each
item of equipment and all included devices.
b. Detailed procedure for startup of the unit process, including valves to be
opened/closed, order of equipment startup, etc.
c. Startup requirements for each unit process, including water, power, chemicals, etc.
d. Space for evaluation comments.
3. Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form (sample attached), to minimally
include the following:
a. Description of unit processes included in the facility startup.
b. Sequence of unit process startup to achieve facility startup.
c. Description of computerized operations, if any, included in the facility.
d. Contractor certification facility is capable of performing its intended function(s),
including fully automatic operation.
e. Signature spaces for Contractor and Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish Manufacturers’ services when required by an individual specification section, to meet
the requirements of this Section.
B. Where time is necessary in excess of that stated in the Specifications for Manufacturers’
services, or when a minimum time is not specified, the time required to perform the specified
services shall be considered incidental.
C. Schedule Manufacturer’s services to avoid conflict with other onsite testing or other
D. Manufacturer’s onsite services.
E. Determine, before scheduling services, that all conditions necessary to allow successful
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
testing have been met.
F. Only those days of service approved by Engineer will be credited to fulfill the specified
minimum services.
G. When specified in individual specification sections, Manufacturer’s onsite services shall
include:
1. Assistance during product (system, subsystem, or component) installation to include
observation, guidance, instruction of Contractor’s assembly, erection, installation or
application procedures.
2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for product (system, subsystem, or
component) to function as warranted by Manufacturer and necessary to furnish
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
3. Providing, on a daily basis, copies of all Manufacturer’s representatives’ field notes and
data to Engineer.
4. Revisiting the Site as required to correct problems and until installation and operation are
acceptable to Engineer.
5. Resolution of assembly or installation problems attributable to or associated with,
6. respective Manufacturer’s products and systems.
7. Assistance during functional and performance testing, and facility startup and evaluation.
8. Training of Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of respective product as
required.
9. Additional requirements may be specified elsewhere.
H. Facility Startup Meetings: Schedule, in accordance with requirements of Section 01 31 19,
PROJECT MEETINGS, to discuss test schedule, test methods, materials, chemicals and
liquids required, facilities operations interface, and Owner involvement.
I. Contractor’s Testing and Startup Representative:
1. Designate and furnish one or more personnel to coordinate and expedite testing and
facility startup.
2. Representative(s) shall be present during startup meetings and shall be available at all
times during testing and startup.
J. Provide temporary valves, gauges, piping, test equipment and other materials and equipment
required for testing and startup.
K. Provide Subcontractor and equipment Manufacturer’s with adequate staff to prevent delays.
Schedule ongoing work so as not to interfere with or delay testing and startup.
L. Owner will:
1. Provide water, power, chemicals, and other items as required for startup, unless
otherwise indicated.
IFB 7213 5 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
2. Operate process units and facility with support of Contractor.
3. Provide labor and materials as required for laboratory analyses.
3.02 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
A. When specified in individual Specification section, submit prior to shipment of product or
material.
B. Engineer may permit use of certain materials or assemblies prior to sampling and testing if
accompanied by accepted certification of compliance.
C. Signed by product Manufacturer certifying that product or material specified conforms to or
exceeds specified. Attach supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as
appropriate.
D. May reflect recent or previous test results on material or product, if acceptable to Engineer.
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
A. When so specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation form, a copy of which is
attached to this Section, shall be completed and signed by the equipment Manufacturer’s
representative.
B. Such form shall certify that the signing party is a duly authorized representative of the
Manufacturer, is empowered by the Manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate their
equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the
equipment is complete and operational.
3.04 TRAINING
A. General:
1. Furnish Manufacturer’s representatives for detailed classroom and hands-on training to
Owner’s personnel on operation and maintenance of specified product (system,
subsystem, component) and as may be required in applicable Specifications.
2. Furnish trained, articulate personnel to coordinate and expedite training, to be present
during training coordination meetings with Owner, and familiar with operation and
maintenance manual information specified in Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
3. Manufacturer’s representative shall be familiar with facility operation and maintenance
requirements as well as with specified equipment.
4. Furnish complete training materials, to include operation and maintenance data, to be
retained by each trainee.
B. Training Schedule:
1. List specified equipment and systems that require training services and show:
a. Respective Manufacturer.
b. Estimated dates for installation completion.
IFB 7213 6 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
c. Estimated training dates.
2. Allow for multiple sessions when several shifts are involved.
3. Adjust schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel as deemed necessary by
Owner, and to allow full participation by Manufacturer’s representatives. Adjust schedule
for interruptions in operability of equipment.
4. Coordinate with Section 01 32 00, CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
and Section 01 75 60, TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP.
C. Lesson Plan: When Manufacturer or vendor training of Owner personnel is specified, prepare
for each required course, containing the following minimum information:
1. Title and objectives.
2. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers, operators, maintenance).
3. Course description and outline of course content.
4. Format (e.g., lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on).
5. Instruction materials and equipment requirements.
6. Resumes of instructors providing the training.
D. Pre-startup Training:
1. Coordinate training sessions with Owner’s operating personnel and Manufacturer’s
representatives, and with submission of operation and maintenance manuals in
accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
2. Complete at least 14 days prior to beginning of facility startup.
E. Post-startup Training: If required in Specifications furnish and coordinate training of Owner’s
operating personnel by respective Manufacturer’s representatives.
F. Taping of Training Sessions:
1. Furnish audio and color video taping of all instruction sessions, including Manufacturer’s
2. representatives, hands-on equipment instruction and classroom sessions.
3. Video training tapes shall be produced by a qualified, professional video specialist
approved by Owner.
4. Use DVD format, suitable for playback on standard equipment available commercially in
the United States.
3.05 EQUIPMENT TESTING
A. Preparation:
1. Complete installation before testing.
IFB 7213 7 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
2. Furnish qualified Manufacturer’s representatives, when required by individual
3. Specification sections.
4. Obtain and submit from equipment Manufacturer’s representative Manufacturer’s
Certificate of Proper Installation Form, in accordance with Section 01 75 60, TESTING,
TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP, when required by individual Specification
sections.
5. Equipment Test Report Form: Provide written test report for each item of equipment to be
tested, to include the minimum information:
a. Owner/Project Name.
b. Equipment or item tested.
c. Date and time of test.
d. Type of test performed (Functional or Performance).
e. Test method.
f. Test conditions.
g. Test results.
h. Signature spaces for Contractor and Engineer as witness.
6. Cleaning and Checking: Prior to beginning functional testing:
a. Calibrate testing equipment in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Inspect and clean equipment, devices, connected piping, and structures to ensure
they are free of foreign material.
c. Lubricate equipment in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.
d. Turn rotating equipment by hand when possible to confirm that equipment is not
bound.
e. Open and close valves by hand and operate other devices to check for binding,
interference, or improper functioning.
f. Check power supply to electric-powered equipment for correct voltage.
g. Adjust clearances and torque.
h. Test piping for leaks.
7. Ready-to-test determination will be by Engineer-based at least on the following:
a. Acceptable Operation and Maintenance Data.
b. Notification by Contractor of equipment readiness for testing.
IFB 7213 8 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
c. Receipt of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, if so specified.
d. Adequate completion of work adjacent to, or interfacing with, equipment to be tested.
e. Availability and acceptability of Manufacturer’s representative, when specified, to
f. assist in testing of respective equipment.
g. Satisfactory fulfillment of other specified Manufacturer’s responsibilities.
h. Equipment and electrical tagging complete.
i. Delivery of all spare parts and special tools.
B. Functional Testing:
1. Conduct as specified in individual Specification sections.
2. Notify Owner and Engineer in writing at least 10 days prior to scheduled date of testing.
3. Prepare Equipment Test Report summarizing test method and results.
4. When in Engineer’s opinion, equipment meets functional requirements specified such
equipment will be accepted for purposes of advancing to performance testing phase, if so
required by individual Specification sections. Such acceptance will be evidenced by
Engineer/Owner’s signature as witness on Equipment Test Report.
C. Performance Testing:
1. Conduct as specified in individual Specification sections.
2. Notify Engineer and Owner in writing at least 10 days prior to scheduled date of test.
3. Performance testing shall not commence until equipment has been accepted by Engineer
as having satisfied functional test requirements specified.
4. Type of fluid, gas, or solid for testing shall be as specified.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, furnish labor, materials, and supplies for conducting the test
and taking samples and performance measurements.
6. Prepare Equipment Test Report summarizing test method and results.
7. When, in Engineer’s opinion, equipment meets performance requirements specified, such
equipment will be accepted as to conforming to Contract requirements. Such acceptance
will be evidenced by Engineer’s signature on Equipment Test Report.
3.06 STARTUP OF UNIT PROCESSES
A. Prior to unit process startup, equipment within unit process shall be accepted by Engineer as
having met functional and performance testing requirements specified.
B. Startup sequencing of unit processes shall be as chosen by Contractor to meet schedule
requirements.
IFB 7213 9 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
C. Make adjustments, repairs, and corrections necessary to complete unit process startup.
D. Startup shall be considered complete when, in opinion of Engineer, unit process as operated
in manner intended for 5 continuous days without significant interruption. This period is in
addition to functional or performance test periods specified elsewhere.
E. Significant Interruption: May include any of the following events:
1. Failure of Contractor to provide and maintain qualified onsite startup personnel as
scheduled.
2. Failure to meet specified functional operation for more than 2 consecutive hours.
3. Failure of any critical equipment or unit process that is not satisfactorily corrected within 5
hours after failure.
4. Failure of any non-critical equipment or unit process that is not satisfactorily corrected
within 8 hours after failure.
5. As determined by Engineer.
F. A significant interruption will require startup then in progress to be stopped. After corrections
are made; start up test period and start from beginning again.
3.07 FACILITY PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION
A. When, in the opinion of Engineer, startup of all unit processes has been achieved, sequence
each unit process to the point that facility is operational.
B. Demonstrate proper operation of required interfaces within and between individual unit
processes.
C. After facility is operating, complete performance testing of equipment and systems not
previously tested.
D. Document, as defined in Facility Startup and Performance Demonstration Plan, the
performance of the facility.
E. Certify, on the Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form, that facility is capable
of performing its intended function(s), including fully automatic operation.
3.08 SUPPLEMENTS
A. Supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this Specification:
1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation Form.
2. Unit Process Startup Form.
3. Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 10 Section 01 79 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Demonstration and Training
MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
OWNER: EQUIP. SERIAL NO:
EQUIP. TAG NO: EQUIP. SYSTEM:
PROJECT NO: SPEC. SECTION:
I hereby certify that the above referenced equipment/system has
been: (Check Applicable)
Note: Attach any performance test documentation from
manufacturer. Comments:
I, the undersigned Manufacturer’s Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized
representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and
operate its equipment, and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the
equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as may be otherwise
indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate.
Date: , 20 .
Manufacturer:
By Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative:
(Authorized Signature)
Installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
Inspected, checked, and adjusted.
Serviced with proper initial lubricants.
Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards.
All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed.
Functional tests.
System has been performance tested, and meets or exceeds specified performance requirements.
(When complete system of one manufacturer)
IFB 7213 11 Section 01 14 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Work Restrictions
UNIT PROCESS STARTUP FORM
OWNER: PROJECT:
Unit Process Description: (Include description and equipment number of all equipment and devices):
Startup Procedure: (Describe procedure for sequential startup and evaluation, including valves to be
opened/closed, order of equipment startup, etc.):
Startup Requirements (Water, power, chemicals, etc.):
Evaluation Comments:
IFB 7213 12 Section 01 14 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Work Restrictions
FACILITY PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION/CERTIFICATION FORM
OWNER: PROJECT:
Unit Process Description: (List unit processes involved in facility startup):
Unit Processes Startup Sequence: (Describe sequence for startup, including computerized
operations if any):
Contractor Certification that Facility is capable of performing its intended function(s),
including fully automatic operation:
Contractor: Date: , 20
Engineer: Date: , 20
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 80 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Post Final Inspection
SECTION 01 80 00
POST FINAL INSPECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes description and requirements of the required Post Final Inspection for the
project.
B. Approximately 30 days after final acceptance, ENGINEER will make arrangements with
OWNER and CONTRACTOR for a post final inspection and will send a written notice to said
parties informing them of the date and time of the inspection.
C. After the inspection, ENGINEER will inform CONTRACTOR of any corrections required prior
to release of the balance of payment due.
D. When the corrections have been satisfactorily completed, ENGINEER will forward to OWNER
a certificate for final payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 80 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Post Final Inspection
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 80 01
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Commissioning
SECTION 01 80 01
COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Responsibilities of the OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR during
the Commissioning Phase of the Project.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 75 60 – Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Commissioning: The sequential process in which a newly constructed facility, comprised of
concrete basins interconnected with hydraulic conveyance structures and equipped with
miscellaneous process oriented equipment, is put into successful operation.
B. Automatic/SCADA Operational Mode: The definition of the automatic/SCADA operational
mode centers around the designed remote control and monitoring capability of the control
system.
C. Facility Start-Up.
D. Manual Operational Mode: This operational mode represents the lowest level of control
philosophy utilized in the plant instrumentation and control design. For all practical purposes,
this means that an operational control decision requiring equipment or process monitoring
and/or control will require an individual to physically go to the local control for the associated
task in order to operate the facility. Normal prestart-up activities of exercising of the
equipment is traditionally accomplished in this mode. In the manual operational mode, the
focus will be on verifying that the equipment and processes function correctly, independent of
the instrumentation system and control system.
E. Successful Operation: The resultant operation of all the processes and related controls in a
manner that is consistent with the design intent and treatment objectives.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Preventive and Unscheduled Maintenance Plan: Submit detailed plan prior to start of 7-day
test for providing all preventive and unscheduled maintenance of all equipment and facilities
in the plant throughout the entire commissioning phase of the project prior to start of 7-day
test.
B. OWNER’s Personnel Training Schedule and Plan: Submit detailed plan and schedule for
training OWNER's personnel in accordance with Section 01 75 60, Testing, Training and
Facility Start-Up.
1.04 REQUIREMENTS
A. Commissioning Process will commence after successful completion of 14-day test and
issuance of Substantial Completion to CONTRACTOR.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 80 01
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Commissioning
B. Commissioning Process will be 30 days in duration.
C. During the course of the Commissioning Process, the ENGINEER and OWNER will evaluate
design related issues and recommend design modifications which shall be implemented by
the CONTRACTOR through the Change Order process.
1.05 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Responsibilities listed do not relieve the CONTRACTOR from all other responsibilities and
duties associated with project closeout as defined in the OWNER's agreement with the
CONTRACTOR and DIVISION 01 of the Specifications.
1. CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities During the Commissioning Process:
a. All Change Order work resulting from the evaluation of design-related issues by the
ENGINEER and OWNER.
2. All preventive and unscheduled maintenance of all equipment and facilities in the plant.
This shall include, but not be limited to the following:
a. Providing all lubricants.
b. Lubrication of all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
c. Perform all manufacturer recommended preventive maintenance.
d. Exercise all equipment not in use during Commissioning phase.
e. Repair all failed equipment.
f. Periodic check of all equipment alignment, vibration, and noise levels in accordance
with Specifications.
g. Provide all parts required for equipment repair.
h. Provide all tools and miscellaneous equipment required for equipment repair.
i. Administration/logging/documentation of all preventive maintenance and repair work.
j. Cleanup associated with equipment failure and repair.
k. Daily cleanup of buildings.
l. Landscaping maintenance.
m. Roadway cleanup and maintenance.
n. Replacement of all HVAC filters.
3. Warranty related issues/items.
4. OWNER's personnel training required after successful completion of the 7-day testing.
5. Assist in transition to Automatic/SCADA operational mode.
IFB 7213 3 Section 01 80 01
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Commissioning
6. Other contractual requirements including, but not limited to, incomplete work list.
B. OWNER's Responsibilities During the Commissioning Process:
1. Provide all chemicals required for plant operations, including scheduling and securing of
chemical deliveries to the plant and respective storage tanks.
2. Perform all laboratory analysis required for plant operations.
3. Review training schedules and plans, and schedule personnel training.
4. Assisting ENGINEER in the evaluation of design related issues and recommendations of
modifications to be implemented by the CONTRACTOR through the change order
process.
5. Provide staff for Commissioning.
6. Operation of facilities.
C. ENGINEER's Responsibilities During Commissioning Process:
1. Provide OWNER with programming support during the Commissioning Process.
2. Provide liaison and coordination between CONTRACTOR and OWNER's activities.
3. Administer Change Order work performed by CONTRACTOR.
4. Provide coordination of all other project closeout related issues/items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 4 Section 01 80 01
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Commissioning
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 81 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Design Criteria
SECTION 01 81 00
PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Project design criteria such as temperature and site elevation.
1.02 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All equipment and materials for the project are to be suitable for performance in the water
treatment plant environment and under following conditions:
1. Design temperatures are:
a. Outdoor temperatures: -10 to 115 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Indoor temperatures for the following buildings:
1) Process areas: 40 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit.
2) Electrical rooms: 40 to 85 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. FEMA Zone X: Area of minimal Flood Impact.
3. Frost line is assumed 30 inches below grade.
4. Moisture conditions: Defined in individual equipment sections.
5. Site elevation: Generally ranges from 625 to 642 feet above mean sea level.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 81 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Project Design Criteria
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 01 81 02
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Seismic Design Criteria
SECTION 01 81 02
SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Seismic design criteria for the following:
1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Seismic design and design of anchorage for small tanks fabricated off site and shipped to
the Project site.
3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Design in accordance with the requirements of the building code as specified in Section
01 41 00:
a. Soil Site Class: D
b. Design spectral acceleration at short period, SDS: 0.129g.
c. Design spectral acceleration at short period, SD1: 0.092g.
d. Seismic Design Category: B
e. Importance Factor, I: 1.25
f. Component amplification factor, ap: In accordance with ASCE 7-10, Tables 13.5 1
and 13.6-1.
g. Component response modification factor, Rp: In accordance with ASCE 7-10, Tables
13.5-1 and 13.6-1.
h. Component importance factor, Ip: 1.50.
2. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces.
IFB 7213 2 Section 01 81 02
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Seismic Design Criteria
3. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the mechanical and electrical
equipment for designing anchors for resisting overturning due to seismic forces.
4. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the tank for resisting overturning due to
seismic forces.
5. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting seismic forces. Anchor
bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a standard hex bolt head embedded in the
concrete. Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or J shape.
6. Do not use chemical anchors, concrete anchors, flush shells, powder actuated fasteners,
sleeve anchors, or other types of anchors unless indicated on the Drawings or accepted
in writing by the ENGINEER.
7. Seismic forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to resist seismic
forces. Do not use connections that use friction to resist seismic forces.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and seismic calculations.
B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed in the
state where the Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 26 00 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement General Provisions
SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to install, test and provide an operational,
electrical system as specified and as shown on the Drawings.
B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted and furnished as an integral part of
equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the
requirements of Division 26.
D. The work shall include furnishing, installing and testing the equipment and materials detailed
in each Section of Division 26.
E. The work shall include furnishing and installing the following:
1. Removal of the two existing Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs).
2. Installation of two new VFDs to replace the existing ones. The new VFDs will be installed
in the same location as the existing drives. Therefore, the new VFDs will have to match
the size of the existing drives as well as the incoming and outgoing penetrations.
3. The VFD manufacturer shall provide equipment that provides the same functions as the
existing VFDs including existing interfacing with HVAC, instruments and valves.
4. Reconnect the new VFDs to the existing control, communications and SCADA system.
The input/output shall have the same terminal numbers as shown on the drawings.
5. Coordinate construction schedule and electrical interface with the supplier of electrical
equipment specified under other Divisions as required by the Contract Documents.
6. Only one VFD can be removed at a time.
7. Coordinate the sequence of demolition to maintain plant operation. Remove and
demolish equipment and materials in such a sequence that the existing plant will function
properly with no disruption of pumping.
8. Make modifications to existing motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards and
motor controllers including installation of circuit breakers, etc., or disconnection of circuits
as required to provide the power supplies to new and existing equipment to maintain the
plant in operation.
9. All bidders shall visit the site of the project, prior to submitting a bid, and satisfy
themselves as to any question that they might have, relating to existing equipment,
condition or construction.
F. Provide all electrical relocation work associated with the relocation of equipment for the
existing and new facilities, including disconnecting all existing wiring and conduits and
providing new wiring and conduit to the relocated equipment as specified in Section 26 41 19.
G. Provide all tools, equipment, supplies, and shall perform all labor required to install the
equipment specified in the Contract Documents to install, test, and place into satisfactory
operation in the time specified for completion in the Contract Documents. Failure of any of
the participants in executing the requirements of this Contract to perform the work as
specified shall not constitute an acceptable reason for the Owner to grant any change in the
Contract Price or additions to the Contract Time.
IFB 7213 2 Section 26 00 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement General Provisions
H. The work includes demolition of existing electrical equipment, associated conductors and
raceway.
1.02 ELECTRICAL WORK REQUIRED IN OTHER DIVISIONS
A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other
section. The Contract Documents, which is defined to include both the Drawings and the
Specifications, shall be taken with every section related to every other section as required to
meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into
specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does
not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in
the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other
Divisions of the Specifications, provide such information or additional work as may be
required in those references, and include such information or work as may be specified.
Examine all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and determine the power and wiring
requirements and provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully
functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more
conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, provide the additional
conductors, raceways and/or wiring, and include in the Contract Price and Schedule.
B. Electric Valve Operator Divisions
1.All valve operators are existing and shall be reconnected to the new VFDs to provide the
existing functionality
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings, in accordance with Division 1 requirements, for equipment, materials
and all other items furnished under each Section of Division 26, except where specifically
stated otherwise. An individually packaged submittal shall be made for each Section and
shall contain all the information required by the Section. Partial submittals will not be
accepted and will be returned without review.
B. Submittals will not be accepted for Section 26 00 00.
C. Each Section submittal shall be complete, contain all the items listed in the Specification
Section, and shall be clearly marked to indicate which items are applicable on each cut sheet
page. The Submittal shall list any exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings, and the
reason for such deviation. Shop drawings, not so checked and noted, will be returned
without review.
D. Check shop drawings for accuracy and contract requirements prior to submittal to the
Owner/Engineer. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not provide relief
from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications
and Drawings. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement
indicating that the shop drawings conform to Specifications and Drawings. Only one
Specification Section may be made per transmittal.
E. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No
material shall be ordered, or shop work started if the related shop drawings are marked
"APPROVED AS NOTED CONFIRM", "APPROVED AS NOTED RESUBMIT", “REVISE
AND RESUBMIT”, “REJECTED”, or "NOT APPROVED".
F. All approved shop drawings shall be maintained on site for the Owner’s Inspector and for the
Owner’s Engineer to verify at the time of delivery of equipment to the job site.
G. Up-to-date Record Drawings shall be promptly furnished when the equipment installation is
complete. Payment will be withheld until Record Drawings have been furnished and
approved.
H. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in hard copy format
and in electronic format using PDF files including a Table of Contents which is indexed on
IFB 7213 3 Section 26 00 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement General Provisions
DVDs. Electronic submittals are mandatory and those which are received not indexed as
specified will be returned without review. Hard copy submittals may not be required if so
stipulated in the Contract Documents. No change in Contract Amount or Contract Time will
be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals.
1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Electric equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards:
1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
7. International Society of Automation (ISA)
8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
9. Factory Mutual (FM)
10. City of Denton Electrical Code
B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of
bid opening shall apply.
C. All material and equipment, for which a UL standard exists, shall bear a UL label. No such
material or equipment shall be brought onsite without the UL label affixed.
D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the
Contract Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society,
organization or association, the provisions of the Contract Documents will take precedence if
they are more stringent. If there is any conflict or discrepancy between standard
specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or between
Laws and Regulations, the higher performance requirement shall be binding, unless
otherwise directed by the Owner/Engineer.
E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, compliance with the priority order
specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an extension in Contract Time nor
limit in any way, full compliance with all Laws and Regulations at all times,
1.05 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES
A. Equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority
having jurisdiction.
B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections.
1.06 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT
A. Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final
location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to permit safe handling and
passage through restricted areas in the structure.
B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times during storage and handling. When
equipment must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to ensure
that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment.
1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS
IFB 7213 4 Section 26 00 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement General Provisions
A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of Project Contract
Drawings, hereinafter called the "Record Drawings". The Record Drawings and Specifications
shall be kept up to date throughout the project.
B. The Record Drawings shall be reviewed in a meeting with the Owner/Engineer monthly.
C. Record Drawings shall accurately show the installed condition of the following items:
1. One-line Diagram(s).
2. Raceways and pull boxes.
3. Conductor sizes and conduit fills.
4. Control Wiring Diagram(s).
5. Planview, measured dimensions and locations of switchgear, distribution transformers,
substations, motor control centers and panelboards.
6. Modifications to controls systems or any piece of electrical equipment including field-
verified existing controls and all changes clearly identified.
7. All protective device and electrical system monitoring device settings.
D. Submit a typical example of a schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers,
including the following information:
1. Circuit origin, destination and wire numbers.
2. Field wiring terminal strip names and numbers.
E. As an alternate, submit a typical example of point-to-point connection diagrams showing the
same information, may be submitted in place of the schedule of control wiring raceways and
wire numbers.
F. Submit the record drawings and the schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers
(or the point-to-point connection diagram) to the Owner/Engineer.
G. Retainage will not be paid until the point-to-point connection diagrams have been furnished to
the Owner/Engineer.
1.08 EQUIPMENT INTERCONNECTIONS
A. Review shop drawings of equipment furnished under other related Divisions and prepare
coordinated wiring interconnection diagrams or wiring tables. Submit copies of wiring
diagrams or tables with Record Drawings.
B. Furnish and install all equipment interconnections.
1.09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be new, except where specifically identified on the Drawings to
be re-used.
B. Material or equipment from a manufacturer, not submitted and approved for this project shall
not be brought on site. Use of any such material or equipment, will be rejected, and shall be
removed and replaced, with the approved material and equipment, with no change allowed in
the Contract Price or Schedule.
C. Material and equipment shall be UL listed, where such listing exists.
D. All material, products, equipment and workmanship being furnished for the the project shall
be replaced if it does not meet the requirements of Contract Documents even if installed, with
no change in Contract Price or Schedule.
1.10 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
IFB 7213 5 Section 26 00 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement General Provisions
A. Prior to jobsite delivery, successfully complete all submittal requirements, and present to the
Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals.
Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests,
will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced with no change in Contract Price or
Schedule.
B. Equipment and materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions, and as specified in the individual Specification Sections.
1.11 WARRANTIES
A. Manufacturer’s warranties shall be provided as specified in each of the Specification
Sections.
1.12 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all equipment (disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, control
stations, etc.) furnished under Division 26 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor
control centers, control panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, junction or terminal
boxes, transfer switches, etc., shall have nameplate designations as shown on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. The Drawings do not show exact locations of conduit runs. Coordinate the conduit installation
with other trades and the actual supplied equipment.
B. Install each three-phase circuit in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
C. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner/Engineer, conduit shown exposed shall be installed
exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed. Submit a Request for
Information for any conduit route which is not clearly identified as concealed or exposed in
the Contract Documents prior to its installation.
D. Circuits are shown as "home-runs" shall be field routed. The raceway system provided shall
include all necessary fittings, supports and boxes for a complete code-compliant raceway
installation. Field routed raceway shall avoid blocking access to equipment either existing or
spaces planned for future equipment and shall avoid blocking personnel egress through
doors or access hatches.
E. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles
prior to installation.
F. Except where dimensions are shown, the locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets and similar
devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Determine exact locations and obtain
approval from the Owner/Engineer during construction. Obtain information relevant to the
placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed
by the Owner/Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in
an approved manner.
G. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details.
Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all
power, lighting and other electrical systems shown.
H. Redesign of electrical or mechanical work, which is required due to the use of a pre-approved
alternate item shall include the arrangement of equipment and/or layout other than that which
is specified or shown herein. All additional work and materials required shall be provided with
no change in the contract price or schedule. Redesign and detailed plans shall be submitted
to the Owner/Engineer for approval.
IFB 7213 6 Section 26 00 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement General Provisions
I. Raceways and conductors for lighting, switches, receptacles and other miscellaneous low
voltage power and signal systems as specified are not shown on the Drawings. Raceways
and conductors shall be provided as required for a complete and operating system. Refer to
riser diagrams for signal system wiring. Homeruns, as shown on the Drawings, identify
raceways to be run exposed and raceways to be run concealed. Raceways installed
exposed shall be near the ceiling or along walls of the areas through which they pass and
shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts, cranes hoists, monorails, equipment
hatches, doors, windows, etc. Raceways installed concealed shall be run in the center of
concrete floor slabs, above suspended ceilings, or in partitions as required.
J. Provide all conduit and conductors or data highway cables to RTU and/or PLC termination
cabinets, where designated on the Drawings or otherwise required by the Specifications, the
manufacture of the equipment, or submitted and approved systems. The conduit and
conductors or data highway cables as shown on the interface drawings may not necessarily
be shown on the floor plan.
K. Install conductors carrying low voltage signals (typically twisted shielded pair cables) in
raceways totally separate from all other raceways containing power or 120-Volt control
conductors. Do not combine conductors carrying low voltage signals in wireways without
barriers or NEC code-compliant separation for their entire length in the wire way, and/or
provide separate wireways to provide separation of the conductors. Low voltage signal
conductors routed through manholes or hand holes shall be bundled and separated from
other conductors.
L. Relocate conduits and wires that may be in the way of installing the proposed equipment.
3.02 EQUIPMENT PADS AND SUPPORTS
A. Electrical equipment pads and supports, of concrete or steel including structural reinforcing
and lighting pole foundations, are shown on the Structural Drawings.
B. Electrical equipment or raceways, shall not be attached to or supported from, sheet metal
walls.
C. Electrical equipment pads shall be provided for all free-standing equipment. Dimensions shall
be 3-inches high. With 3-inch extension from front of equipment for equipment mounted
against the wall and 3-inch extension on front and rear sections when equipment is rear
accessible.
3.03 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS
A. Provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate all
necessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured.
B. Unless measurements are shown on the drawings, the locations for stubbing up and
terminating concealed conduits which are shown on the drawings are approximate. Exact
locations are required for stubbing-up and terminating concealed conduit. Obtain shop
drawings and templates from equipment vendors or other subcontractors and locate the
concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured.
C. Where setting drawings are not available in time to avoid delay in scheduled floor slab pours,
the Owner/Engineer may allow the installations of such conduit to be exposed. Requests for
this deviation must be submitted in writing. No change in Contract Price or Schedule for such
change will be allowed.
D. Seal all openings, sleeves, penetration and slots as specified in Section 26 05 33.
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Core drill holes in concrete floors and walls as required. Obtain written permission from the
Owner/Engineer before core drilling any holes larger than two inches.
B. Schedule the installation of work to provide the minimum amount of cutting and patching.
IFB 7213 7 Section 26 00 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement General Provisions
C. Cutting or drilling holes for the installation of raceway through joists, beams, girders, columns
or any other structural members is strictly prohibited. If a structural member is cut or drilled,
restore the structural member to its previous condition in complete accordance with the
instructions of the Structural Engineer, with no change in contract price or schedule
regardless of the extent of the repairs required to restore the member to its previous
condition.
D. Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the conduit.
E. Patching shall be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed.
F. The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better.
G. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely
waterproofed.
H. Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises.
I. Existing conduits are cut at the floor line of wall line, they shall be filled with grout of suitable
patching material approved by the Structural Engineer.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Any work not installed according to the Drawings and this Section shall be subject to change
as directed by the Owner/Engineer. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed
for making these changes.
B. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other
trades.
C. Electrical equipment shall always be protected against mechanical or water damage.
Electrical equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry
permanent shelters as required by each Specification Section. Do not install electrical
equipment in its permanent location until structures are weather-tight. If any apparatus has
been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and tested as
directed by the Owner/Engineer or shall be replaced with no change in Contract Price or
Schedule, at the Owner/Engineer's discretion.
D. Equipment that has been damaged shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment
manufacturer, at the Owner/Engineer's discretion.
E. Repaint any damage to the factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the
equipment manufacturer. If the metallic portion of the panel or section is damaged, the entire
panel or section shall be replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. NEMA 3R, 4 or 4X enclosures shall not have raceways entering from the top if the enclosure
is installed in a damp or wet area. Should raceways be installed entering the top, the
enclosure shall be replaced and raceways re-routed to enter the side or bottom. Conductors,
if installed, shall be removed and replaced. Correction of raceways entering the top and
conductor replacement shall be provided with no change in Contract Price or Schedule.
G. Conduits exiting tray in airconditioned indoor electrical rooms will enter the top of electrical
enclosures. The location of these conduits shall be coordinated with the HVAC duct vents
such that cold air will not blow on the conduits causing condensation which will enter the
electrical enclosures. After installation, inspect the conduits while the HVAC system is
running to insure no condensation is forming and entering any electrical enclosure. Re-direct
the air flow if possible or re-route the conduits to avoid condensation. Conductors in re-
routed conduits shall be replaced, re-terminated. retested and the operation of the equipment
retested with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule.
3.06 PHASE BALANCING
IFB 7213 8 Section 26 00 00
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement General Provisions
A. The Drawings do not attempt to balance the electrical loads across the phases. Circuits on
motor control centers and panelboards shall be field connected to result in evenly balanced
loads across all phases.
B. Field balancing of circuits shall not alter the conductor color coding requirements as specified
in Section 26 05 19.
3.07 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICE
A. Provide manufacturer's services for testing and start-up of the equipment as listed in each
individual Specification Section. All settings, including those settings and arc flash labels
required by the Power System Study, shall be made to the equipment and approved by the
Owner/Engineer prior to energizing of the equipment.
B. Testing and startup shall not be combined with training. Testing and start-up time shall not be
used for manufacturer’s warranty repairs.
3.08 TESTS AND SETTINGS
A. Test systems and equipment furnished under Division 26 and repair or replace all defective
work. Make adjustments to the systems as specified and/or required.
B. All tests required by the individual specification Sections shall be completed prior to
energizing electrical equipment. Submit a sample test form or procedure. and submit the
required test reports and data to the Owner/Engineer for approval at least two weeks prior to
the startup of the tested equipment. Include names of all test personnel and initial each test.
C. Check motor nameplates for correct phase and voltage. Check bearings for proper
lubrication.
D. Check wire and cable terminations for tightness.
E. Check rotation of motors prior to energization. Disconnect driven equipment if damage could
occur due to wrong rotation. If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the rotation shall be
immediately corrected, or tagged and locked out until rotation is corrected.
F. Verify all terminations at transformers, equipment, capacitor connections, panels, and
enclosures by producing a 1 2 3 rotation on a phase sequenced motor when connected to
"A", "B" and "C" phases.
G. Provide mechanical inspection, testing and setting of circuit breakers, disconnect switches,
motor starters, control equipment, etc. for proper operation.
H. Check interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each system and/or part of a system to
prove that the system will function properly as indicated by schematic and wiring diagrams.
I. Check the ampere rating of thermal overloads for motors and submit a typed record to the
Owner/Engineer of same, including MCC cubicle location and load designation, motor service
factor, horsepower, full load current and starting code letter. If inconsistencies are found, new
thermal elements shall be supplied and installed.
J. Verify motor power factor capacitor ratings.
K. Testing shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at least two weeks in
advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment.
L. Refer to the individual equipment sections for additional specific testing requirements.
M. Make adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation
of the systems.
3.09 TRAINING
A. Provide manufacturer’s training as specified in each individual section of the Specifications.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish, install and test all wire, cable and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical
coordination requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit catalog data of all wire and cable, connectors and accessories, specified under
this Section with all selections, options and exceptions clearly indicated. All cut sheets
shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this
project. Unmarked cut sheets will be cause to reject the submittal and return it for
revision.
B. Certified Tests
1. Submit a test report of all installed wire insulation tests.
1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest
revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted):
1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. NEMA WC-5 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy
3. ANSI/TIA/EIA 606A – Standard for telecommunications Infrastructure
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The general construction of the wire, cables and the insulation material used shall be similar
to that used for cable of the same size and rating in continuous production for at least 15
years and successfully operating in the field in substantial quantities.
B. Wire and cable with a manufacture date of greater than 12 months previous will not be
acceptable.
C. Wire and cable shall be in new condition, with the manufacturer’s packaging intact, stored
indoors since manufacture, and shall not have been subjected to the weather. Date of
manufacture shall be clearly visible on each reel.
IFB 7213 2 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
D. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials for a
minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of
installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this
requirement.
1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the
Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals.
Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests,
will not be permitted.,
B. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken flanges,
damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Do not drop reels from any height.
C. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows shown
on the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the wire and cable.
D. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or
tarpaulin. Do not lay reels flat.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer’s warrantee, for the equipment specified and
the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for three
years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period
of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating
condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the
equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Wires and cables shall be annealed, 98% conductivity, soft drawn copper.
B. All conductors shall be Class B stranded.
C. Except for control, signal and instrumentation circuits, wire smaller than #12 AWG shall not
be used.
2.02 POWER & BUILDING WIRE
A. All building wire shall be stranded copper conductors, Type XHHW-2
B. Manufacturers
1. Southwire
2. General Cable
3. Okonite
4. RSCC Wire & Cable
IFB 7213 3 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
5. Encore Wire
6. Approved equal
2.03 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE CABLE
A. Cable for use with VFDs shall be symmetrical design, three stranded Class D, tinned copper,
circuit conductors with XLPE insulation, three bare copper grounds, 100% shields with 50%
overlap, and overall PVC jacket. Cable shall be 2000 volt, UL 1277 Type TC, XHHW-2 rated,
90°C., IEEE 1202/383.
B. Manufacturers
1. Belden
2. General Cable
3. Southwire
4. Okonite
5. RSCC Wire & Cable
6. Encore Wire
7. Approved equal
2.04 TRAY CABLE
A. Cable for tray use shall be stranded copper conductors, Type XHHW-2 insulation, rated as
UL Type TC cable. Cable shall be sunlight resistant and approved for direct burial.
B. Manufacturers
1. Southwire
2. General Cable
3. Okonite
4. RSCC Wire & Cable
5. Encore Wire
6. Approved equal
2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR
A. Grounding electrode conductor shall be stranded copper conductor, Type XHHW-2 with
green insulation.
B. Manufacturers
1. Southwire
IFB 7213 4 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
2. General Cable
3. Okonite
4. RSCC Wire & Cable
5. Encore Wire
6. Approved equal
2.06 BONDING JUMPER
A. Bonding Jumper shall be bare tinned stranded copper conductor.
B. Manufacturers
1. Southwire
2. General Cable
3. Okonite
4. RSCC Wire & Cable
5. Encore Wire
6. Approved equal
2.07 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE
A. Control wire shall be NEC Type XHHW-2.
B. Multi-conductor control cable, shall be stranded, #14 AWG 600-volt, XHHW-2, insulated, PVC
outer jacket overall, Type TC, UL rated for underground wet location.
C. Manufacturers
1. Southwire
2. Okonite
3. General Cable
4. RSCC Wire & Cable
5. Encore Wire
6. Approved equal
2.08 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
A. Cables for 4-20 ma, RTD, potentiometer and similar signals shall be PLTC rated and shall be:
1. Single pair cable:
IFB 7213 5 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
a. Conductors: Two #16 AWG stranded, tinned and twisted on two-inch lay
b. Insulation: PVC with 600-volt, 90°C rating
c. Shield: 100% Mylar tape with drain wire
d. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer’s identification
e. UL1685 listed for underground wet location use
f. Manufacturers
1) Okonite
2) Belden
3) Approved equal
2. Three conductor (triad) cable:
a. Conductors: Three #16 AWG stranded, tinned and twisted on two-inch lay
b. Insulation: PVC with 600-volt, 90°C rating
c. Shield: 100% Mylar tape with drain wire
d. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer’s identification
e. UL1685 listed for underground wet location use
f. Manufacturers:
1) Okonite
2) Belden
3) Approved equal
3. Multiple pair cables (where shown on the Drawings):
a. Conductor: Multiple pairs, #16 AWG stranded, tinned and twisted on a two-inch lay
b. Insulation: PVC with 600-volt, 90°C rating
c. Shield: Individual pairs shielded with 100% Mylar tape and drain wire
d. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer’s identification
e. UL1685 listed for underground wet location use
f. Manufacturers:
1) Okonite
2) Belden
IFB 7213 6 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
3) Approved equal
2.09 COMMUNICATION CABLES
A. Cables for Ethernet and RS485 shall be rated and shall be:
1. Category 5e above Grade shielded Cable
a. Conductors: Four bonded pair #24 AWG Bare Copper
b. Insulation: Polyolefin
c. Shield: 100% aluminum foil polyester tape with drain wire
d. Jacket: PVC with 600-volt rated and manufacturer’s identification
e. UL21047 and UL1666 listed for indoor and dry locations use
f. Manufacturers
1) Belden 7957A
2) Approved equal
2. Category 5e above Grade un-shielded Cable
a. Conductors: Four bonded pair #24 AWG Bare Copper
b. Insulation: Polyolefin
c. Jacket: PVC with 300-volt rated and manufacturer’s identification
d. NEC CMR
e. UL1666 listed for indoor and dry locations use
f. Manufacturers
1) Belden 7923A
2) Approved equal
3. Category 6 above Grade shielded Cable
a. Conductors: Four bonded pair #23 AWG Bare Copper
b. Insulation: Polypropylene
c. Shield: 100% aluminum foil polyester tape with drain wire
d. Jacket: PVC with 600-volt rated and manufacturer’s identification
e. Transmission Standards: Category 6 - TIA 568.C.2
f. NEC CMR
IFB 7213 7 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
g. Flame Test Method: UL1666 Vertical Riser listed for indoor and dry locations use
h. Manufacturers
1) Belden 7953A
2) Approved equal
4. Category 6 above Grade un-shielded Cable
a. Conductors: Four bonded pair #23 AWG Bare Copper
b. Insulation: Polyolefin
c. Jacket: PVC with 300-volt rated and manufacturer’s identification
d. Transmission Standards: Category 6 - TIA 568.C.2
e. Nominal Velocity of Propagation: 72%
f. Flame Test Method: UL1666 Vertical Riser listed for indoor and dry locations use
g. Manufacturers
1) Belden 7940A
2) Approved equal
5. Category 5e below Grade shielded Cable
a. Conductors: Four pair #24 AWG Bare Copper
b. Insulation: Polyolefin
c. Shield: 100% aluminum foil polyester tape with drain wire
d. Jacket: LLPE (Linear Low Density Polyethylene) with 300-volt rated and
manufacturer’s identification
e. Misc.: NEMA WC-63.1, listed for outdoor and wet locations use
f. Water Blocking compound and listed for direct bury applications.
g. Manufacturers
1) Belden 7937A
2) Black Box
3) Approved equal
6. Category 5e below Grade unshielded Cable
a. Conductors: Four pair #24 AWG Bare Copper
IFB 7213 8 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
b. Insulation: Polyolefin
c. Jacket: LLPE (Linear Low-Density Polyethylene) with 300-volt rated and
manufacturer’s identification
d. Misc.: NEMA WC-63.1, listed for outdoor and wet locations use.
e. TIA-568-C.2 Category 5e compliance
f. Water Blocking compound and listed for direct bury applications.
g. Manufacturers
1) Belden 7934A
2) CommScope Ultra II 5NF4
3) Approved equal
7. Category 6 below Grade Cable
a. Conductors: 4 pair 23AWG Bare Copper
b. Insulation: Polyolefin
c. Shield: 100 percent aluminum foil polyester tape with drain wire
d. Jacket: Polyethylene with 300 volts rated and manufacturer’s identification
e. Misc.: Gel filled and NEMA WC-63.1, listed for outdoor and wet locations use
f. Manufacturers:
1) CommScope SYSTIMAX GigaSPEED X10D 1571
2) Approved equal
8. 485 Communications Cable
a. Conductors: One pair #24 AWG Tinned Copper
b. Insulation: Polyethylene
c. Shield: 100% aluminum foil polyester tape with tinned copper drain wire
d. Jacket: PVC with 300-volt rated and manufacturer’s identification
e. Misc.: UL2919 listed for indoor and dry locations use
f. Manufacturers
1) Belden 9841
2) Approved equal
IFB 7213 9 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
B. Color code for Ethernet communications cables shall be as follows.
1. Green – CAT5e Phone / Data
2. Red – CAT5e SCADA
3. Blue – CAT6 – Phone / Data
4. White – CAT6 - SCADA
2.10 TERMINATION MATERIALS
A. Power Conductors: Termination materials, of conductors at equipment, shall be as specified
in the relevant equipment Section.
B. Control and Instrumentation Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low- and high-level
signals): Termination connectors shall be DIN-rail-mounted one-piece molded plastic blocks
with tubular-clamp-screw type, with end barriers, dual side terminal block numbers and
terminal group identifiers. Terminals to be UL Listed for stranded conductor terminations.
Rated for a maximum of 2 #14 stranded conductors. Color of terminals to comply with NFPA
79.
C. Manufacturers
1. Phoenix Contact
2. Entrelec
3. Weidmuller
4. Allen Bradley
5. Approved equal
D. Lugs and Connectors
1. All lugs and connectors shall be tin plated copper and shall be crimped type, installed
with standard industry tooling. Lugs and connectors shall match the wire size where
used, and shall be clearly identified and color coded on the connector. All connections
shall be made for stranded wire and shall be made electrically and mechanically secured.
The lugs and connectors shall have a current carrying capacity equal to the conductors
for which they are rated and meet UL 486 requirements for 75°C. Lugs for #12 AWG up
to #6 AWG shall be ring terminals. Conductors #4 AWG and larger shall be two-hole
long barrel lugs with NEMA spacing. All lugs shall be the closed end construction to
exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor.
2.11 SPLICE MATERIALS
A. Power Conductors: Circuits shall be pulled from terminal to terminal, without splicing, except
where splicing is shown on the Drawings. No other splicing will be permitted. For wires sizes
#8 AWG and smaller, provide color coded wire nuts, with metal inserts, 3M or Ideal, rubber
insulated with half lap and two layers minimum of Scotch 33 tape. For wires greater than
#8 AWG, provide a heat shrink insulated, color-coded, die-crimped splice lug, T&B 54XXX, or
equal, rubber insulated, with half lap and two layers minimum of Scotch 33 tape.
IFB 7213 10 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
B. Control and Instrumentation Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low and high level
signals): No splicing of control and instrumentation conductors will be permitted.
2.12 WALL AND FLOOR SLAB OPENING SEALS
A. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with "FLAME-SAFE" as manufactured by the
Thomas & Betts Corp. or equal.
2.13 WIRE AND CABLE TAGS
A. Use the tagging formats for wire and cable as shown on the Drawings. Where modifications
or additions are made to existing wire and cable runs, replace existing tags with new modified
tags.
B. Wire tags for wire sizes, #2 AWG and smaller, shall be heat shrink type Raychem TMS-SCE,
or approved equal with the tag numbers typed with an indelible marking process. Character
size shall be a minimum of 1/8-inch in height. Hand written tags shall not be acceptable.
Where ends are not available, attach cable tags with nylon tie cord.
C. Tags for wires larger than #2 AWG and all cables shall be thermally printed polyethylene
type, Brady TLS 2200 or approved equal, nylon zip tied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers are not acceptable.
E. Tagging shall be done in accordance with the execution portion of these Specifications.
2.14 WIRE COLOR CODE
A. All wire shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes #8 or greater, where
colored insulation is not available. Where tape is used as the identification system, it shall be
applied in all junction boxes, manholes and other accessible intermediate locations as well as
at each termination.
B. The following coding shall be used:
System Wire Color
1-Phase, 3 Wire Phase A
Phase B
Neutral
Black
Blue
White
208Y/120, Volts
3-Phase, 4 Wire
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Black
Red
Blue
White
480/277, Volts
3-Phase, 4 Wire
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Gray/White with one or
more colored stripes
2.15 CABLE TAG COLOR CODE
A. All cable tags shall be white in color with black printing.
IFB 7213 11 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Do not install conductors until the raceway system is in place. No conductor shall be installed
between outlet points, junction points or splicing points, until raceway sections have been
completed, and raceway covers are installed for protection of conductors from damage or
exposure to the elements. Any conductor installed in an incomplete raceway system shall be
removed from the raceway system and from project site. A complete inspection of such
raceway sections shall be completed, before new conductors are installed.
B. Installed unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents
and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation.
D. Pull all conductors into a raceway at one time, using wire pulling lubricant as needed to
protect the wire.
E. Except for hand-pulled conductors into raceways, all wire and cable installation shall be
installed with tension-monitoring equipment. Conductors which are found to have been
installed without tension–monitoring shall be immediately removed from the raceways,
permanently identified as rejected material, and removed from the jobsite. New conductors
and cables shall be reinstalled, tagged and raceways resealed, with no change in the
Contract Price or Schedule allowed.
F. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and
minimum bending radii. Where pulling compound is used, use only UL listed compound
compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceway involved.
G. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to
the inch-pound requirements of the NEC and UL.
H. Single conductors and cables in manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, and other
indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means such as arc and
fireproofing tapes, shall be bundled throughout their exposed length with nylon, self-locking,
releasable, cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding four inches on centers.
I. All wire and cable installed in cable trays shall be UL Listed as Type TC, for cable tray use.
3.02 CONDUCTORS 1000 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Provide conductor sizes indicated on Drawings, as a minimum.
B. Use crimp connectors on all stranded conductors.
C. Soldered mechanical joints insulated with tape will not be acceptable.
D. Arrange wiring in cabinets and panels neatly cut to proper length Surplus wire shall be
removed unless noted otherwise. Conductors shall be bridled or bundled and secured in an
acceptable manner. Identify all circuits entering motor control centers and all other control
enclosures in accordance with the conductor identification system specified herein.
E. Terminate control and instrumentation wiring with methods consistent with terminals
provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions.
IFB 7213 12 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
F. Attach compression lugs, larger than #6 AWG, with a tool specifically designed for that
purpose which provides a complete, controlled crimp where the tool will not release until the
crimp is complete. Use of plier type crimpers is not acceptable.
G. Cap spare conductors and conductors not terminated with the UL listed end caps.
H. Remove all burrs, chamfer all edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating
material to protect the conductors passing through holes or over edges in sheet metal
enclosures.
I. Provide at least 6 feet spare conductors in freestanding panels and at least two feet spare in
other assemblies for all conductors which are to be terminated by others. Provide additional
conductor length in any assembly where it is obvious that more conductor will be needed to
reach the termination point.
J. Do not combine power conductors in the same raceway unless shown on Drawings. Do not
run signal conductors carrying voltages less than 120 volts AC in the same raceway as
conductors carrying higher voltages regardless of the insulation rating of the conductors. Do
not share neutrals on branch circuits.
3.03 GROUNDING
A. Conduits and other raceways shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the
raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets and other equipment shall be
properly grounded in accordance with NEC requirements and specification 16660 26 05 26..
Ground wires exposed to mechanical damage shall be installed in rigid aluminum conduit.
Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. Connections to ground rods
shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process.
3.04 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES
A. No splices of wire and cable will be permitted, except where specifically permitted by the
Owner/Engineer in writing, or as shown on the Drawings.
B. Power conductors: Terminations shall be made with connectors as specified. Splices, where
specifically allowed as stated above, shall be made in a Termination Cabinet (TC).
C. Control Conductors: Splices of control conductors will not be permitted between terminal
points. Terminations shall be made with approved terminals as specified.
D. Instrumentation Signal Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low and high level
signals): Splices of Instrumentation conductors will not be permitted between terminal points.
Terminations shall be made with connectors as specified. The shield of pair shielded and
triad shielded shall be terminated on terminal strips. Provide dedicated terminal block to
every conductor including shields. Double lugging terminations is not acceptable.
3.05 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
A. Instrumentation cables shall be installed in raceways as specified. Unless specifically shown
on the Drawings, all instrumentation circuits shall be installed as single shielded twisted pair
cables or single shielded twisted triads. In no case shall a circuit be made up using
conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever three wire circuits are
required.
IFB 7213 13 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
B. Terminal blocks shall be provided at all instrument cable junction boxes, and all circuits shall
be identified at such junctions.
C. Shielded instrumentation wire, coaxial cable, data highway cable, discrete I/O, multiple
conductor cable, and fiber optic cables shall be run without splices between instruments,
terminal boxes, or panels. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run.
D. Shields shall be grounded at the PLC/RTU. Terminal blocks shall be provided for
inter-connecting shield drain wires at all junction boxes. Individual circuit shielding shall be
provided with its own block.
E. Shield wire shall be wrapped and taped at the transmitter end of the signal run. Before
termination, peel back the outer sheath, leaving the shield intact. Wrap the drain wire around
the conductors, leaving approximately two inches exposed. Wrap the drain wire with two
layers of Scotch 33 tape.
3.06 WIRE TAGGING
A. All wiring shall be tagged at all termination points and at all major access points in the
electrical raceways. A termination point is defined as any point or junction where a wire or
cable is physically connected. This includes terminal blocks and device terminals. A major
access point to a raceway is defined as any enclosure; box or space designed for wire or
cable pulling or inspection and includes pull boxes, manholes, and junction boxes.
B. Wire tags shall show both origination and destination information to allow for a wire or cable
to be traced from point in the field. Information regarding its origination shall be shown in
parenthesis.
C. For multiconductor cables, both the individual conductors and the overall cable shall be
tagged. Conductors that are part of a multiconductor cable shall reference the cable
identification number that they are a part of, as well as a unique conductor number within the
cable.
3.07 CABLE TAGGING
A. All cables shall be tagged at all termination points and at all major access points in the
electrical raceways as defined in the wire tag section of this Specification.
B. The cable tag shall be installed where the cable enters and leaves each access point (e.g.,
junction box, manhole, etc.). In cases of limited access space, a single tag may be used that
shows both equipment tag origination and destination. In the case where the jacket is
stripped for terminations, the tag shall be installed at the end of the jacket.
3.08 RACEWAY SEALING
A. Raceways entering junction boxes or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation
equipment shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant or approved equal.
B. This requirement shall apply to for all raceways in the conduit system.
3.09 FIELD TESTS
A. Conductors under 600 volts
IFB 7213 14 Section 26 05 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Wires and Cables
1. Perform insulation resistance testing of all power circuits below 1000 volts with a 1000-
volt megger, in accordance with the recommendations of the wire manufacturer.
2. Prepare a written test report of the results and submit to the Owner/Engineer prior to final
inspection.
3. Minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 100 megohms. Lower values shall
be acceptable only by the Owner/Engineer's specific written approval.
4. Disconnect equipment that might be damaged by this test. Perform tests with all other
equipment connected to the circuit.
B. Tests: After instrumentation cable installation and conductor termination by the
instrumentation and control supplier, perform tests to ensure that instrumentation cable
shields are isolated from ground, except at the grounding point in the instrumentation control
panel. Remove all improper grounds.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 26 05 29
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Support Hardware
SECTION 26 05 29
ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install electrical support hardware, as shown on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
B. Hardware shall include anchor systems, adhesive anchor systems, metal framing systems,
and other electrical support systems, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical
coordination requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, the manufacturers' names and
product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the
Drawings. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being
submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be
rejected and returned for revision.
B. The submittal information, for anchor systems, shall contain manufacturer's specifications
and technical data including;
1. Acceptable base material conditions (i.e. cracked, un-cracked concrete)
2. Acceptable drilling methods
3. Acceptable bore hole conditions (dry, water saturated, water filled, under water)
4. Manufacturer's installation instructions including bore hole cleaning procedures and
adhesive injection.
5. Cure and gel time tables
6. Temperature ranges (storage, installation and in-service).
C. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in hard copy format
and in electronic format using PDF files on a CD and/or a flash drive and shall include an
indexed Table of Contents. Electronic submittals are mandatory and any submittal received
not indexed as specified will be returned without review. Hard copy submittals may not be
required if so stipulated in the Contract Documents. No change in Contract Price or
Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals.
D. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this
Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related
equipment will also be returned without review.
IFB 7213 2 Section 26 05 29
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Support Hardware
1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be
designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless
otherwise noted):
1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
3. ASTM E 488-96 (2003); Standard Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and
Masonry Elements, ASTM International.
4. ASTM E 1512-93, Standard Test Methods for Testing Bond Performance of Adhesive-
Bonded Anchors, ASTM International
5. AC308; Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete Elements, Latest
revision.
6. SAE 316 Stainless Steel Grades
B. All equipment components and completed assemblies having a UL standard specified in this
Section of the Specifications, , shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and
equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, a list
of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this
requirement.
1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prior to jobsite delivery, all submittal requirements must be complete, and an approved copy
of all such submittals shall be available to the Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the
equipment. Delivery of equipment not completely constructed, onsite factory work, or failed
factory tests will not be permitted.
B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Adhesive Anchor Systems.
1. Deliver materials undamaged in Manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers,
identified with brand, type, and ICC-ES Evaluation Report number.
2. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date, minimizing storage time
at job-site.
3. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with
Manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions.
4. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material
safety data sheets as applicable.
5. Do not use damaged or expired materials.
IFB 7213 3 Section 26 05 29
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Support Hardware
6. Storage restrictions (temperature range) and expiration date must be supplied with
product
D. Metal Framing Systems
1. Material shall be new and unused, with no signs of damage from handling.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer’s warrantee, for the equipment specified and
the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two
years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period
of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating
condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the
equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ANCHORING SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
a. HILTI Kwik Bolt 3
b. Approved equal
2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products
that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above
are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
B. Product Description
1. Torque controlled expansion anchor consisting of anchor body, expansion element
(wedges), washer and nut. Anchor shall be used for anchor sizes less than 3/8 inch.
2. All parts shall be 316 stainless steel materials conforming to SAE 316.
3. UL 203 Rated.
2.02 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
a. HILTI HIT-RTZ with HIT-HY 200 MAX.
b. Approved equal
IFB 7213 4 Section 26 05 29
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Support Hardware
2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products
that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above
are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
B. Product Description
1. Anchor body with helical cone shaped thread on the embedded end and standard
threads on the exposed end, with washer and nut, inserted into Injection adhesive.
Anchor shall be used for anchor sizes 3/8 inch and larger.
2. All parts shall be 316 stainless steel materials conforming to SAE 316 standards.
2.03 STRUT SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
a. Tyco Unistrut
b. B-Line
c. Super-Strut
d. Approved equal
2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products
that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above
are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
B. Product Description
1. Metal framing system for use in the mounting or support of electrical systems, panels and
enclosures, and including lighting fixture supports, trapeze hangers and conduit supports.
2. Components shall consist of telescoping channels, slotted back-to-back channels, end
clamps all threads and conduit clamps.
3. Minimum sizes shall be 13/16-inch through 3-1/4 inch.
4. Components shall be assembled by means of flat plate fittings, 90-degree angle fittings,
braces, clevis fittings, U-fittings, Z-fittings, Wing-fittings, Post Bases, channel nuts,
washers, etc.
5. Field welding of components will not be permitted.
6. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all parts shall be 316 stainless
steel material conforming to SAE 316.
7. Framing systems for chlorine and ammonia rooms shall be manufactured of structural
fiberglass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
IFB 7213 5 Section 26 05 29
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Support Hardware
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install all equipment strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the
Contract Drawings.
B. The locations of devices are shown as general on the Drawings and may be varied within
reasonable limits as to avoid any piping or other obstruction without change in the Contract
Price or Schedule, subject to the approval of the Owner and Engineer. Coordinate the
installation of the devices for piping and equipment clearance.
C. No electrical equipment or raceways shall be attached to or supported from, sheet metal
walls.
D. Install required safety labels.
E. Electrical support channel shall be used to construct support assemblies as shown on the
drawings. Horizontal braces attached to concrete or CMU walls or structural building steel
are permitted if the space between the back of the support structures and the attachment
points are too small to permit a walk space. No attachments to sheet metal are permitted as
specified above. Incorporate additional channel materials and/or provide assemblies of
double channel with enough vertical and horizontal members to from a rigid structure whether
or not such additional materials or the use of double channel materials are shown or
specified. Support structures shall be rigid without the use of channels to from angle
supports between the back or front of the assembly and the ground. Angle supports are
strictly prohibited because they provide tripping hazards. Outdoor supports structures shall be
able to support the equipment with the structural strength to withstand wind gusts up to 90
mph without damage.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage.
B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are
specified in manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 POST INSTALLED ANCHOR SYSTEMS
A. Prior to installation of the anchor systems, the hole shall be clean and dry in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the installation. Remove dirt, dust, or
concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum
cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 6 Section 26 05 29
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Support Hardware
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install complete raceway systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified
herein. A raceway system shall consist of materials designed expressly for containing wires
and cables, including but not limited to, conduit, device bodies, conduit bodies, raceway
boxes, enclosures containing electrical devices, controls and related materials.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical
coordination requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, the manufacturers' names and
product designation or catalog numbers of all materials specified.
1. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted.
2. Each cut sheet shall be clearly marked to indicate the item submitted and/or mark out
items which are not being submitted for approval. Submittals not clearly marked will be
returned with the indication REVISE AND RESUBMIT as a minimum or other indication
per the specifications as warranted.
B. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, certification that the electricians installing the PVC coated
conduit have a five-year minimum experience, in the installation of the product.
C. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in hard copy format
and in electronic format using PDF files on a CD and/or a flash drive and shall include an
indexed Table of Contents. Electronic submittals are mandatory, and any submittal received
not indexed as specified will be returned without review. Hard copy submittals may not be
required if so stipulated in the Contract Documents. No change in Contract Price or
Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals.
D. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this
Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related
equipment will also be returned without review.
1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be
designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless
otherwise noted):
1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. NFPA 70E – Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace
3. UL 6A – Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit
IFB 7213 2 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
4. ANSI C80.5 – Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit
5. UL 514B – Outlet Bodies
B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the
Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and
equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an
acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating
compliance with this requirement.
B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within
the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer.
C. The installer of materials specified herein, shall have a minimum of five years’ experience in
the installation of each type of material. Proof of experience shall be submitted, upon request
of the Owner/Engineer, prior to installation.
D. Used materials are unacceptable, will be rejected and shall be removed from the job site.
Used materials, if installed, shall be removed and replaced with new materials. If new
materials are installed with used materials, and the removal of the used materials renders the
new materials in an unacceptable condition, such as new conductors installed in used
raceway components, (determined by the Engineer/Owner alone) then the new materials
shall be removed along with the used materials and replaced. No increase in the Contract
Price nor in Contract Schedule will be allowed.
1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the
Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals.
Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests,
will not be permitted.
B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Materials shall not be stored exposed to sunlight. Such materials shall be completely
covered.
D. Materials showing signs of previous use, jobsite storage at another location, or exposure to
the elements or other damage will be rejected.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer’s warrantee, for the equipment specified and
the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two
years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period
of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating
condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the
equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
IFB 7213 3 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
2.01 GENERAL
A. Raceways and fittings shall be as shown on the Drawings, with a minimum 3/4-inch trade
size.
B. Device entries less than 3/4 inch shall be provided with an adaptor to connect ¾-inch or
larger conduit. The following adaptors are acceptable:
1. REA12SA, Cooper Crouse Hinds or equal, for aluminum
2. ADAPT ADU302930, REDAPT or equal, for 316 stainless.
3. Approved equal
2.02 CONDUIT RACEWAY
A. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RMC)
1. Rigid Aluminum conduit shall be extruded from AA 6063 alloy in temper designation T-1
and shall conform to FED Spec WW-C-540C, ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
2. Manufacturer for rigid aluminum conduit and fittings
a. Wheatland Tube Company
b. Allied
c. American Conduit
d. Approved equal
2.03 WIREWAYS
A. All wireways shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel, with gasketed hinged covers and
stainless steel quick-release type latches. Wireway shall have two Breather/Drains for each
ten feet of wireway. Breather/Drain shall be in the bottom, near the ends of the wireway.
Wireways shall have integral welded mounting lugs. Bolted-on mounting lugs are
unacceptable. Provide stainless steel internal barriers to isolate signal cables from power
conductors and multiconductor digital control cables.
B. Manufacturers
1. Industrial Enclosure Corporation
2. Cooper B Line
a. Approved equal
C. Breather/Drains
1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds 316 stainless steel
a. Approved equal
2.04 RACEWAY BOXES AND EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
IFB 7213 4 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
A. The term box and enclosure are synonymous for this specification. Boxes and enclosures
specified herein, include terminal boxes, junction boxes pull boxes, and boxes for switch,
receptacles and lighting. Enclosures used for electrical and instrumentation equipment, other
than terminal boxes, shall be provided as described in this section with references to this
specification in other specification sections. All raceway boxes and equipment enclosures
shall be provided with a common ground point and shall be UL rated.
B. NEMA Type 4X boxes shall be 316 stainless steel or aluminum only as otherwise specified or
shown with mounting lugs or brackets welded on the box, suitable for wall mounting, or have
mounting feet where self-standing. Boxes for wall-mounting shall have integral welded-on
mounting lugs. Enclosures with mounting feet shall have the mounting feet brackets for the
attachment of mounting feet welded on. Boxes manufactured with holes intended for
mounting using bolted-on mounting lugs or feet are not acceptable. Drilling through the back
of the box to mount is strictly prohibited. Drilled boxes shall be removed and replaced. All
boxes shall have continuously welded seams ground smooth, and shall have continuous
hinged, gasketed doors. Box bodies shall not be less than 16 gauge. Boxes larger than 24
inches X 20 inches shall have a three-point type latch with handle. Boxes 24 inches X 20
inches or smaller shall have 316 stainless steel luggage type quick release latches, or three-
point latch system with all components 316 stainless steel. Latch systems requiring tools to
open or close are unacceptable.
C. NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel enclosures
1. Use for all locations unless otherwise shown or specified
2. Type 316 stainless steel, body and door
3. Stainless steel continuous hinge
4. Foam in-place gasket
5. Single point quarter turn latches (20-inch X 24-inch and smaller). All others shall have
three-point
6. Manufacturers
a. Enclosures housing electrical equipment may be constructed by the manufacturer of
that equipment but shall meet the all the physical requirements specified herein.
b. Eaton Crouse Hinds
c. Hoffman
d. Appleton Electric
e. EMF Company
f. NEMA Enclosures Company
g. Cooper B Line
h. Rittal
i. Approved equal
IFB 7213 5 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
D. NEMA 1 or NEMA 1A boxes shall not be used.
E. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used.
2.05 DEVICE BOXES
A. Device boxes installed in aluminum raceway systems for switches and receptacle, etc., shall
be copper free cast aluminum, and shall have tapered, threaded, hubs, with integral
bushings. Boxes shall have internal grounding screw, and a minimum of two mounting feet.
Boxes shall be type FD.
B. Manufacturers
1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds
2. Appleton
3. Approved equal
2.06 CONDUIT OUTLET BODIES
A. Conduit outlet bodies and covers shall be Form 7, copper-free aluminum, with captive screw-
clamp cover, neoprene gasket and stainless-steel screws and clamps for conduits up to and
including 2-1/2 inches.
B. Manufacturers
1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds Form 7 with Mark 7 wedge-nut cover
2. Appleton
3. Approved equal
C. Provide junction boxes for conduits larger than 2-1/2 inches.
D. All outlet boxes and covers for Class 1 Division 2 areas shall be rated NEMA 4X.
1. Manufacturers
a. Eaton Crouse-Hinds EA Series
b. Approved equal
2.07 CONDUIT HUBS
A. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight, threaded
aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw
B. Manufacturers
1. T&B H150GRA Series
2. Approved equal
2.08 GROUNDING BUSHINGS
IFB 7213 6 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
A. Grounding bushings shall be insulated lay-in lug grounding bushings with tin-plated copper
grounding path. Bushings shall have integrally molded noncombustible phenolic insulated
surfaces rated 150°C. Each bushing shall be furnished with a plastic insert cap. The size of
the lug shall be sufficient to accommodate the maximum ground wire size required by the
NEC for the application.
B. Manufacturers
1. O-Z/Gedney Type ABLG
2. Approved equal
2.09 RACEWAY SEALANT
A. Raceway sealant for use in the sealing of raceway hubs, entering or terminating in boxes or
enclosures where such sealing is shown or specified, shall be 3M 1000NS Watertight
Sealant, or approved equal.
2.10 CONDUIT PENETRATION SEALS
A. Conduit wall and floor seals
1. O.Z./Gedney Co. Series CSM
a. Type CSML-XXXP shall be used for all applications that do not require a recessed
sealing bushing.
b. Type CSMI-XXXP shall be used for all applications that require a recessed sealing
bushing.
2. Approved equal
2.11 EXPANSION-DEFLECTION COUPLING
A. Combination expansion-deflection fittings with 3/4-inch axial expansion and contraction
movement, 3/4-inch parallel misalignment movement, and up to 30 degrees of angular
movement in any direction. It shall be copper-free aluminum, with exterior tinned copper braid
bonding jumper and 316 stainless grounding straps
B. Manufacturers
1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds Model XD
2. Approved equal
2.12 EXPANSION FITTINGS
A. Expansion fittings shall provide eight-inch movement, shall be made of copper-free
aluminum, with exterior tinned copper braid bonding jumper and 316 stainless grounding
straps. Provide internal grounding. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable.
B. Manufacturers
1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds Co. Type XJGSA
IFB 7213 7 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
2. Approved equal
2.13 EXPLOSION-PROOF SEALS, BREATHERS AND DRAINS
A. Explosion proof fittings shall be designed for Class 1 Division 1, Group D, hazardous
locations. Fittings shall be copper-free aluminum, with seals, breathers and drains. Provide
type ED, or as required for the application.
B. Manufacturers
1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds Co.
2. Appleton Electric Co.
3. O.Z./Gedney Co.
4. Approved equal
2.14 KELLEMS GRIPS
A. Kellems grips cables supports shall be 316 stainless steel.
2.15 CONDUIT MOUNTING EQUIPMENT
A. Pull and junction box supports, spacers, conduit support rods, clamps, hangers, channel, nut,
bolts, washers, etc. and shall be 316 stainless steel. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable.
2.16 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION TAGGING
A. Use the tagging formats for conduits as shown on the Drawings.
B. Use the tagging formats for conduits as shown on the Drawings. Where modifications or
additions are made to existing equipment replace existing tags with new modified tags.
C. Conduit identification plates shall be embossed stainless steel with stainless steel band,
permanently secured to the conduit without screws. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable.
D. Identification plates shall be as manufactured by the Panduit Corp. or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS
A. Unless exact locations are shown on the Drawings, coordinate the placement of raceway
systems and related components with other trades and existing installations.
B. Raceway Systems for the installation of Fiber Optic Cables shall not contain conduit bodies,
device boxes, or raceway boxes containing less than twelve inches of bend radius.
C. Unless shown on the Drawings or specified otherwise, the raceway type installed with respect
to the location shall be as follows, including all materials:
IFB 7213 8 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
Raceway System Location
1. Rigid Galvanized (RSC) Type Not acceptable for use on this Project
2. PVC Coated Aluminum (CRMC) Type All embedded raceway bends, underground duct
bank bends of more than 20 degrees, and all
raceway stub-ups to a minimum of six inches
above finished floor or grade and in Chlorine and
Caustic rooms.
3. Liquidtight Flexible Aluminum (LFMC) Type Raceway connection to vibrating equipment, and
as shown on the Drawings in all areas.
6. Flexible Aluminum (FMC) Type Fixture whip connection to lighting fixtures in NEMA
12 areas (maximum 3-feet). BX or AC type
prefabricated cables are not permitted.
7. Aluminum Rigid Metal (RMC) Type All above grade areas, except for concrete
embedded and those areas described in Locations
2 through 6 above.
D. All conduit of a given type shall be the product of one manufacturer.
3.02 BOX APPLICATIONS
A. All raceway junction pull and terminal boxes and electrical equipment enclosures shall have
NEMA ratings for the location in which they are installed, and as specified herein.
B. The distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box
shall not be less than eight times the metric designator (trade size) of the largest raceway in a
row. This distance shall be increased for additional entries by the amount of the sum of the
diameters of all other raceway entries in the same row on the same wall of the box. Each row
shall be calculated individually, and the single row that provides the maximum distance shall
be used.
C. Provide cast aluminum conduit fittings for exposed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet
boxes.
D. All raceway boxes and wall – mounted electrical equipment enclosures shall be provided with
factory mounting integral welded mounting lugs. Bolt-on gasketed mounting lugs attached
through factory-drilled holes are not acceptable for any raceway box or electrical equipment
enclosure. Drilling through the back of any box or enclosure is prohibited, and if so installed,
shall be removed and replaced, with no increase in the Contract Price or Construction
Schedule.
E. No penetrations shall be made in the top of boxes or electrical equipment enclosures in wet
locations.
3.03 DEVICE BOX APPLICATIONS
A. Device boxes shall be used for mounting wiring devices such as receptacles, switches,
thermostats, lighting and other permanently mounted devices. All device boxes shall be
IFB 7213 9 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
installed with a minimum of 1/4-inch air space between the back of the box and the wall or
back panel on which it is installed. The space may be created with enough 316 stainless
steel washers to provide the required air space or may be mounted using 316 stainless steel
slotted channel.
3.04 CONDUIT OUTLET BODIES APPLICATIONS
A. Conduit outlet bodies may be used on conduits up to and including 2-1/2 inches, except
where junction boxes are shown or otherwise specified. For conduits larger than 2-1/2 inches,
junction boxes shall be provided.
3.05 CONDUIT HUB APPLICATIONS
A. Unless specifically stated herein or described on the Drawings, all raceways shall terminate
at an outlet with a conduit hub. Locknut or double locknut terminations will not be permitted.
B. When conduits contain equipment grounding conductors the wire shall be grounded to the
hub(s) associated with that grounding conductor.
3.06 INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHING APPLICATIONS
A. Insulated grounding bushings shall be provided and used to terminate raceways where the
raceways enter pad-mounted electrical equipment or switchgear from the bottom where there
is no wall or floor pan on which to anchor or terminate the raceway.
B. All other raceways shall terminate on enclosures with a conduit hub, except for NEMA 7/4X
areas.
C. Grounding bushing caps shall remain on the bushing until the wire is ready to be pulled.
3.07 CONDUIT FITTINGS APPLICATIONS
A. Combination expansion-deflection fittings shall be installed where conduits cross structure
expansion joints, and where installed in exposed conduit runs such that the distance between
expansion-deflection fittings does not exceed 150 feet of conduit run. Expansion-deflection
fittings are acceptable in indoor locations out of exposure to direct sunlight or other outdoor
locations which are shaded.
B. Expansion-deflection fittings are not acceptable for use outdoors unless approved in writing
on a case-by-case basis from the Engineer/Owner. Where combination expansion-deflection
fittings with exposed non-metallic sections, are approved by the Engineer/Owner for use
where exposed to sunlight or other outdoor locations which are shaded, an aluminum wrap
shall be installed loosely over the non-metallic portion, extending at least two inches beyond
the ends. The wrap shall be loosely secured, to permit movement, with at least two 316 SS
fasteners. Nylon tie-wraps are not acceptable.
C. Provide an expansion fitting with a minimum of six inches available movement shall be
installed on the exposed side of under to above grade conduit transitions. Expansion-
deflection fittings shall not be provided unless approved and protected as specified above.
3.08 CONDUIT PENETRATION SEALS APPLICATIONS
A. Conduit wall seals shall be used where underground conduits penetrate walls or at other
locations shown on the Drawings.
IFB 7213 10 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
B. Conduit sealing bushings shall be used to seal conduit ends exposed to the weather and at
other locations shown on the Drawings.
3.09 CONDUIT TAG APPLICATIONS
A. All conduits shall be tagged within one foot of the entry of equipment, and wall and floor
penetrations.
B. Tag all underground conduits and ducts at all locations, exiting and entering from
underground, including manholes and handholes.
3.10 RACEWAY SEALING
A. All raceways entering junction boxes, terminal junction boxes, electrical equipment
enclosures or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment shall be
connected to the box, enclosure or panel using conduit hubs and shall be sealed with
Raceway Sealant, as specified herein.
3.11 RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. No wire shall be
installed between outlet points, junction points or splicing points, until all raceway sections
are complete, and all raceway covers are installed for protection of conductors from damage
or exposure to the elements. Conductors installed into incomplete raceway systems are
considered improperly installed and are in violation of the NEC. The occurrence of wire
installed in an incomplete installation, shall require the removal of such conductors from the
project site, and replacement of the conductors at with no increase in Contract Price or
Schedule. The raceway system shall be completed and inspected by the Engineer/Owner,
before new conductors are installed.
B. No conduit smaller than 3/4-inch electrical trade size, shall be used, nor shall any have more
than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any one run. Pull boxes shall be provided as
necessary. Conduit reducers which are the same type of the raceway shall be installed
where manufacturer-provided enclosures are not available with conduit hubs larger than 1/2-
inch at the enclosure to terminate 3/4-inch conduit. The raceway fill shall be adjusted to
accommodate the smaller opening in the manufacturer-provided enclosure. Notify the
Engineer/Owner prior to the installation of the raceway into enclosures with openings smaller
than the specified minimum. Raceways installed without notice are considered unacceptable
and may be required to be removed at the Engineer’s/Owner’s discretion with no increase in
the Contract Price or Schedule allowed.
C. All raceways, installed underground, shall be installed in accordance with Section 26 05 43
Underground System, and be a minimum size of two-inch trade size.
D. Raceways entering or leaving the raceway system, which could be subjected to the entry of
moisture, rain or liquid of any type, shall be tightly sealed, using 3M 1000NS Watertight
Sealant, or approved equal at any possible moisture entry point both before and after the
installation of cables to prevent the entry of water or moisture to the Raceway System at any
time. Any damage to new or existing equipment, due to the entrance of moisture from
unsealed raceways, shall be corrected by complete replacement of such equipment. No
increase in the Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed. Cleaning or drying of such
damaged equipment will not be acceptable.
E. Conduit supports, other than for underground raceways, shall be spaced at intervals of eight
feet or less, as required by the NEC and as required to obtain rigid construction. Conduits
IFB 7213 11 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
shall be supported near the entry into any enclosure in accordance with the NEC. Conduits
shall not be used to support other conduits, nor shall conduits be supported from cable tray.
F. Single conduits shall be supported by means of one-hole pipe clamps in combination with
one-screw back plates, to raise conduits from the surface.
G. Multiple runs of conduits shall be supported on trapeze type hangers with horizontal
members and threaded hanger rods. The rods shall be not less than 3/8-inch diameter.
Multiple conduits mounted on walls shall be supported using strut and 316 stainless steel
conduit clamps, screws, nuts and washers.
H. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc. shall be supported as specified
herein.
I. Conduit hangers shall be attached to structural steel by means of beam or channel clamps.
Where attached to concrete surfaces, anchors shall be as specified in Section 26 05 29
Electrical Support Hardware.
J. No electrical equipment enclosures, boxes, terminal junction boxes or raceways shall be
attached to or supported from, sheet metal walls.
K. All conduits on exposed work shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding
wall and shall conform to the form of the ceiling. No diagonal runs will be allowed. Bends in
parallel conduit runs shall be concentric. Offsets in conduit runs shall all be done at the same
point and shall all be the same angle, so the entire installation appears to be parallel or
concentric at every point. All conduits shall be run perfectly straight and true.
L. Conduits terminated into enclosures shall be perpendicular to the walls where flexible liquid
tight or rigid conduits are required. The use of short seal tight elbow fittings for such
terminations will not be permitted, except for connections to instrumentation transmitters,
where multiple penetrations are required.
M. Conduits containing equipment grounding conductors and terminating in boxes shall have
insulated throat grounding bushings. The grounding conductor shall be grounded to the box.
N. Conduits shall be installed using threaded fittings. Running threads will not be permitted.
O. Provide glued type conduit fittings on PVC conduit.
P. Conduits installed which are not in compliance with these requirements shall be removed and
reinstalled at the Engineer’s/Owner’s discretion. If conductors are installed when the
improper installation is discovered, the conductors shall be removed from the raceway,
discarded and removed them from the job site, replaced, re-terminated, retagged, and
retested in accordance with the specifications. The function of the system shall be retested in
its entirety. No increase in Contract Time or Schedule will be allowed.
Q. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall be used for the primary and secondary of
transformers, generator terminations and other equipment where vibration is present. Use in
other locations is not permitted, except for connections to instrumentation transmitters, where
multiple penetrations are required. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall have a maximum
length not greater than that of a factory manufactured elbow of the conduit size being used.
The maximum bending radius shall not be less than that shown in the NEC Chapter 9, Table
2, “Other Bends”. BX or AC type prefabricated cables will not be permitted.
IFB 7213 12 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
R. Seal the remaining openings or spaces of conduits passing through openings in walls or floor
slabs to prevent the passage of flame or smoke where additional openings or space around
the conduits are present.
S. Conduit ends exposed to the weather or corrosive gases shall be sealed with conduit sealing
bushings.
T. Raceways terminating in Control Panels or enclosures outdoors or any wet or damp location
or any location where plant process equipment is located, or any location not otherwise
specifically designated as a dry electrical room, control room or office space, which contain
electrical equipment or terminal blocks, shall not enter from the top of the enclosure. The
raceways shall be sealed with a watertight sealant as specified herein. Enclosures entered
from the top where top entry is prohibited, will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced
regardless of the Division which contains the specification for the enclosure. The use of UL
Listed conduit closures to restore the NEMA rating of the enclosure will not be accepted.
Conduit entering the top of the enclosures shall be removed and re-routed to enter the
enclosure from the side or bottom. Conductors installed in top entering conduits shall be
pulled back to the nearest conduit body or junction box and re-routed with the conduit,
provided the conductors are long enough to be re-terminated. Conductors found to be
insufficient in length to be re-terminated shall be completely removed and replaced, re-tested,
re-tagged, re-tested and the control function of the panel shall be re-tested. If the enclosure
is provided by an OEM, the enclosure and its contents shall be returned to the OEM for a
new enclosure. No increase in Contract Price nor increase in Contract Time will be allowed
the Contractor for making these corrections.
U. All conduits from external sources entering or leaving a multiple compartment enclosure shall
be stubbed up into the bottom horizontal wire way or other manufacturer designated area,
directly below the vertical section in which the conductors are to be terminated. Conduits
entering from cable tray shall be stubbed into the upper section.
V. Conduit sealing and drain fittings shall be installed in areas designated as NEMA 4X or 7.
W. A conduit identification plate shall be installed on all power, instrumentation, alarm and
control conduits at each end of the run and at intermediate junction boxes, manholes, etc.
Conduit plates shall be installed before conductors are pulled into conduits. Exact
identification plate location shall be coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at the time of
installation to provide uniformity of placement and ease of reading. Conduit numbers shall be
exactly as shown on the Drawings.
X. Mandrels shall be pulled through all existing conduits that will be reused and through all new
conduits two inches in diameter and larger prior to installing conductors.
Y. 3/16-inch polypropylene pull lines shall be installed in all new conduits noted as spares or
designated for future equipment.
Z. All conduit that may under any circumstance contain liquids such as water, condensation,
liquid chemicals, etc. shall be arranged to drain away from the equipment served. If conduit
drainage is not possible, conduit seals shall be used to plug the conduits at the point of
attachment to the equipment.
AA.Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts, access hatches or vent duct openings. They shall be
routed to avoid such present or future openings in floor or ceiling construction.
BB.The use of running threads is prohibited. Where such threads are necessary, a three-piece
union shall be used.
IFB 7213 13 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
CC.Conduits passing from heated to unheated spaces, exterior spaces, refrigerated spaces, cold
air plenums, etc. shall be sealed with Watertight Sealant as specified herein.
DD.Conduits shall be located a minimum of three inches from steam or hot water piping. Where
crossings are unavoidable, the conduit shall be kept at least one inch from the covering of the
pipe crossed.
EE.Conduits terminating at a cable tray shall be supported independently from the cable tray.
Provide a conduit support within one foot of the cable tray. The weight of the conduit shall not
bear on the cable tray.
FF. Conduits entering the top of electrical equipment enclosures from cable tray or otherwise
routed from above the equipment in airconditioned dry indoor spaces shall coordinate their
placement with the HVAC duct vents such that cold air from the HVAC system will not blow
directly on the vertical conduits causing condensation. Conduits which cannot be located
away from direct exposure to cold air from the HVAC system shall be insulated to prevent
condensation from forming inside the conduits or shall be re-routed. In all cases,
condensation caused by cold air from the HVAC system shall be prevented from entering
electrical enclosures. Equipment damaged by water from condensation shall be removed,
replaced, conductors re-terminated, and its operation retested with no change in the contract
price or schedule.
GG. All changes of direction on PVC coated steel conduit greater than 20 degrees shall be
accomplished using long radius bends. Any field bends shall be made using equipment
designed to prevent damage to the PVC coating.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 14 Section 26 05 33
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Raceways, Boxes, Enclosures and Fittings
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 26 05 36
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Cable Tray
SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install complete cable tray systems, with all accessories, fittings, supports, as
shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Cable tray runs outline the general routing of raceways. Select actual routing in the field to
follow Drawings as closely as possible and to avoid interfering with pipes, ducts, structural
members, or other equipment. Deviations in routing from that shown on the Drawings must
be approved by the Engineer, with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule allowed.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical
coordination requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, a complete tray layout and
routing in a computer-aided format, fittings and hangers, with tray type, sizes, dimensions
and support points.
a. Submittal shall show tray routing, with elevations.
b. Drawings shall show locations of tray hangers and/or concrete inserts where
concrete inserts are to be used
c. The use of the Engineer’s Drawings as a base plan for the layout is not allowed.
Calculations shall be provided for loading and deflections. Calculations shall be
submitted in a format (Excel spread sheet and PDF on CD and or flash drive or
acceptable equal) which will permit hand calculation verification by the
Owner/Engineer.]
B. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals containing installation and maintenance
instructions for the cable tray and its components.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
IFB 7213 2 Section 26 05 36
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Cable Tray
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, Article 392 Cable Trays.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
1. NEMA VE-1 – 2002 Metal Cable Tray Systems
2. NEMA VE-2 – 2001 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of
bid opening shall apply.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified herein and
as shown on the Drawings.
1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the
Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals.
Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests,
will not be permitted.,
B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Materials shall not be stored exposed to sunlight. Such materials shall be completely
covered.
D. Materials showing signs of previous or jobsite exposure will be rejected.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer’s warrantee, for the equipment specified and
the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for three
years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period
of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating
condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the
equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. T.J. Cope Allied.
2. Cooper B-Line
3. Approved Equal
IFB 7213 3 Section 26 05 36
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Cable Tray
B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that
do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
2.02 LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY
A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C (minimum 100 pounds per foot load rating) ladder type
tray.
B. Material: Aluminum
C. Finish: N/A.
D. Inside Width: As indicated on the Drawings.
E. Inside Depth: Minimum five inches, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
F. Straight section Rung Spacing: nine inches on center.
G. Each rung shall be capable of supporting a 200 pound concentrated load at the center of the
cable tray span and width, over and above the specified cable load, with a safety factor of
1.5.
H. Inside Radius of Fittings: Minimum 24 inches, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
I. Provide clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips,
connectors, nuts, bolts, washers, lock washers, all thread and grounding straps, all of 316
stainless steel.
J. Dividers: Dividers shall be supplied to isolate cables of different voltage ratings that occupy
the same cable tray.
2.03 WARNING SIGNS
A. Permanent warning label shall appear on all straight sections and fittings and shall have the
following wording: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS A WALKWAY, LADDER OR
SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS A MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines,
and as specified herein.
A. Conduits, containing wire or cables entering or leaving the cable tray shall be securely
clamped to the cable tray, but the tray shall not act as the primary means of conduit support.
Conduits or any other raceway containing conductors routed from or to the cable tray system
shall be provided with their own independent supports.
B. Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points to
maintain spacing between supports of 12 feet maximum.
IFB 7213 4 Section 26 05 36
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Cable Tray
C. Use expansion connectors where required. Install bonding jumpers at each at each
expansion splice plate. Bonding jumpers shall be rated for the cable tray ampacity. All tray
systems shall have a continuous bare tinned copper grounding conductor as specified herein.
The bonding jumpers shall be provided in addition to the grounding conductor.
D. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of NEC Article 392.
1) Provide continuity between tray components.
2) Install a bare #1/0 AWG bare tinned copper cable through entire length of each
tray (both medium voltage power and low voltage power and control) and bond to
each cable tray section and bond the tray ground to the electrical system
grounding electrode grid at all ends. If tray system is configured in a loop, then
bond the tray grounding conductor to the power system grounding electrode grid
at two points minimum. The tray ground shall be routed along the outside of the
tray to avoid damage to tray conductors from the ground clamps. Bond the tray
grounding conductor to every enclosure to which any tray conductor is routed.
3) Bond any metallic raceway which routes conductors to or from cable tray to the
cable tray itself and to the cable tray grounding conductor. Route a bonding
conductor from the tray grounding conductor through the raceway routing
conductors to or from the tray system to the enclosure which the tray conductors
are routed. Bond the grounding conductor to the enclosure ground bus.
E. Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before assembly.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
SECTION 26 27 13
POWER METERING AND PROTECTIVE RELAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section of the Specifications describes the requirements for power metering and
protective relays to be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications to which reference
is made in the Related Work paragraph of this Section.
B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted and furnished as an integral part of
equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical
coordination requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 for media and format for shop drawing submittals.
B. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use
on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for
revision.
C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this
Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related
equipment will also be returned without review.
D. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable.
Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., enough
to confirm that the meter or relay provides every specified requirement. Any options or
exceptions shall be clearly indicated.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
a. Manufacturer’s contact address and telephone number for parts and service.
b. Instruction books and/or leaflets
c. Recommended renewal parts list
d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above.
1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest
revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted):
IFB 7213 2 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
1. NEMA/ISCI – 109 Transient Overvoltage Withstand Test
2. IEEE Std. 472/ANSI C37.90A Surge Withstand Capability Tests
3. IEC 255.4 Surge Withstand Capability Tests
B. All meters, relays and associated equipment shall comply with the requirements of the
National Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable.
C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual
device paragraphs.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a
minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of
installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this
requirement.
B. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space or location shown on the Drawings. Equipment
which does not fit within the space or location is not acceptable.
C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide warrantees, including the manufacturer’s warrantee, for the equipment specified and
the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for three
years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period
of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating
condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the
equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Metering and Protective Relay Enclosures
1. Enclosures for meters and protective relays located within the associated equipment shall
have the same Enclosure Types as specified for the associated equipment.
B. Settings
1. Obtain relay settings from existing relays.
2.02 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM (MP4)
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Multilin 869
2. No equal
IFB 7213 3 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that
do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
C. Minimum ANSI Functions
ANSI
Function Description Setting
14 Speed Switch [Enabled] [Not Used]
19 Reduced Voltage Start [Enabled] [Not Used]
27 Under voltage [<85%] [Not Used]
32 Jam/Acceleration [Enabled] [Not Used]
37 Undercurrent/Under voltage [Per motor vendor
recommendation] [Not Used]
38 Bearing Temperature [Enabled] [Not Used]
46 Current Unbalance [Enabled] [Not Used]
47 Voltage Unbalance / Phase
Reversal / Phase Failure
[Enabled] [Not Used]
49 Stator Temperature [Enabled] [Not Used]
50 Instantaneous Current According to protective device
coordination study
50G Instantaneous Ground
Current
According to protective device
coordination study
51 Overcurrent According to protective device
coordination study
51G Ground Overcurrent According to protective device
coordination study
55 Power Factor [Enabled] [Not Used]
59 Overvoltage [>115%] [Not Used]
66 Starts per Hour Set in field per manufacturer
requirements
81 Frequency [<59.5 Hz; >60.5 Hz] [Not Used]
86 Overcurrent Lockout [Enabled] [Not Used]
87 Differential Protection [Enabled] [Not Used]
IFB 7213 4 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
D. General
1. All circuit boards shall have a harsh environment conformal coating to resist H2S gas and
other corrosive agents, including humidity.
E. Protection and Control
1. Thermal model biased with RTD and negative sequence current feedback
2. Start supervision and inhibit
3. Locked rotor / mechanical jam
a. The relay shall protect the rotor during stall and acceleration. The stall/acceleration
curve shall be voltage compensated and a speed switch input shall be available. The
stator protective thermal model shall combine inputs from positive and negative
sequence currents and RTD winding feedback. The model shall be dynamic in nature
in order to follow the loading and temperature of the motor.
4. Voltage compensated acceleration
5. Under voltage, overvoltage
6. Under frequency
7. Stator differential protection
a. Differential protection using CT inputs (6) from both sides of the machine winding
Voltage transformer inputs shall be used to provide over voltage, under voltage,
voltage phase reversal, over frequency and under frequency functions.
8. Thermal overload
9. Over temperature 12 RTD’s
10. Phase and ground overcurrent
11. Current unbalance
12. Power Elements
a. Power factor
b. Reactive power
c. Under power
d. Reverse active power
e. Over torque
13. Torque protection
IFB 7213 5 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
14. Reduced voltage starting control
F. Monitoring and Metering
1. Metering Functions
a. A, V, W, Var, VA, PF, Hz, kWh, VARh, and kW demand
b. The system shall include complete power metering. An event record shall store the
last 40 events. Sixteen cycles of waveform data shall be stored each time a trip
occurs. A simulation feature shall be available for testing the function.
2. Torque, temperature
3. Event recorder
4. Oscillography and data logger
5. Statistical information and learned motor data
6. Motor starting reports
G. Inputs and Outputs
1. 12 RTDs, programmable
2. Five predefined and four assignable digital inputs
3. Six output relays
4. Four analog inputs
5. Four programmable analog outputs
H. Memory
1. Memory shall be non-volatile and programming shall remain intact upon power failure.
2. Interface software shall be provided in a Windows® format.
I. User Interface
1. A 40-character LCD display and associated keypad to provide access to actual values
and set points.
J. Control Power:
1. Range of available control power: DC: 90-300 VDC; AC: 70-265 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz.
2. LO Range: DC: 20-60 VDC; AC: 20-48 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz.
K. Communication
1. For remote monitoring, the following communication ports shall be provided:
IFB 7213 6 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
a. One Industry Standard port for meter and relay programming using a laptop
computer.
b. One RS-485 port.
c. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port . The connection shall support Modbus TCP,
Ethernet IP and SNMP. Where an integral port is not available, provide a media
protocol converter as specified herein.
d. The manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection.
Upon request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet
Protocol Address (IP Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer.
2. The protocol interface shall implement Ethernet/IP Protocol with the following as
minimum capabilities:
a. Transfer of basic I/O data via User Datagram Protocol (UDP)-based implicit
messaging
b. Uploading and downloading of parameters, set points, programs and recipes via TCP
(i.e., explicit messaging.)
c. Polled, cyclic and change-of-state monitoring via UDP, such as RPI and COS in Allen
Bradley's Control Logix control systems.
d. One-to-one (unicast), one-to-many (multicast), and one-to-all (broadcast)
communication via TCP
e. Use of well-known TCP port number 44818 for explicit messaging and UDP port
number 2222 for implicit messaging.
3. The media protocol converter shall meet the following criteria:
a. The converter shall support 10/100Base-T Ethernet. The serial port speed (baud
rate) shall support 230kbps. The protocol shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP,
DF1, and Modbus RTU/ASCII. Protocol shall be Web Browser configurable.
b. Operating limits shall be 0-60°C, with humidity range minimum of 5-90%. Shock
capability on the serial port shall be ESD +15 kV air GAP meeting IEC 1000-4-2.
Power requirements shall be 9-30VDC at 0.5A minimum.
c. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet.
d. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2, DIN Rail mountable. The
converter shall have DB-9M port connection, with screw terminals, to the input.
e. Converter shall be Digi One IAP, or approved equal.
2.03 REMOTE RTD METERING AND PROTECTION (RRTD)
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. GE Multilin RRTD
IFB 7213 7 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
2. No equal
B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that
do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
C. General
1. All circuit boards shall have a harsh environment conformal coating to resist H2S gas and
other corrosive agents, including humidity.
D. Protection and Control
1. Over temperature
E. Monitoring and Metering
1. Temperature
F. Inputs and Outputs
1. Inputs
a. Six dry contacts, optically isolated, programmable.
G. Outputs
a. Computer interface
H. Control Power:
1. Range of available control power:
a. DC: 50-300 VDC; AC: 40-265 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz., and
b. DC: 20-60 VDC; AC: 20-48 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz.
I. Communications
1. Relay shall have two independent communications ports, one RS 485 port, one front RS
232 port.
2.04 HOURMETER (ETM)
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Veeder-Root Model 779536-201
2. Approved equal
B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that
do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
IFB 7213 8 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
C. Indicator
1. 6 Digit Electromechanical
D. Input 120 VAC (Range ±10%), 60Hz
E. Resolution
1. One-tenth hour
F. Accuracy
1. 0.02%
G. Capacity
1. Up to 9999.9 Hours, automatic recycle at zero.
H. Operating Temperature
1. -40° to +185°F
I. Rectangular 0.95” x 1.45”, screw terminals
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated on drawings. Color schemes shall be as
indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment specified herein shall be factory installed, field adjusted, tested and cleaned as
an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
B. Enclosure Mounting Requirements:
1. Mount all wall-mounted enclosures with an air gap between the enclosure and wall or
mounting plate. Create the air space with slotted channel or several stainless steel
washers which together will make at least a ¼-inch space.
2. Provide mounting feet for floor mounted enclosures.
3. Mount all enclosures with integral welded-on mounting lugs. Drilling through the back of
any enclosure to provide a mounting means is prohibited. Any enclosure drilled to
provide a mounting means will be rejected and shall be replaced with no change in
Contract Time or Price even if the enclosure installation is complete with raceway
attached and conductors installed.
4. Penetrations in any enclosures with a NEMA 3R, 4 or 4X rating which is located in any
wet or damp area or in any process area whether it appears to be dry or not shall be in
the sides or bottom only. Top penetrations in any enclosure located as described herein
shall not be done for any reason, including raceway entries or equipment mounting. Top
penetrations by the Contractor or by the original equipment manufacturer in the factory
IFB 7213 9 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
are all prohibited. Any enclosure with a top penetration located in the areas specified will
be rejected and shall be removed and replaced, even if it requires a return to the factory.
Raceway penetrating the top shall be re-routed and re-installed. All installed conductors
in re-routed raceway shall be removed and re-routed in the re-routed raceway.
Conductors found to be too short to be re-terminated shall be removed back to their
source or load as the case may be, and shall be replaced. Splicing is prohibited and
unacceptable. All specified corrective measures shall be provided with no change in
Contract Time or Price.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 10 Section 26 27 13
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Power Metering and Protective Relays
Page Left Blank Intentionally
IFB 7213 1 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
SECTION 26 29 23
LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install separately enclosed low voltage adjustable frequency drives, together with
appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract
Drawings. The terms, VFD, ASD. AFD and Inverter are used synonymously.
B. All equipment supplied under this Section of the Specifications shall be products of the same
Manufacturer and shall be contained in one single submittal. Partial submittals will be
returned unreviewed. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be
furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related
Work paragraph herein. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the
related equipment will also be returned unreviewed.
C. The minimum requirements for functionality, and control and alarm inputs and outputs, are
specified herein.
D. Coordinate the VFD and the existing motor it drives and provide a certification that the VFD
is suitable for the application.
E. Coordinate location of wire penetrations into VFD to match existing penetrations, VFD
manufacturer to provide a pull section if necessary.
F. The VFD manufacturer shall provide a letter confirming that there is no need to reject
equipment heat loss outdoors and hence no plenum is necessary.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 16000 for related work and electrical coordination requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00
and as specified herein.
B. The final notice to proceed will be provided within 29 days after the bid opening. The VFDs
shall be fully operational by March 1st, 2020. Provide VFD shop drawings within three weeks
of Bid Opening.
C. VFD manufacturer to account for a in person meeting with shop drawing reviewing engineers
and City of Denton Personnel to expedite shop drawing review.
D. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this
Specification but described in the related sections to which reference is made in the Related
Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the
related equipment will be returned unreviewed.
E. Unmarked cut sheets will cause rejection of the submittal and its return for revision.
IFB 7213 2 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
F. All equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, shall be created in the original
equipment manufacturer’s Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear
the original equipment manufacturer’s logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on
file in the original equipment manufacturer’s archive file system. Photocopies of the
Engineer’s ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings.
G. Submit for approval, a manufacturer’s conducted training agenda for all training specified
herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
H. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following:
1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for all components of the drives, including
motor contactors, drive components, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights,
etc. The manufacturer’s name shall be clearly visible on the each cut sheet submitted.
List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project.
Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not
apply.
2. Provide drive performance specifications. Submit a manufacturer’s harmonics test on
each type of drive being furnished. The test may be on a similar unit with identical
components.
3. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings
showing interwiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted
devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the
schematics. The notation “Remote Device” shall not be acceptable. Show wire and
terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings.
4. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each controller or enclosure, with dimensions,
exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc.
5. Schematic diagram, including manufacturer’s selections of component ratings, and CT
and PT ratios.
6. Nameplate schedule
7. UL Listing of the completed assembly
8. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer’s
part number.
9. Conduit entry/exit locations
10. Assembly ratings including:
a. Short-circuit rating
b. Voltage
c. Continuous current
d. Trip curves for each specified product
11. Major component ratings including:
IFB 7213 3 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
a. Voltage
b. Continuous current
c. Interrupting ratings
12. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal
sizes.
13. Instruction and renewal parts books.
I. Certification that the VFD being supplied is suitable for the application.
J. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein.
K. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein.
L. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
a. Manufacturer’s contact address and telephone number for parts and service.
b. Instruction books and/or leaflets
c. Recommended renewal parts list
d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above.
1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be
designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless
otherwise noted):
1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 – 2000 Industrial Control and Systems
2. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC)
3. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
4. IEEE 519 (latest revision) - Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of
static Power Converters
5. UL 489 – Standard for Safety for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
6. UL 508C – Power Conversion Equipment
7. NEMA ICS 2 – Starters, Contactors, Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 200 Volts
AC or 750 Volts DC.
8. NEMA ICS 6 – Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
9. NEMA ICS 7.0 – Industrial Controls & Systems for VFD
IFB 7213 4 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
10. IEC 61200-2 – Vibration Levels
11. IEC 61800-02 and -3 – Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems
a. Fulfill all EMC immunity requirements
12. EN 50082-1 and -2 – Test Standards
B. In the case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed
documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.
C. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the
Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum
period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with
similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within
the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer and assembled at the
factory. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and “brand labeled” will not be
acceptable.
C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current
production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation
shall not be used.
D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which
does not fit within the space is not acceptable.
E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified.
F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which
does not fit within the space is not acceptable.
1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the
Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals.
Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will
not be permitted.
B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two
copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and
shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer.
C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be
bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately.
D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within
seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven
calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite until such
IFB 7213 5 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment with no change in the
Contract Price or Schedule. Payment will not be approved for equipment stored off site.
E. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and
operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location,
until equipment is placed in service.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer’s warranty, for the equipment specified and
the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for three
years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period
of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating
condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the
equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Eaton
2. GE/ABB
3. Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley
4. No equal
B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that
do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
C. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be of the same manufacturer.
2.02 RATINGS
A. Service Conditions
1. The Drawings indicate the approximate horsepower and intended control scheme of the
motor driven equipment. Provide the VFD, auxiliary components and equipment where
shown or specified, and matched to the motors and control equipment supplied, in
compliance with the NEC. All variations necessary to accommodate the existing motors
and controls shall be made without extra cost to the Owner.
2. The service voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. The overall short circuit
withstand and interrupting rating of the VFD and devices shall be equal to or greater than
the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately
upstream of the adjustable frequency drives. Adjustable frequency drives shall be tested,
and UL labeled for the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch
circuit protective device.
IFB 7213 6 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
3. The drive shall be UL and cUL listed and not require external fuses. The drive shall also
be CE labeled and comply with standards EN 61800-3 for EMC compliance and EN
61800-2 for low voltage compliance.
4. The drive shall be capable of operating in compliance with IEEE 519-1992.
5. Input power: Selectable for 200-240 or 380-480 VAC, 3-phase power input.
6. Input frequency: 57 to 63 Hz.
7. Ambient temperature: -10°C to 50°C (Enclosed).
8. Elevation: Up to 3300 feet above mean sea level.
9. Relative humidity: Up to 90% non-condensing.
B. The VFD output shall be 100% rated current continuous, suitable for operation of the driven
equipment over a 30:1 speed range without overloading or low speed cogging. Drives shall
be capable of a continuous overload up to 110% rated current and a maximum 150%
overload for 1 minute. Starting torque shall be matched to the load.
C. Rated output voltage shall be programmable for motor ratings from 180 to 240 volts, or from
320 to 480 volts.
D. The Drive shall be able to operate after a voltage dip below 175 VAC on 230 VAC input
power and 310 VAC on 460 VAC input power for 15 milliseconds at 85% full load current
without any disturbances in output power delivered to the load.
E. The VFD output voltage shall vary with frequency to maintain a constant volts/hertz ratio up
to base speed (60 hertz) output. Constant or linear voltage output shall be supplied at
frequencies greater than base speed (60 hertz).
F. The VFD overload current rating shall be 110% of rated current for one minute for variable
torque applications and 150% of rated current for constant torque applications, in an ambient
temperature of 104ºF.
G. The VFD shall have an efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds 95% for VFDs below 15
HP and 97% for drives 15 HP and above. The efficiency shall exceed 90% at 50% speed and
load.
H. The true power factor shall be 0.95 or better at any speed, measured at drive input terminals.
I. The voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 1% of rated value, no load to full load.
J. Output Frequency Drift shall be not more than plus or minus 0.5% from setpoint.
K. VFDs shall withstand five cycle transient voltage dips of up to 15% of rated voltage without an
undervoltage trip or fault shutdown, while operating a variable torque load.
L. Line notching, transients, and harmonics on the incoming line shall not affect drive
performance.
M. The VFDs shall meet IEC 61200-2 for vibration levels.
IFB 7213 7 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
N. The VFDs shall be able to withstand voltage variations of -15% to +10% and imbalance up to
3% without tripping or affecting drive performance.
O. For additional requirements and construction notes, refer to the Drawings.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. General
1. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current
ratings of devices, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components
and assemblies; and other required details.
2. Control units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings.
3. Nameplates
a. External
1) Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less
than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by 2-1/2-in, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be
316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates
for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive
strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/2”, or equal. Prior to installing the
nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until
all residue has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable.
2) Provide a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's
name, shop order number and general information. Cubicle nameplates shall be
mounted on the front face, on the rear panel and inside the assembly, visible
when the rear panel is removed.
3) Provide permanent warning signs as follows:
a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors.
b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock - Disconnect Power Before Opening or
Working On This Unit" on main power disconnect.
b. Internal
1) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays,
pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification,
corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
c. Special
1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates
shall be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white
letters.
4. Control Devices and Indicators
a. All operating control devices, indicators, and instruments shall be securely mounted
on the panel door. All controls and indicators shall be 30mm, corrosion resistant,
IFB 7213 8 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
NEMA 4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic. Booted control devices are
not acceptable. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and
indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as
specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment
requirements.
b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall
incorporate a push-to-test feature. Lens colors shall be as follows:
1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED.
2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN.
3) Amber for FAIL.
4) Blue for READY
5) White for POWER ON.
c. Mode selector switches (HAND-OFF-AUTO, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE, etc.) shall be as
shown on the Drawings. Units shall have the number of positions and contact
arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote
monitoring.
d. Pushbuttons, shall be as follows:
1) Red for STOP, Valve OPEN, Breaker OPEN and mushroom Red for
EMERGENCY STOP.
2) Green for START, Valve CLOSE and Breaker CLOSE.
3) Black for RESET.
e. Furnish nameplates for each device. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black
lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. Device
mounted nameplates are not acceptable.
f. The manufacturer shall not remove, reuse, alter, or replace original equipment
nameplates or equipment tags associated with equipment or components supplied by
the manufacturer’s suppliers and sub-suppliers.
g. Control and Instrument Power Transformers
1) Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings.
Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25%
spare capacity. Provide a load calculation showing that the sizing of the control
power transformer complies with this requirement.
2) Control power transformers shall be 120 volts grounded secondary. Primary side
of the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer
secondary shall be solidly grounded while the other leg shall be fused.
5. A failure alarm with horn and beacon light shall be provided when required or specified.
Silence and Reset buttons shall be furnished.
IFB 7213 9 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
6. Where specified or shown on the Drawings, a six-digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter
shall be installed on the face of each motor starter. Meter shall be as specified in Section
26 27 13.
7. Each VFD shall have an HMCP or thermal magnetic circuit breaker, as shown on the
Drawings, to provide a disconnect means. VFDs above 75HP shall have a solid-state
circuit breaker. Disconnecting means shall have a through the door lockable handle,
mechanically interlocked with the enclosure door. The disconnect shall not be mounted
on the door. The handle position shall indicate ON, OFF, and TRIPPED condition. The
handle shall have provisions for padlocking in the OFF position with at least three (3)
padlocks. Interlocks shall prevent unauthorized opening or closing of the VFD door with
the disconnect handle in the ON position. Door handle interlock shall be defeatable only
by qualified maintenance personnel.
8. Each VFD shall have the application specific, Hand-Remote-Off and Auto-Manual
selector switches for local and remote Auto-Manual operation, provisions to accept a
remote dry contact closure to start and stop the drive with the drive control system in the
AUTO mode, provisions to accept a 4-20 mA dc input signal for remote speed control,
and other input, output and communications interfaces as shown on the Drawings.
Inputs shall be isolated at the drive and active with the drive control system in the AUTO
mode.
9. Each VFD shall be microprocessor based with an LED and LCD display to monitor
operating conditions. The Drive display section shall allow for local operation and setting
of Drive function codes and display fault indication and reasons associated with the fault.
The LED display shall offer nine different display settings and the LCD shall have the
capacity to display five lines of information at a time. The keypad shall be capable of
copying, uploading and downloading drive function codes. Displays and settings shall be
as specified for each of the horsepower ranges of VFDs.
B. Enclosures
1. General
a. Each enclosure shall incorporate a removable back panel, and side panels, on which
control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to the enclosure
with collar studs for wall mounted enclosures, and 316 SS hardware for free standing
enclosures.
b. All free-standing enclosures shall be provided with feet of the same construction as
the enclosure.
c. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a panel
mounted cable driven operating mechanism.
d. Back panel shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self-tapping screws shall
not be used to mount any components.
e. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior shall have a
bonding stud.
f. Each enclosure shall be provided with a documentation pocket on the inner door.
g. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts.
IFB 7213 10 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
h. Provide manufacturer’s window kits where shown on the Drawings.
i. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final
coat of weatherproof white paint.
j. All enclosures shall be padlockable.
C. Cooling Fans
1. Fans shall be furnished for VFDs, as required by the manufacturer, to provide air
circulation and cooling. The fan shall be controlled by a thermostat and shall operate only
when the drive is “ON” and for a cool-down period after the drive has stopped. Otherwise
the fan shall not run when the drive is “OFF”. Louvers, if provided, shall have externally
removable filters. The filter shall be metallic and washable.
2. Fan motors shall be protected by an input circuit breaker. Metal squirrel cage ball
bearing, three phase fan motors with 10-year design life shall be used in the drive design.
Plastic muffin fans are not acceptable. Fan power shall be obtained from a tap on the
main control power transformer.
3. A “loss of cooling” fault shall be furnished. In the event of clogged filters or fan failure, the
drive shall produce an alarm and then, in a predetermined time, shut down safely without
electronic component failure.
4. Redundant fans shall be provided in the drive design as backup in the event of fan
failure.
D. Internal Wiring
1. Wiring: Tinned stranded copper, minimum size No. 14 AWG, with 600 Volt, 90-degree C,
flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation, NEMA Class II, Type B wiring. Line
side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device.
2. Identification: Numbered sleeve type wire markers at each termination point, color
coding per NEMA standards and the NEC. Foreign voltage control wiring shall be yellow.
3. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the
Drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing
origination and destination of each wire. The marking shall be permanent, non-smearing,
solvent-resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal.
4. All wiring shall be neatly bundled with ty-raps and supported to wire way supports.
Control wiring shall be bundled separately from power wiring. In addition, low signal
wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control
wiring.
E. Field Installed Internal Wiring
1. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie
wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. In
addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest
of the control wiring.
2. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number to match the
existing terminations as shown on the drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat
IFB 7213 11 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. The marking shall be a permanent, non-
smearing, solvent-resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal
3. In general, all conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom
of the enclosure directly below the area in which the conductors are to be terminated, or
from the top if shown on the Drawings. Conduits shall not enter the side unless approved
in writing by the Owner/Engineer.
F. Control Relays
1. Control relays shall be 300-volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, housed in a
transparent polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance with UL Standard 508 for
motor controller duty. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 amperes resistive, 1/4 HP at
120 VAC, operating temperature -10 to +55°C. Provide spare N.O. & N.C. contacts.
Relays shall be equipped with neon coil indicator light. Timing relays shall be 300 Volt,
solid state type, with rotary switch to select the timing range. All relays provided in the
equipment shall be NEMA rated. IEC rated relays are not acceptable.
2.04 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) FOR MOTORS LARGER THAN 60 HP
A. General
1. Each drive shall be a minimum 18-pulse, IGBT based sinusoidal PWM type AC Drive
capable of operating a squirrel cage induction motor with a full load current equal to or
less than the continuous output of the Drive. The drive panel shall incorporate a phase
shift transformer and a minimum 18 pulse converter. Regulator technology shall be
software configurable to either V/Hz (single or multi motor) mode or Sensorless Dynamic
Torque Vector mode (single motor). Full, closed loop flux vector control shall be
available for constant torque applications. In V/Hz mode at base speed (60 hertz) and
below, the Drive shall operate in constant volts per hertz mode. Above base speed (60
hertz), the Drive may selectively operate in either a constant volt per hertz mode or a
constant voltage extended frequency mode.
2. The VFD shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The VFD shall be able to determine
the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping.
3. The Drive shall maintain set frequency regardless of load fluctuations.
4. The Drive shall be able to operate after a voltage dip below 175 VAC on 230 VAC input
power and 310 VAC on 460 VAC input power for 15 milliseconds at 85% full load current
without any disturbances in output power delivered to the load. If power exceeds this
level, six different modes or active and inactive restart modes shall be available. The
decrease in motor speed shall be adjustable in the event of a momentary power outage.
5. The Drive shall have a programmable 10 minute delay on start up after any fault, reset
and changing of control mode from off to remote/hand.
6. The Drive shall be able to transition after startup from the Hand position to the Remote
position without any disruptions.
7. The Drive shall have a programmable start frequency, adjustable from 0.1 to 60 hertz,
with a 1 hertz resolution and with a holding time adjustable from 0.1 to 10 seconds.
8. The Drive shall have IGBT soft switching and a low noise control power supply system to
reduce the noise from the drive.
IFB 7213 12 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
9. The Drive shall have a frequency bias (starting frequency) function programmable from -
120 to +120 Hz of maximum frequency, with 0.1 Hz resolution.
10. Drive frequency gain shall be programmable from 0-200%, with 0.1% resolution.
11. The Drive shall be capable of motor slowdown or stop by selectable regenerative (to the
DC link) dynamic braking while following one of the four selectable deceleration ramps,
and control the braking torque by setting its value from 0, 20 to 150%, 999 (no limit) of
Drive rating. It shall also be capable of changing the rate of deceleration automatically by
stopping the braking action long enough to avoid Drive over-voltage trip.
12. The Drive shall be able to start into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and shall
smoothly accelerate or decelerate to the set point without experiencing component
damage.
13. The Drive shall can stop by selectable DC injection braking. It shall be adjustable from 0
to 100% braking level and have a programmable starting frequency for DC braking (0.2-
60 hertz) and programmable braking time (0.1 to 30.0 seconds).
14. The Drive shall have a start Frequency Setting that incorporates a Holding Time at the
Frequency Setting, adjustable up to 10 seconds in duration.
15. The Drive shall provide at least three selectable skip frequencies with programmable
band widths, adjustable 0 to 30 Hz, which shall not allow operation at or near mechanical
resonance speeds.
16. The Drive shall provide selectable slip compensation, which shall sense output current
and adjust output
17. The Drive shall have Droop operation, balancing drooping characteristics to speed and
load variations. This function shall be adjustable from –9.9 to 0.0 Hz.
18. The Drive shall have a selectable Torque Limiting function for both motoring and braking
that shall sense an overload condition and shall reduce frequency and current temporarily
until the load reaches acceptable levels. If the overload condition is not settled in the
proper amount of time, the Drive shall trip on overload. The Torque Limiting shall be
programmable from 20-150% of Drive rated motor torque (30 HP an below) and from 20-
150% of Drive rated motor torque (40 HP and above), with 1% resolution.
19. The Drive shall have a selectable electronic inverse time thermal overload function as
required by NEC and UL Standard 991 for an AC Induction Motor (Refer to applicable
codes for specific installation requirements). The overload shall be programmable from
20 - 135% of Drive rated current.
20. The Drive shall have an over-voltage protection function that operates if supply voltage
rises above rated value or by motor’s regeneration.
21. The Drive shall treat short circuits in either the output load or the output module as an
over-current.
22. If the Drive heat sink temperature exceeds approximately 100ºC, the Drive shall shut
down on over temperature fault.
23. The Drive shall provide output ground fault protection.
IFB 7213 13 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
B. Control and Monitor Interface
1. The Control shall have a graphic back-lit liquid crystal display (LCD) which can be
configured to display frequency, current, function code set points, or drive status and fault
codes. It shall display lines with characters of text, providing display at a minimum of:
a. Monitor
b. Operate
c. Parameter setup
d. Actual parameter values
e. Active faults
f. Fault history
g. LCD adjustments
2. Setups and Adjustments
a. Start command from keypad, remote or communications port
b. Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port
c. Motor direction selection
d. Maximum and minimum speed limits
e. Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges
f. Critical (skip) frequency avoidance
g. Torque limit
h. Multiple attempt restart function
i. Multiple preset speeds adjustment
j. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection
k. Programmable analog output
l. DC brake current magnitude and time
m. PID process controller
3. System Interfaces
a. Remote manual/auto
b. Remote start/stop
c. Remote forward/reverse
IFB 7213 14 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
d. Remote preset speeds
e. Remote external trip
f. Remote fault reset
g. Process control speed reference interface, 4-20mA DC
h. Potentiometer and 1-10VDC speed reference interface
i. Programming interface port.
C. Outputs – A minimum of two discrete programmable digital outputs, one programmable open
collector output, and one programmable analog output shall be provided, with the following
available at minimum:
1. Programmable relay outputs with one set of Form C contacts for each, selectable with the
following available at minimum:
a. Fault
b. Run
c. Ready
d. Reversed
e. Jogging
f. At speed
g. Torque Limit Supervision
h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded
i. Over-temperature
2. Programmable open collector output with available 24VDC power supply and selectable
with the following available at minimum:
a. Fault
b. Run
c. Ready
d. Reversed
e. Jogging
f. At speed
g. Torque Limit Supervision
h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded
IFB 7213 15 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
i. Over-temperature
3. Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at minimum:
a. Motor current
b. Output frequency
c. Frequency reference
d. Motor speed
e. Motor torque
f. Motor power
g. Motor voltage
h. DC-bus voltage
i. AI1 (Analog Input 1)
j. AI2 (Analog Input 2)
2.05 METERING AND PROTECTIVE RELAYS
A. Furnish where shown on the Drawings, a Motor Protection System (MP4), as shown on the
Drawings, and as specified in Section 26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays.
2.06 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL INTERFACE
A. General: All control and interconnection points from the equipment to the plant control and
monitoring system shall be brought to a separate connection box. No field connections shall
be made directly to the equipment control devices. Functions to be brought out shall be as
specified in the Instrumentation Divisions.
B. Discrete control or status functions shall be form C relays with contacts rated at 120 volts AC.
Analog signals shall be isolated from each other.
C. Equipment functions to be directly interfaced to the Plant Control and Monitoring System,
shall be designed for operation with an Ethernet Connection.
D. The equipment manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection.
Upon request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol
Address (IP Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer.
E. Refer to the Instrumentation Divisions for monitored parameters.
F. Communication
1. For remote monitoring, one of the following communication capabilities shall be provided:
a. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and
SNMP protocols.
IFB 7213 16 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
b. One media protocol converter, interfacing the provided equipment to a 10/100BaseT
Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP.
2. The protocol interface shall implement the following:
a. All data shall be available and/or mirrored within the Modbus 4x or "Holding Register"
memory area.
b. Register 4x00001 shall exist and be readable to allow simple, predictable "comm
tests".
3. The media protocol converter shall meet the following criteria:
a. The converter shall support 10/100Base-T Ethernet. The serial port speed (baud
rate) shall support 230kbps. The protocol shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP,
DF1, and Modbus RTU/ASCII. Protocol shall be Web Browser configurable.
b. Operating limits shall be 0-60 degrees C, with humidity range minimum of 5-90
percent. Shock capability on the serial port shall be ESD +15 kV air GAP meeting
IEC 1000-4-2. Power requirements shall be 9-30VDC at 0.5A minimum.
c. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet.
d. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2, DIN Rail mountable. The
converter shall have DB-9M port connection, with screw terminals, to the input.
e. Converter shall be Digi One IAP, or approved equal.
2.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide the following spare parts:
1. Three – Control fuses of type used.
2. Three – Power fuses of type used.
B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the
exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part
number
2.08 FACTORY TESTING
A. The VFDs shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be
given the manufacturer’s routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure
the workability and reliable operation of the equipment.
B. Prior to factory testing, submit confirmation that the manufacturer has checked and verifies
that all selections and settings required by the Existing Power System Study have been
performed.
C. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable
requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards.
IFB 7213 17 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
D. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as
far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into
the boards to check for proper operation.
2.09 WITNESS TESTING
A. The Owner/Engineer will witness the Factory Tests for each of the following Equipment Units:
1. Equipment Unit I.D. ____HSPS VFD-3______
2. Equipment Unit I.D. ____HSPS VFD-4______
B. The number of Owner/Engineer persons witnessing the tests will be two persons.
C. Under no circumstances, will the equipment be approved for shipment, nor will the equipment
be accepted by the Owner, if witness testing is specified, and the equipment is shipped
without the testing being witnessed.
D. If a test must be re-run due to failure in meeting the specified requirements, the witness
expenses for the re-test shall be borne by the Manufacturer or Vendor. Retesting on the
same trip shall be only at the option of the Owner/Engineer.
E. The Owner/Engineer, who is witnessing the testing, shall approve all travel arrangements,
including the airline selected, flight times, hotel selected, testing agenda, etc.
F. An interpreter/guide shall be provided if English is not widely spoken, or in areas where
English is not the native language.
G. The Owner/Engineer shall have direct communications with the person who is responsible for
local arrangements and has the authority to pay for those expenses prior to leaving the
[Owner’s Project] location, or other designated location.
H. Submit the testing agenda for approval at least 30 days prior to the test date, or the test date
shall be rescheduled, with no change in the Contract price or time. The agenda shall include
a detailed list of all tests to be done.
I. Where travel is over night, testing shall not start on the arrival day.
J. Travel Documents
1. Obtain Letters of Invitation and other documentation required to obtain a visa into the
host country. Obtain the visa itself and directly pay for the cost of a visa service and the
fee that the host country charges for the visa.
2. Use a visa service located in the [XXX] area to handle the Owner/Engineer’s passports
who are traveling to witness the test, and to pay all expenses for the visa service
company and the cost of the visa required by the host country.
K. Owner/Engineer Persons Travel Expenses
1. Owner/Engineer representatives shall not have to provide for any out of pocket expenses
related to the trip, transportation, meals or incidentals that would require later
reimbursement.
IFB 7213 18 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
2. Provide, and pay for, all air travel fare, including ground shuttle or taxi, to and from the
Owner/Engineer’s office or residence. Air fare inside the Continental United States shall
be non-stop if available, Coach Class or better, from DFW Airport. Air fare outside the
Continental United States shall be non-stop if available, Business Class or better, from
DFW Airport.
3. Ground transportation at any destination shall be provided by the host Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM). The Owner/Engineer persons shall not be required to
drive in a foreign country under any circumstances.
4. Provide for hotel, meals, travel and incidentals to be paid for by the host OEM at the
testing location, whose equipment is being tested. The host OEM shall have the authority
to resolve any expense problems. If the Hotel offers restaurants, those charges shall be
covered in the Hotel expenses. If meals are not offered at the Hotel, transportation to
restaurants and the cost of those meals, shall be provided by the host OEM.
5. Access to an international cell phone shall be provided while out of the Continental
United States.
6. Access to the internet shall be provided while out of the Continental United States.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's field engineer to assist in
the installation and start-up of each type of the equipment specified below for a period of not
less than two working days, with not less than one working day per VFD. The manufacturer's
field engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance in general assembly of the
equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components
contained therein.
3.02 INSTALLER’S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Provide an installer who shall be specialized in installing low voltage adjustable frequency
drives with minimum five years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be
submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project.
3.03 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment.
B. Extend existing housekeeping pads as required for the installation of the VFD. Housekeeping
pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation.
C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface.
D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install.
E. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings.
IFB 7213 19 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
B. Install required safety labels.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage.
B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are
specified in manufacturer's instructions.
3.06 FIELD ADJUSTING
A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and
electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions.
B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified
representative of the manufacturer, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated
study of the system. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have
been Approved by the Owner/Engineer, printed and attached to the equipment prior to
energizing of the equipment.
3.07 FIELD TESTING
A. The VFD manufacturer’s field engineer shall perform all electrical field tests recommended by
the manufacturer and make all control adjustments required for the individual application of
the drive.
B. A minimum of two startups will be required by the VFD manufacturer before substantial
completion.
C. The VFD once tested and adjusted shall be functional and with no issues for two weeks
before the second VFD can taken out of service.
D. The VFD manufacturer will also demonstrate proper interfacing with the existing PLC system.
If necessary the PLC and HMI programming will be provided by the City of Denton.
E. Submit the results of all specified tests to the Engineer/Owner within five business days for
approval and for their permanent records.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt,
dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes,
vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.
3.09 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION
A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer.
If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be
replaced.
3.10 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative who shall
certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, including all settings
IFB 7213 20 Section 26 29 23
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
designated in the Existing Power System Study, and tested in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification.
3.11 TRAINING
A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance
of the adjustable frequency drives furnished under this Section.
B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one eight-hour
day.
C. The cost of the training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in
the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly
related to the system being supplied.
D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include
specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project.
E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training
program shall include instructions on the assembly, motor starters, protective devices,
metering, and other major components.
F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner’s use.
END OF SECTION
IFB 7213 1 Section 26 41 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Demolition
SECTION 26 41 19
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish, install and test all equipment, wiring and appurtenances as may be required to
perform the electrical demolition shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Make all required field verifications specified and/or as necessary to determine all the
requirements as specified for the continued operation of the Owners facilities during the
construction process prior to bidding. All costs and time required to perform the work shall be
included in the Contract Price and Schedule.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical
coordination requirements.
1.03 SCHEDULES
A. Schedule all required shutdowns with the Owner/Engineer to coordinate the system
demolition and installation of temporary facilities with the Owner’s operational requirements.
1.04 STANDARDS
A. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications
and demolition shall be provided in accordance with:
1. American National Standards Institute / National Fire Protection Association
(ANSI/NFPA), No. 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 590 – Temporary
Wiring.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on the Drawings.
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
Discrepancies shall be reported to the Owner/Engineer before disturbing the existing
installation.
D. Beginning demolition, signifies the existing conditions have been accepted and warrants that
service to equipment and items not scheduled or indicated for removal will be maintained.
Temporary shutdowns and demolishing of any equipment shall be arranged and approved by
the Owner to not interrupt critical process operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
IFB 7213 2 Section 26 41 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Demolition
A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work shall be as specified in individual
Sections.
2.02 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide temporary electrical conductors and raceway as required to maintain continued
operation in accordance with the Owner’s operational requirements and meeting the
requirements of the NEC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors and ceilings scheduled for removal.
B. Coordinate utility service outages with the Utility Company. Continuous service to operating
equipment shall be provided as required by the Owner’s process operational needs which
may include the temporary use of portable generation as specified herein.
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use
personnel experienced in such operations.
D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete
and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain
permission from the Owner/Engineer at least one week in advance, before partially or
completely disabling system.
E. The Owner’s process operations shall continue without interruption throughout the project
demolition and construction as required by the Owner and/or regulating bodies including but
not limited to the EPA, and State or Local authorities having jurisdiction.
1. As required to meet the Owner’s process requirements, provide on-site generation with
the capacity and voltage required by the Owner’s power system to prevent process
interruptions unacceptable to the Owner. Include all engine-generator fluids and fuel and
rental expenses for the duration required by the work in the Contract Price.
2. Examine the Contract Documents and make any site visits necessary, including
interviews with Owner’s Personnel to determine what process are required to remain in
service prior to bidding. Include all costs to keep the required process in operation
including all materials, labor, expenses required by the electric Utility serving the project
site and on-site generation in the Contract Price and Schedule. The determination of the
requirements for continued process operations prior to bidding is required. No increase
in Contract Time or Price will be allowed if this requirement is not met.
3. If failure to provide adequate power to keep the process in operation which causes a
regulatory body to levy fines against the Owner, Owner shall be reimbursed. No increase
in Contract Price for such expenses will be accepted.
3.02 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Remove, relocate and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
B. Remove abandoned wiring from the load to the source of supply.
IFB 7213 3 Section 26 41 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Demolition
C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces to match the existing
surfaces.
D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
serving them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which
are not removed.
E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. Remove all
associated conduit and conductors and the supporting means. Patch the wall, floor, or other
surfaces where the equipment and associated raceway were attached to match the existing
surfaces.
F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices associated with mechanical equipment that has
been removed. Remove all associated raceway and conductors. Patch the wall, floor, or
other surfaces where the electrical devices and associated raceway were attached to match
the existing surfaces.
G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
H. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide
access to panels as appropriate.
I. Where the demolition or revision of any portion of a raceway or box in the raceway system, in
classified area, causes the raceway system of the area to no longer comply with the
classification or specification requirements of the area, provide and install such boxes,
fittings, etc. as may be necessary to return the raceway system to compliance with the
classification of the area and with these specifications.
J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new work. Using
existing raceways is acceptable where extension of existing raceways is shown or specified
only if the existing raceways are in accordance with the specifications for the new raceways.
Replace existing raceways which do not meet these specifications.
K. All work shall be done in an orderly and careful manner. Hold noise, dust, and vibration to a
minimum and conduct the work to avoid any damage to the surroundings. Remove all items
and parts as shown and noted on the Drawings and as otherwise may be required to be
removed to complete the work as specified.
L. Salvaged Equipment and Materials
1. The Owner shall have the right to retain any or all electrical and instrumentation
equipment shown or specified to be removed from the site.
2. Prior to starting demolition, the Contractor and Owner/Engineer shall jointly visit the areas
of demolition and the Owner/Engineer will designate those items that are to remain the
property of the Owner.
3. Equipment and material designated by the Owner to remain the property of the Owner
shall be removed from the work area and transported to a designated location on the site
and stored for the Owner’s use. Store on wood runners raised above the surrounding
grade and cover with weather resistant covering and tie securely or store inside Owner
furnished storage as directed by the Owner/Engineer.
IFB 7213 4 Section 26 41 19
Lake Ray Roberts WTP VFD Replacement Electrical Demolition
4. Take necessary precautions in removing Owner designated property to prevent damage
during the demolition process. Remove steel structural members by unbolting, cutting
welds, or cutting rivet heads and punching shanks through holes. Do not use a cutting
torch to separate the Owner’s equipment or material unless approved by the
Owner/Engineer.
5. If possible, items to be salvaged shall be removed in one piece or in a manner that does
not impact their reuse. Loose components may be removed separately. Controls and
electrical equipment may be removed from the equipment and handled separately. Large
units may be handled separately.
M. Material removed from the construction site during demolition, and any equipment not
otherwise designated to remain the property of the Owner in accordance with the pre-
demolition identification process shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
promptly removed from the construction site.
N. Refurbish and replace any existing facility to be left in place which is damaged by the
demolition operations with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. The repair of such
damage shall result in the parts being returned to such a condition which is at least equal to
that found at the start of the Work.
3.03 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace
damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed
circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
END OF SECTION